LEVEL 2 FALL
SUPPLEMENTARY
MATERIALS PACK
2023-2024
1
2
CONTENTS
GRAMMAR SUPPLEMENTARY MATERIALS
PAGE
Gram. Supp. 4_Focus 1_Impersonal _IT .........................................................................................................6
Gram. Supp. 5_Focus 2_Present continuous temporary, changing situations - negative attitude .................8
Gram. Supp. 6 Focus 2 Will & Be Going to .....................................................................................................10
Gram. Supp. 7_Focus 2_Double Comparatives ..............................................................................................13
Gram. Supp. 8_Focus 2_Repeated Comparatives ..........................................................................................15
Gram. Supp. 9_Focus 2_The Same As ............................................................................................................17
Gram. Supp. 10_Focus 2_ Superlative Adjectives with _One of Some of Among etc. ...................................19
Gram. Supp. 11_Focus 2_Present Perfect with the Superlative Forms of Adjectives ....................................22
Gram. Supp. 12_Focus 2_ If Clauses Zero Type .............................................................................................23
Gram. Supp. 13_Focus 2_The Use of WHOM and WHOSE in Relative Clauses .............................................25
Gram. Supp. 14_Focus 2_The Use of WHEN and WHY in Relative Clauses ...................................................30
Gram. Supp. 15_Focus 2_ Indirect Questions ................................................................................................32
Gram. Supp. 16_Focus 2_Noun Clauses with THAT ........................................................................................35
Gram. Supp. 17_Focus 2_Quantifiers 1 (several, plenty of, etc.) ....................................................................37
Gram. Supp. 18_Focus 2_Quantifiers 2 (All-most-both-none of, etc.) ...........................................................40
Gram. Supp. 19_Focus 2_Quantifiers 3 (hardly any-not many-much, etc.) ...42
Gram. Supp. 20A_Focus 2_Quantifiers 4 (no) ............................................................................................... 44
Gram. Supp. 20B_Focus 2_Subject-Verb Agreement .....................................................................................45
Gram. Supp. 21_Focus 2_(the) other _ another .............................................................................................48
Gram. Supp. 22_Focus 2_Modals 1 (permission - may) .................................................................................50
Gram. Supp. 23_Focus 2_Modals 2 (don't need to - supposed to, etc.) .........................................................52
Gram. Supp. 24_Focus 2_Question Words .....................................................................................................56
Gram. Supp. 31_What about-How about-Could .............................................................................................62
Gram. Supp. 35_Focus 3_Even If ....................................................................................................................67
Gram. Supp. 37_Focus 3_In case & In Case of ................................................................................................68
Gram. Supp. 44_Level 2_Prefixes _ Suffixes: ..................................................................................................69
Gram. Supp. 45_Level 2_Prefixes _ Suffixes_Practice (WORKSHEET) ............................................................74
Defining Relative Clauses WORKSHEET ..........................................................................................................77
Grammar Supplementary Materials Answer Key ..........................................................................................80
READING SUPPLEMENTARY MATERIALS
Read. Supp. 2 _Level1_Reference ........................... .......................................................................................98
Read. Supp. 5 Level2 Guessing Meaning From Context 1 ..............................................................................103
Read. Supp. 6 Level2 Guessing Meaning From Context 2 ..............................................................................107
Read. Supp. 8_Level2_Scanning .......................................................................................................................117
Read. Supp. 9_Level2_Skimming ......................................................................................................................125
Read. Supp. 10_Level2_Inference ....................................................................................................................130
Read. Supp. 11_Level2_Note-taking .................................................................................................................135
Read. Supp. 16 Reading Revision Material B1 ..................................................................................................146
Reading Supplementary Materials Answer Key ..............................................................................................167
WRITING SUPPLEMENTARY MATERIALS
Writ. Supp. 1_Sentence Structure 1 ..................................................................................................................179
Writ. Supp. 2_Sentence Structure 2 ..................................................................................................................194
Writ. Supp. 3_Introduction to Paragraph and Developing Ideas .......................................................................199
Writ. Supp. 4_Paragraph Organization And Topic Sentence ................ .............................................................205
Writ. Supp. 5_Supporting Sentence ...................................................................................................................213
Writ. Supp. 6_Concluding Sentence ...................................................................................................................217
Writ. Supp. 7_Topic And Concluding Sentence Practice (Worksheet) ................................................................223
Writ. Supp. 8_Writing-Unity ...............................................................................................................................233
Writ. Supp. 9_Writing-Cohesion And Coherence ...............................................................................................240
Writ. Supp. 11_Process Paragraph .....................................................................................................................251
Writ. Supp. 12_Advantage Paragraph .................................................................................................................259
Writ. Supp. 13_Disadvantage Paragraph .............................................................................................................267
LISTENING SUPPLEMENTARY MATERIALS
List. Supp. 1_Identifying Specific Information ......................................................................................................273
List. Supp. 2_ Identifying the Topic .......................................................................................................................276
List. Supp. 3_Listening for the Gist ............. ..........................................................................................................277
List. Supp. 4_Key Factual Information (Note-Taking 1) .........................................................................................280
List. Supp. 5_ Basic Inferences ...............................................................................................................................283
List. Supp. 6_Presentation _ Lecture Structure 1 ...................................................................................................286
Listening Supplementary Materials Answer Key ..................................................................................................292
SPEAKING SUPPLEMENTARY MATERIAL
Speak. Supp. 2 How to Make Effective Presentations ...........................................................................................296
Grammar
Supplementary
Materials
5
Gram. Supp. 4
Focus 1_Impersonal 'IT'
Objective: Students will be able to use 'it' as a dummy (impersonal) subject
Uses of IT
We use ‘IT’ for a thing, an action, a situation or an idea.
You’ve bought a new coat. It’s very nice. (it: the coat).
Skiing is an expensive hobby but I am really into it.
You have to fill in all these stupid forms. It’s ridiculous.
I find astrology fascinating. I’m really interested in it.
✔ We use ‘IT’ to mean ‘the unknown person’.
A: Did someone ring?
B: Yes, it was Luke.
✔ We use ‘IT’ for the time, the weather, days, dates and the distance.
It’s snowing.
It’s hot.
It was cold yesterday.
It's getting dark.
‘What is the time now?’ ‘It is 5 o’clock.’
“What day is it?” “It’s Thursday.”
It ‘s June 3rd today.
It is my birthday.
A: How far is it to Toronto?
B: It’s 4000 kilometers.
A: How long does it take to go to the airport?
B: It takes about an hour.
We use ‘IT’ in structures it’s + adj. + to infinitive.
It was nice to meet your friends.
It is important to switch off the electricity.
It’s lovely to see you.
It’s quite safe to use the ladder.
We also use ‘IT’ with sense verbs. (look, sound, smell, taste, feel)
It tastes bitter.
It looks like gold.
It smells lovely.
A: ”Let’s go for a swim.”
B: “It sounds wonderful.”
Exercise 1. Change one or two words with “IT” in the following sentences.
Example: There’s a big crowd of angry protesters on the street, so the street is still closed.
There’s a big crowd of angry protesters on the street, so it is still closed.
1. Is the day the fifteenth of November today?
2. Take a taxi. Road is a long way to the station.
4. The ticket was in my pocket, but I have lost the ticket.
5. Weather was rainy, and there was a cold wind.
6
Exercise 2. Rewrite the sentences in brackets using ‘IT’.
Example: We sometimes go surfing. (Surfing is really good fun.) It’s really good fun.
1.I bought a shirt in the market. (The shirt was very cheap.)
_____________________________________________________
2. Someone rang. (The caller was Rachel.)
_____________________________________________________
3. Our heating is out of order. (The situation is frustrating.)
_____________________________________________________
4. I’ve left my coat at home. (The weather is very warm.)
_____________________________________________________
5. Don’t lose your credit card. (To keep it in a safe place is important.)
_____________________________________________________
6. I only need ten minutes to get ready. (To get ready takes ten minutes.)
_____________________________________________________
7. Don’t be upset! You can’t solve all math problems (Solving this problem is really hard.)
_____________________________________________________
Exercise 3: Answer the questions below, and then ask the questions to your partner.
1. What is the weather like today?
___________________________________.
2. How long does it take to go to Ankara from your hometown?
___________________________________.
3. What time is it now?
___________________________________.
4. Is it interesting for you to travel to foreign countries? Why?
___________________________________.
5. Is it hard to understand English grammar?
___________________________________.
7
Gram. Supp. 5
Focus 2_Present Continuous (temporary & changing situations / negative attitude)
Objectives: Students can use the present continuous to refer to temporary situations and changing situations.
They can also use the present continuous with 'always' and other adverbs of frequency to express negative attitude.
PRESENT CONTINUOUS TENSE
a. to refer to temporary situations. They are not expected
to continue for a long time.
John is working in Chicago this month.
(but he will be back in his office in New York next
month).
b. to refer to changing situations
The hole in the ozone layer is becoming bigger and
bigger.
c. with adverbs such as always, constantly, continuously
etc. for frequently repeated actions to express negative
attitude.
You are always losing your keys.
I am constantly picking up your dirty socks!
EXERCISE 1. Complete the sentences with Present Continuous Tense and match them to uses a-c in the box
above.
1. You ______________________ (always/leave) your newspaper on the floor.
______
2. Kim and Jack _______________________ (look for) a new flat these days.
______
3. No wonder the phone bills are so high! You _______________________ (constantly/talk) on the phone!
______
4. More and more people _______________________ (move) to the countryside these days.
______
5. Katie _______________________ (continuously/interrupt) me when I’m talking.
______
6. Mike _______________________ (drive) his friend’s car since his own car is in the workshop.
______
7. She __________________ (live) with her aunt nowadays. She will stay there until she finds an apartment. ______
8. Unfortunately, my sister’s health _______________________ (slowly/improve).
______
9. The number of cars on the road _______________________ (increase) day by day.
______
10. We _______________________ (renovate) our kitchen this month, so we _______________ (eat) out.
______
EXERCISE 2. Complete the sentences with the correct form of the words in parentheses. Use the SIMPLE
PRESENT or the PRESENT CONTINUOUS TENSE.
Dear Kate,
How are you? I 1_________________ (write) to you from Bali. The weather is hot and sunny, so I
2
_________________ (get) a great tan. As you know, I visit Bali in the summer holidays every year. During my
holiday, I 3_________________ (get) up early and 4_________________ (go) swimming every morning. After that, I
5
_________________ (usually/lie) on the beach and 6_________________ (read) a book. Nowadays, I
7
_________________ (read) a psychology book to understand people and human behavior. My boss
8
_________________ (always/complain) about something. It’s so annoying! I hope I will understand his behavior
when I finish reading the book.
What 9_________________ (you/do) these days? I remember that you also have some problems with your boss.
10
________ you ____________ (look) for a new job?
I _________________ (look) forward to hearing from you soon.
11
Love, Jenny
8
EXERCISE 3. Complete the sentences with the correct form of the words in parentheses. Use the SIMPLE
PRESENT or the PRESENT CONTINUOUS TENSE.
Bridget 1____________________ (go) to school every morning at 8 o’clock. Right now, she
2
____________________ (sit) next to her friend, Sue. Their teacher 3____________________ (talk) to them about
Argentina and they 4____________________ (try) to find it on the globe. Bridget 5____________________ (love)
Geography, but she 6____________________ (hate) Maths. Every month, the teacher 7____________________
(show) the class a film about another country. Bridget really 8____________________ (enjoy) these films. In fact, she
9
____________________ (want) to be a Geography teacher one day.
EXERCISE 4. Complete the sentences with the correct form of the words in parentheses.
Use the SIMPLE PRESENT or the PRESENT CONTINUOUS TENSE.
Jason and Tricia have been friends for two months. They 1____________________ (usually/spend) time together at
the weekends. It’s Saturday and they2____________________ (go) to the theatre tonight. Jason
3
________________ (always/drink) a cup of coffee during the intermission and they 4____________________
(enjoy) going to a cafe after the show. This play 5____________________ (finish) at 10 o’clock, so there will be plenty
of time to have another cup of coffee.
EXERCISE 5. Complete the dialogue with the correct form of the words in parentheses.
Use the SIMPLE PRESENT or the PRESENT CONTINUOUS TENSE.
Rupert: Hi Nigel! How are you?
Nigel:
Fine. It’s been a long time, hasn’t it? So tell me about yourself.
Rupert: Well, for the time being I 1____________________ (work) in a language school in Cairo, but I
2
____________________ (want) to change my job as soon as I find a better-paid one.
Nigel: I see. What 3____________________ (do/you) here in London?
Rupert: I 4____________________ (have) a holiday.
Nigel: That’s lovely. And what 5____________________ (think/you) of Cairo?
Rupert: Actually, I like it very much. It is a very exciting place.
NigeI: And what about your job? Is it difficult?
Rupert: Not really. I 6____________________ (teach/usually) from 11 a.m. to 1 p.m. and then later again from 6.30 to
9.30. In the evenings, my friends and I 7____________________ (not/go) into town very often. We prefer to come
together at each other’s houses and chat.
Nigel: You 8____________________ (seem) to enjoy your days in Cairo. So when are you going back?
Rupert: Next week on Friday. My plane 9____________________ (leave) early, at about 7.00 a.m.
Nigel: By the way, how is your brother?
Rupert: Chris… oh, he’s OK. He is married with two children. These days he 10____________________ (play) a lot of
football. I 11____________________ (guess) he wants to get fit!
9
Gram. Supp. 6
Focus 2_Will & Be Going to
WILL + INFINITIVE
BE GOING TO + INFINITIVE
A DECISION at the moment of speaking (spontaneous
decisions)
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Julie: There’s no milk.
John: Really? I will go and get some then.
Sam: Did you phone Lucy?
✔
✔
✔
Julie: There’s no milk.
✔
Carlota: I heard Sarah won the lottery. She has a lot
Waiter: What would you like to drink?
Marga: I’ll have a cup of tea, please.
✔
Tom: I’m so tired. I’m about to fall asleep.
Carla: I’ll get you some coffee.
✔
Kate: Some guests are coming in two hours,
PREDICTION based on opinions / feelings /
experiences (random predictions)
✔
✔
John: I know. I’m going to go and get some when
this TV programme finishes.
Fiona: Oh no, I forgot. I’ll phone her now.
and nothing is ready yet.
Ann: Don’t worry, I’ll wash the dishes and
do the cooking.
✔
A DECISION before the moment of speaking
(prior plans / decisions / ambitions / intentions)
I think/ believe Arsenal will win the match.
One day people will travel to Mars.
A: Do you think Kate will pass the exam?
B: Yes, she’ll pass easily.
I think that we will be able to solve some of
the global problems in fifty years’ time.
you
of money now. What is she going to do with it?
Miguel: She is going to buy a new car.
They are going to have a summer holiday in Italy
this year. They’ve already booked their plane
tickets.
They have finished all the preparations and they
are going to get married this month.
A PREDICTION based on something we can see (or
hear) now (predictions based on evidence)
✔
I think Arsenal is going to win the match because
✔
Look at these dark clouds! It is going to rain.
✔
✔
it is five goals ahead.
I feel terrible. I think I’m going to be sick.
I’m not going to finish this project by three
o’clock because there’s a lot to do.
In my opinion, he won’t be able to find a job
soon.
FOR OFFERS / PROMISES / REQUESTS / REFUSALS
✔
These boxes look heavy. I’ll help you to carry
✔
Thanks for lending me money. I’ll pay you back
✔
✔
them. (offer)
next week. (promise)
Will you please turn the stereo down? I’m trying
to concentrate. (request)
My daughter won’t help me with the housework.
(refusal)
For actions / situations that will definitely happen in the
future
✔
✔
My mother will be sixty in April.
The school holiday will last for seven weeks
instead of eight next year.
10
EXERCISE 1. Fill in the gaps with “will/won’t” or the correct forms of ‘'be going to’'.
1. A: We don’t have any bread.
B: Really? I __________________ (get) some from the shop then.
2. A: Why do you need to borrow my suitcase?
B: I ___________________ (visit) my mother in Scotland next month.
3. A: I’m really cold.
B: I ____________________ (turn) the heating on.
4. A: What are your plans after you leave university?
B: I __________________ (work) in a hospital in Africa.
5. A: Are you ready to order?
B: I can’t decide … OK, I __________________ (have) the steak, please.
6. A: Why are you carrying a hammer?
B: I __________________ (put) up some pictures.
7. You’ve got a bad cold. I __________________ (make) you some soup.
8. A: Look at that man on the ladder.
B: Oh, no! He _____________________ (fall).
9. A: Why are you wearing those old clothes?
B: Because I _________________________ (paint) the kitchen today.
10. A: Do you want to know what she told me?
B: Oh yes! I promise I ___________________________ (not / tell) anyone.
11. I _____________________ (be) late for work because I’m in a traffic jam now.
12. I’m afraid the library _______________________ (not / be) open during the holiday.
13. A: Have you got a ticket for the play?
B: Yes. I _____________________ (see) it on Thursday.
14. A: The alarm is going. It’s making an awful noise.
B: OK, I ____________________ (switch) it off.
15. A: Did you buy this book?
B: No, Emma bought it. She ____________________ (read) it on holiday.
16. Watch out! We ____________________ (hit) that tree!
17. I think people ____________________ (live) in space in the future.
18. My grandfather __________________ (be) eighty years old next August.
11
EXERCISE 2. Tina is planning her week. Look at her schedule, and then ask and answer questions as in the
example.
Monday
clean the attic
Tuesday
visit her grandpa
Wednesday
cook dinner for her friends
Thursday
meet Julie for coffee
Friday
do some shopping
Saturday
take kids to the amusement park
Sunday
fly to Mexico
1. fly to Mexico / Saturday?
A: Is she going to fly to Mexico on Saturday?
B: No, she isn’t. She’s going to take kids to the amusement park on Saturday.
2. visit her grandpa / Friday?
A: __________________________________ B:_______________________________________
3. meet Julie for coffee / Thursday?
A: __________________________________ B:_______________________________________
4. clean the attic / Wednesday?
A: __________________________________ B:_______________________________________
5. take kids to the amusement park / Sunday?
A: __________________________________ B:_______________________________________
6. do some shopping / Monday?
A: __________________________________ B:_______________________________________
7. visit her grandpa / Tuesday?
A: __________________________________ B:_______________________________________
12
Gram. Supp. 7
Focus 2_Double Comparatives
Objective: Students will be able to use parallel comparatives ('the' + comparative1, 'the' + comparative2).
DOUBLE COMPARATIVES
Double comparatives are used to say that one thing depends on another thing.
The higher the price of the food, the fewer the people buy.
The more electricity you use, the higher your bill will be.
The warmer the weather, the better I feel.
The younger you are, the easier it is to learn.
The sooner we leave, the earlier we will arrive.
The more I thought about the plan, the less I liked it.
There’s no time to lose. The faster you drive, the better.
The more the customer complained, the ruder the manager became.
A: Are you looking for a cheap hotel?
B: Yes, the cheaper, the better.
The + comparative expression + subject + verb , the + comparative expression + subject +
verb
You can form this structure using adjectives, adverbs, nouns and verbs.
Adjectives
The test is hard. My score is low.
The harder the test is, the lower my score is.
My mom is angry. I feel bad.
The angrier my mom is, the worse I feel.
Adverbs
You run fast. You reach the finish line quickly.
The faster you run, the more quickly you reach the finish line.
He speaks slowly. We can understand him easily.
The more slowly he speaks, the more easily we can understand him.
Nouns
He makes money. He buys useless things.
The more money he makes, the more useless things he buys.
He spends time on Facebook. He will have friends.
The more time he spends on Facebook, the more friends he will have.
Verbs
You study. You learn.
The more you study, the more you learn.
You practise. You succeed.
The more you practise, the more you succeed.
NOTE THIS:
1. When ‘be’ is used in double comparatives, it is sometimes omitted.
The more expensive the hotel (is), the better the service (is).
The better the quality of healthcare (is), the higher the life expectancy (is).
The hotter the weather (is), the better I feel.
The higher the price (is), the more reliable the product (is).
2. Do not use continuous verb forms in double comparatives.
The more education women get, the later they marry.
The more education women are getting, the later they are marrying.)
13
Exercise 1. Choose the letter of the best translation.
1. The less children studied, the more slowly they learned.
a. Children studied less because they were slow learners.
b. Children studied less, so they learned more slowly.
c. Children didn’t study, so they didn’t learn.
d. Children didn’t learn because they didn’t study.
2. The faster I walk, the more I get out of breath.
a. If I walk faster, I feel more out of breath.
b. I feel out of breath after I walk fast.
c. I walk slowly, but I get out of breath.
d. If I get out of breath, I walk fast.
3. The earlier we leave, the sooner we will arrive.
a. If we leave now, we will arrive on time.
b. We can’t arrive soon because we don't leave now.
c. If we leave earlier, we will arrive sooner.
d. If we leave late, we won’t arrive late.
Exercise 2. Complete each sentence using the information in brackets.
Example: (The rent is high). The bigger a flat is, the higher the rent is.
(You learn quickly) The younger you are, the more quickly you learn.
1. (The roads are quiet.) The earlier you leave, ________________________________________.
2. (The choice is wide.) The bigger the supermarket is, _________________________________.
3. (I get confused.) The more I try to work this out, _____________________________________.
4. (You can speak better) The more you practise, ______________________________________.
5. (The beaches get crowded.) The better the weather is, ________________________________.
Exercise 3. Complete the sentences with the words in the brackets.
1. I like warm weather. (feel) The warmer the weather, _________________________________________
2. I really didn’t like him when we first met. (like) But the more I got to know him, _______________________
3. If you are in business, you want to make a profit. (profit) The more goods you sell, ____________________
4. It’s hard to concentrate when you are tired. (hard) The more tired you are, ____________________________
5. Kate had to wait for a long time. (impatient/become) The longer she waited, ______________________
Exercise 4. Make sentences using double comparatives. Follow the example.
1. You practice a language. You speak more fluently.
___ The more you practice a language, the more fluently you speak.___
2. When people are young, they learn very quickly.
_____________________________________________________________
3. When a student is careful, he makes very few mistakes.
_____________________________________________________________
4. When you make mistakes, you learn more.
_____________________________________________________________
5. There are many tourists, so the environment will be damaged.
_____________________________________________________________
6. This job is easy, so we will finish it quickly.
_____________________________________________________________
14
Gram. Supp. 8
Focus 2_Repeated Comparatives
Objective: Students will be able to use a repeated comparative to emphasize the rate or amount of change.
REPEATED COMPARATIVES
Repeated comparatives describe things that are increasing or decreasing, or things that are changing
continuously.
My uncle grew fatter and fatter over the years.
The queue was getting longer and longer.
The book gets more and more interesting with every chapter.
These days more and more people are learning Chinese.
As Microsoft grew, Bill Gates got richer and richer.
Things are getting more and more expensive in Turkey.
He spoke for over an hour and his explanation got more and more complicated.
Your Spanish is improving. It’s getting better and better.
There were fewer and fewer people at the end of the conference.
BE CAREFUL!
one syllable adjectives
The birth rate is getting lower and lower.
Finding a job abroad is getting harder and harder each day.
The caravan was rolling faster and faster down the hill.
two or three syllables adjectives
.
Cathy got more and more bored with her job. In the end, she left.
He got more and more exhausted at the end of the match
Prices go up and up. Everything gets more and more expensive.
one syllable adjectives ending with one vowel + one consonant
The city is growing fast. It is getting bigger and bigger each day.
She gets thinner and thinner every single day.
one or two syllables ending in –y
He is getting lazier and lazier every day.
irregular adjectives
Your English is improving. It is getting better and better.
more and more + noun
These days more and more people are emigrating to Europe.
The country is rapidly losing its workers, as more and more people are emigrating.
He decided to save more and more money to buy his favorite sports car.
We can also use ‘less and less’ for something decreasing.
As each new problem arose, we felt less and less enthusiastic.
15
Exercise 1. Complete the sentences using repeated comparatives.
1. It’s becoming harder and harder to find a job these days.
(hard)
2. That hole in your pullover is getting _____________________________
(big)
3. My bags seemed to get ________________________ as I carried them.
(heavy)
4. As I waited for my interview, I became ___________________________
(nervous)
5. As the day went on, the weather got _____________________________
(bad)
6. Health care is becoming _______________________________________
(expensive)
7. Since she went to Canada, her English got _________________________
(good)
8. As the conversation went on, he became ___________________________
(talkative)
9. The market for tablets is becoming _______________________all the time. (competitive)
10. Billy's always lying and exaggerating. His stories get _____________________________
every time I see him.
(unbelievable)
Exercise 2. Vicky works very hard at her studies, but she is worried that she is making no progress.
Complete her sentences.
1. This subject gets harder and harder (hard) all the time.
2. I’m just getting ________________________________ (confused).
3. It’s becoming _________________________________ (difficult) for me to keep up.
4. The textbook just gets __________________________ (complicated).
5. I spend ____________________________________ (time) on my work.
6. My list of things to do gets ___________________________ (long).
7. My problems are getting _________________________ (bad).
Exercise 3. Some of the sentences below are correct, but some of them aren’t. If a sentence is correct, put a
tick (√). If it is not correct, cross the unnecessary word out of the sentence and write it in the space.
1. London is more bigger than Birmingham.
2. Silver isn’t as expensive as gold.
3. Indian food is the nicer than Chinese.
4. The piano is heavier than the sofa.
5. That’s the most quickest way to the hotel.
6. The weather is getting hotter and more hotter.
7. The crowd is becoming more and more excited.
___more______
_____________
_____________
_____________
_____________
_____________
_____________
Exercise 4. Rewrite the sentences using the brackets.
Example: This train is more convenient than all the other trains. (MOST)
This train is the most convenient train.
1. The living room isn’t as big as the kitchen.
(BIGGER)
The kitchen _________________________________________________
2. I’m not as fit as you.
(ME)
You _______________________________________________________
3. Prices just get higher all the time.
(AND)
Prices ______________________________________________________
4. This dress is cheaper than the skirt.
(LESS)
The dress ___________________________________________________
5. Their excitement was increasing all the time.
(EXCITED)
They were getting ______________________________________________
6. I’ve never read a more romantic story.
(MOST)
It’s the________________________________________________________
16
Gram. Supp. 9
Focus 2_The Same As
Objective: Students will be able to construct basic phrases with '(not) (the) same … as …'
COMPARISON – (NOT) THE SAME AS
We use the same as to show that two things are identical.
Our new coffee table is the same as our old coffee table.
We use not the same as to show that two things are not identical.
Our new coffee table is not the same as our old coffee table.
We can also use (not) the same (NOUN) as to show that two things are (not) identical.
●
Ann’s salary is the same as mine.
●
Ann gets the same salary as me.
●
Tom is the same age as George. They are both 18.
●
They are not in the same profession as me. I am a doctor, and they are architects.
●
Laura’s salary is not the same as mine. My salary is higher.
●
This apple is the same weight as the one on the table.
●
The apple has the same taste as the apples that I remember from childhood.
●
She was born on the same day as me.
Some more examples;
B: I’ll have the same as you.
●
A: What would you like to drink?
●
I can't believe that your dress is the same as mine. OR, You have the same dress as me.
●
You and I both have dark hair. Your hair is the same color as mine.
●
I arrived at 10.25 and so did you. I arrived at the same time as you.
●
My birthday is 5 April. Tom’s birthday is 5 April, too. My birthday is the same as Tom’s (birthday). OR, My
birthday is on the same day as Tom.
●
My mother has the same car as my father. OR, My father’s car is the same as my mother’s (car).
NOTE THIS:
Be, and not have, is used to talk about height, weight, age, size and color.
● Tom is the same age as George. They are both 18.
● The Fuji apple is the same color as that one.
● She is the same height as her husband.
● My brother is six feet tall. (NOT My brother has six feet height.)
● What size are your shoes?
17
Exercise 1. Write sentences with ‘’(NOT) THE SAME + (NOUN) AS’’
Tony’s car
Claire’s car
(colour) ………………………………………………
Carla
Martina
(not / hairstyle) ……………….……………………….
Joe
Wilma
(not / height) …………………….……………………
Kyle
My phone
Jim’s phone
(brand) ……………………........................
Burcu’s pet
Ali’s pet
(not / kind) ……………………………………
Miguel Herran
Morgan Freeman
(not / age) …………………………………
Kevin
(not/ weight)…………………………………………..
Exercise 2. Rewrite the sentences using ‘(NOT) THE SAME AS’ below.
1.Christian is an engineer at Microsoft. Teresa works at Microsoft, too. __________________________________.
2. Wendy has three cars. Romeo also has three cars. ________________________________________________.
3. Charlotte is 25, but her brother is 30. ___________________________________________________________.
4. I have a variety of hobbies such as fishing, drawing and reading. However, my best friend has different hobbies like
surfing, trekking and travelling. ______________________________________________________.
5. Helen has 23 computer games and Victor has 25. ________________________________________________.
18
Gram. Supp. 10
Focus 2_ Superlative Adjectives with 'One of/ Some of/ Among, etc.'
Objective: Students will be able to use 'one of/some of/among' in phrases with superlative adjectives
USE OF SUPERLATIVE ADJECTIVES
✔ We use superlative adjectives to compare three or more people or things.
✔ We use “the” before the superlative adjective because we are referring to one specific person or
thing.
Example:
Mark is the tallest person in the family.
This is the most expensive hotel I have ever stayed.
Haggis is the most delicious food I have ever tasted.
She is the smartest student in the classroom.
HOW TO MODIFY A SUPERLATIVE
Method 1
“one of the” + superlative + plural noun
Examples:
Great Britain is one of the richest countries in the world.
She is a very nice person- one of the nicest people I know.
Inception is one of the most exciting films I have watched.
That church is one of the oldest buildings in the town.
Method 2
“some of the” + superlative + plural noun
Examples:
New York, London and Tokyo are some of the most expensive cities in the world.
Nicholas Cage, Brad Pitt and Tom Hanks are some of the most popular actors in the USA.
Istanbul, Izmir and Ankara are some of the busiest cities in Turkey.
Method 3
“among the” + superlative + plural noun
Examples:
New York, London and Tokyo are among the most expensive cities in the world.
Istanbul, Izmir and Ankara are among the busiest cities in Turkey.
Hilton is among the best hotels in the world.
Mark Zuckerberg is among the richest people alive now.
19
Take a look at the country profiles below.
Full name: United
States of America
Population:316
million (UN, 2012
Area:9.8 million sq km
Life expectancy:76
years(men), 81 years
(women)(UN)
Full name: Greece
Population: 11.4
million(UN, 2012)
Area: 131,957 sq
km(50,949 sq
miles)
Life expectancy: 78
years(men), 83 years
(women)(UN)
Full name: Canada
Population:34.7 million
(UN,2012)
Area:9.9 million sq km
Life expectancy:79
years(men), 83 years
(women) (UN)
Full name: The
Netherlands
Population:16.7 million
(UN,2012)
Area:41,864 sq km
(16,164 sq miles)
Life expectancy:79
years(men), 83 years
(women) (UN)
Full name :People's
Republic of China
Population:1.35 billion
(UN,2012)
Area:9.6 million sq km
Life expectancy:72
years(men), 76 years
(women) (UN)
Full name: Turkey
Population: 74.5 million
(UN, 2012)
Area: 779,452 sq km
(300,948 sq miles)
Life expectancy: 72 years
(men), 77 years (women)
(UN)
Full name: Finland
Population: 5.4 million
(UN,2012)
Area: 338,145 sq km
(130,559 sq miles)
Life expectancy: 77
years(men), 83 years
(women)(UN)
Full name: Portugal
Population: 10.7 million
(UN, 2012)
Area:92,345 sq km
Life expectancy: 77 years
(men), 83 years (women)
(UN)
According to the table above;
1. The USA is one of the most crowded countries.
2. China and Canada are among the largest countries.
3. Finland and Portugal are some of the least crowded countries.
4. Turkey is one of the youngest countries.
5. China and the USA are some of the most crowded countries.
Some more examples;
6. The USA and Canada are some of the most developed countries.
7. Finland and the Netherlands are among the richest countries.
8. The USA and Greece are some of the most popular countries.
9. Turkey and Portugal are among the hottest countries.
10. Finland is one of the coldest countries.
Exercise 1. In the following sentences, use ‘one of the + superlative + noun’.
1. It’s a very good room. In fact, it is one of the best rooms in the hotel.
2. Mark Zuckerberg is a very rich man. According to BBC News, he is one
_____________________________________ in the world.
3. It is a very big castle. Actually, it _____________________________________ in Britain.
4. She’s a very successful player with three gold medals. Only a few people are as successful as she
is. She _____________________________________ in the team.
5. It was a very bad experience and I will never forget it. Indeed, it
_____________________________________ in my life.
6. He’s a very dangerous criminal; he is accused of theft and murder. Well, he
_____________________________________ in the country.
20
Exercise 2. Look at the cities given below. Try to make some meaningful sentences using the
adjectives. Use ‘some of the + superlative adjective, one of the + superlative adj, among the +
superlative adj.
Istanbul Izmır Konya Batman Kars
hot cold crowded popular famous
large
For example;
Konya and Izmir are some of the largest cities.
1._____________________________________________________________________
2. _____________________________________________________________________
3. _____________________________________________________________________
4. _____________________________________________________________________
5. _____________________________________________________________________
6. _____________________________________________________________________
7. _____________________________________________________________________
8. _____________________________________________________________________
Exercise 3. Put the adjectives in brackets into the correct form to complete the sentences meaningfully
(comparative & superlative).
Come and visit one of 1________________________ (interesting) countries in the world-Israel, where the
population are
________________________ (hospitable) than anywhere else. You will see some of
2
________________________
3
(old) biblical sites in the world, as well as 4_____________________ (modern) cities with
________________________
5
(good) restaurants in the Middle East. To make travel arrangements 6________________________ (easy), our
tour
includes guided visits to some of 7________________________ (holy) and 8________________________
(important)
sites for a number of different religions. You will also get the opportunity to float in the Dead
Sea-9________________________ (low) point on earth. The climate is 10________________________
(pleasant) than
anything you have experienced before. Even in 11________________________ (hot) of summers, you will find
places to
cool off. Our company offers tailor-made tours for 12________________________ (small) groups than is usual
on a
package holiday. The hotels that we provide are among 13__________________ (good) hotels, and they offer
14
________________________ (friendly) service than the larger. Even 15________________________
(frequent)
travellers will experience something new in this unique country. Book today!
21
Gram. Supp. 11
Focus 2_Present Perfect with the Superlative Forms of Adjectives
Objective: Can use the present perfect with the superlative forms of adjectives.
THE PRESENT PERFECT TENSE
We can use the present perfect tense with superlative forms of adjectives to talk about experiences.
This is the worst film I have ever seen.
That is the most delicious sushi I have ever eaten.
What is the most expensive thing you have ever bought?
This is the most frightening movie I’ve ever seen. (= I’ve never seen such a frightening movie before.)
She is the most generous person I’ve ever met. (= I’ve never met such a generous person before.)
EXERCISE 1. Rewrite the sentences with the words in parentheses. Do not change the meaning.
1. I have never read such an interesting book before. (most)
_________________________________________________________________
2. I have never visited such a beautiful country before. (ever)
_________________________________________________________________
3. This is the best coffee I have ever drunk. (before)
_________________________________________________________________
4. He is the most talkative person I have met in my whole life. (never)
_________________________________________________________________
5. I have never seen such a successful team in my life. (the)
_________________________________________________________________
EXERCISE 2. Choose the sentence which is the closest in meaning to the sentence given.
1. This is the biggest stadium I have ever seen.
a. All the other stadiums are bigger than this one.
b. I have seen lots of big stadiums in my life.
c. I have never seen such a big stadium before.
d. I want to see the biggest stadium in this country.
2. I have never talked to such a rude person in my life.
a. I have never met a rude person in my life.
b. He is more polite than the others.
c. I rarely talk to a polite person.
d. He is the rudest person I have ever talked to.
EXERCISE 3. Complete the sentences with one-word only.
1. This is __________ best restaurant I’ve ever been to.
2. I have ________ read an interesting book before.
3. Sue is the __________ impatient person I’ve ever seen.
4. It is the hardest exam I have __________ taken.
5. They are __________ most expensive jeans she has ever bought.
6. I have never visited such a cold place __________.
7. London is the __________ spectacular town I’ve ever visited.
8. This car is the fastest car I have __________ driven.
22
Gram. Supp. 12
Focus 2_ If Clauses Zero Type
Objective: Students will be able to describe simple conditions where one event follows another.
THE ZERO CONDITIONAL
✔ The zero conditional, also called real conditional, refers to things that are always true.
✔ It is used to describe the direct result of an object.
If/When you heat water, it always boils.
action
result
✔ ‘If’ and ‘when’ mean the same thing in zero conditional.
If / When + present simple, .... present simple.
● If you touch a fire, you get burned.
● You get water when you mix hydrogen and oxygen.
● Snakes bite if they are scared.
● If babies are hungry, they cry.
● When people eat too much, they get fat.
● When water reaches 100 degrees, it boils. (It is always true, there can't be a different result
sometimes).
● If I eat peanuts, I am sick. (This is true only for me, maybe, not for everyone, but it's still true
that I'm sick every time I eat peanuts)
Exercise 1. Make sentences with when / if + present simple, present simple.
For example: (not / rain / the flowers / die) ____ If it doesn’t rain, the flowers die.____________
1. (I / wake up late / I / be late for work)
_______________________________________________________________
2. (my husband / cook / he / burn the food)
______________________________________________________________
3. (I / cycle to work / the weather / be fine)
______________________________________________________________
4. (David / be sick / he / drink milk)
_______________________________________________________________
5. (you / mix water and electricity / you / get a shock)
_____________________________________________________
6. (you / heat ice / it / melt)
_______________________________________________________________
7. (I / like to visit the museums / I / be in a new city)
______________________________________________________
8. (my flatmate / clean it really well / she / clean the house)
_________________________________________________
9. (the river / freeze / it / be very cold)
_________________________________________________________________
10. (lots of people / come / Jenny / have a party)
_________________________________________________________
11. (I / feel good the next day / I / go to bed early)
________________________________________________________
23
Exercise 2. Rewrite the sentences with ‘if’
1. People put on weight because they don’t do sports and eat a lot.
_______________________________________________________________
2.It’s winter so birds fly south.
_______________________________________________________________
3. Joe works at Brown’s. He probably knows Annie.
_______________________________________________________________
4. We usually go for a walk after supper when there isn’t a good film on TV.
_______________________________________________________________
5. She goes shopping and she always buys expensive clothes.
_______________________________________________________________
6. I don’t drive fast normally, but sometimes I’m late and I drive fast.
_______________________________________________________________
7. You are hungry. Why don’t you cook some soup?
_______________________________________________________________
24
Gram. Supp. 13
Focus 2_The Use of WHOM and WHOSE in Relative Clauses
Objective: Students will be able to use relative pronouns ‘whom’ and ‘whose’ in defining relative clauses.
ADJECTIVE CLAUSES WITH WHO (SUBJECT)
We use ‘who’ (that) when it is the subject of the verb in the relative clause.
The man is Mr Jones. He lives next door.
subject pron.
The man who/ that lives next door is Mr.Jones.
relative clause
She is the teacher. She lives in a huge flat.
Subject pron.
She is the teacher who/ that lives in a huge flat.
relative clause
Some more examples:
1. We know a lot of people. They live in the country.
subject pron.
We know a lot of people who/ that live in the country.
2. What is the name of the person? He phoned you.
subject pron.
What is the name of the person who/ that phoned you?
3. The book is about a girl. She runs away from home.
subject pron.
The book is about a girl who/ that runs away from home.
4. I know a woman. She speaks Chinese very well.
subject pron.
I know a woman who/ that speaks Chinese very well
!!!! When we use a subject pronoun in a relative clause, we CAN’T OMIT it.
ADJECTIVE CLAUSES WITH WHO/WHOM (OBJECT)
We use ‘who/whom’ when it is the object of the verb in the relative clause.
●
Who is usually used instead of whom, especially in spoken/informal English.
●
Whom is generally used in formal English.
The man was Mr. Jones. I saw him.
object pron.
(a) The man who/whom/that I saw was Mr. Jones.
*(b) The man I saw was Mr. Jones.
The man who/whom/that I saw him was Mr.Jones.
The man I saw him was Mr. Jones.
!!!! When we use an object pronoun in a relative clause, we can omit it. (*see example (b) above)
25
The woman was away on holiday. I wanted to see her.
object pron.
(a) The woman who/whom/that I wanted to see was away on holiday.
(b) The woman I wanted to see was away on holiday.
Some more examples;
1. The people were very nice. We met them yesterday.
object pron.
The people (who/whom/that) we met yesterday were very nice.
2. I liked the woman. I met her at the party.
object pron.
I liked the woman (who/whom/that) I met at the party.
ADJECTIVE CLAUSES WITH PREPOSITIONS
When we use adjective clauses with prepositions, it may come before the relative pronoun ‘whom’ not ‘who’ or as
in everyday usage, the preposition comes after the subject and verb of the adjective clause.
She is the woman. I told you about her.
(a) She is the woman about whom I told you.
She is the woman about who I told you.
(b) She is the woman who(m) I told you about.
(c) She is the woman that I told you about.
She is the woman about that I told you.
*(d) She is the woman I told you about.
!!!! When we use an object pronoun in a relative clause with prepositions, we can also omit it. (*see Ex. (d) above)
Some more examples:
1. I like the people. I work with them.
object pron
I like the people (who/whom/that) I work with.
I like the people with whom I work.
2. Tom is talking to a woman. Do you know her?
object pron
Do you know the woman (who/whom/that) Tom is talking to?
Do you know the woman to whom Tom is talking?
26
WHO OR WHOM?
WHO OR WHOM?
The man is a tour guide. He speaks French.
subject pron
The man was very kind. I met him yesterday.
object pron.
The man who / that speaks French is a tour guide.
The man (who/whom/that) I met yesterday was very kind.
●
We use ‘who’ when it is the subject of the
verb in the relative clause. WHOM IS NOT
POSSIBLE!
●
We use ‘who/whom’ when it is the object of the
verb in the relative clause.
●
We CAN’T omit relative pronouns (who/that).
●
We CAN omit relative pronouns
(who/whom/that).
The man speaks French is a tour guide X
(Incorrect)
The man I met yesterday was very kind. ✔ (Correct)
Exercise 1
Fill in the blanks with the correct relative pronoun ‘who’ or ‘whom’. More than one answer is sometimes
possible. If the relative pronoun CAN BE OMITTED write O next to the sentence.
1. Mr. Green was the man _______ I was talking to.
2. The pianist _______ has played at the concert is internationally famous.
3. She loves her flatmate __________ she met two years ago.
4. This is the teacher about ___________ Roy told a lot.
5. She knew very little about the man with __________she had promised to spend the summer.
5. I have a friend ____________ owns a restaurant outside the city.
6. I like the staff with __________ I work.
7. The candidate for ___________ we voted couldn’t win the election.
Exercise 2
Rewrite each sentence in four different ways using the correct relative pronoun.
1. The man gave me good advice. I spoke to him yesterday.
a. _______________________________________________________________.
b. _______________________________________________________________.
c.________________________________________________________________.
d.________________________________________________________________
2. I have just run into a woman. I went to elementary school with her.
a. ___________________________________________________________________.
b. ___________________________________________________________________.
c. ___________________________________________________________________.
d. ___________________________________________________________________.
3. The students missed the assignment. The teacher wasn’t looking at them.
a. __________________________________________________________________.
b. __________________________________________________________________.
c. ___________________________________________________________________.
d. ___________________________________________________________________
27
Exercise 3. Combine the sentences using the relative pronoun ‘whom’.
1. The people were late. I was waiting for them.
______________________________________________________________.
2. The young women are all from Japan. We met them at the meeting last night.
______________________________________________________________.
3. The scientist is well known for her research. We saw her yesterday.
_____________________________________________________________.
ADJECTIVE CLAUSES WITH ‘WHOSE’
I know the man.
✔ Whose is used to show
His bicycle was stolen.
possessions.
(a) I know the man whose bicycle was stolen.
✔ It carries the same meaning as
The student writes well. I read her
other possessive pronouns used
composition.
as adjectives: his, her, its, and
(b) The student whose composition I read
their.
writes well.
✔ Like his, her, its, and their,
Mr. Catt has a painting.
whose is connected to a noun.
Its value is inestimable.
(c) Mr. Catt has a painting whose value is
His bicycle: whose bicycle
inestimable.
Her composition: whose composition
Its value: whose value
WHOSE CANNOT BE OMITTED!!
‘whose’ + the noun is at the beginning of
the adjective clause.
Exercise 4. Combine the sentences using the relative pronoun ‘whose’.
1. I know a man. His last name is Goose.
_________________________________________________________
2. I apologized to the woman. I spilled her coffee.
_ ________________________________________________________
3 The man called the police. His wallet was stolen.
_________________________________________________________
4. I met the woman. Her husband is the president of the corporate.
_________________________________________________________
5. The professor is excellent. I am taking her course.
_________________________________________________________
6. Mr. North teaches a class for students. Their native language is not English.
_________________________________________________________
7. I live in a dormitory. Its residents come from many countries.
_________________________________________________________
Exercise 5. Complete the paragraph with ‘who’ ‘whom’ or ‘whose’. Use each of them ONCE.
I’m having a great time in Lisbon. The people (1) ______________ live next door to me are very friendly. The woman
(2) ______________ house I’ve rented is a very helpful person. Her name is Ms. Sobral. She is the sort of person (3)
___________ I can trust all my life.
28
Exercise 6. Complete each sentence using ‘who’ ‘whom’ or ‘whose’
1. What’s the name of the worker ______________ car you borrowed?
2. A pacifist is a person ________________ believes that all wars are wrong.
3. An orphan is a child ________________ parents are dead.
4. What was the name of the person to ____________ you spoke on the phone?
5. The school is only for children ______________ first language is not English.
6. The woman with ______________ he fell in love left him after a month.
Exercise 7. Underline and correct the false items in the sentences if it is only necessary.
Example: The woman lives with her daughter is a nurse.
The woman who/that lives
1. The people whom he works in the office are very friendly.
_________________
2. Gary is a person who you can rely on him.
_________________
3. The man who I hired to paint my house last week finished the job in three days. _________
4. Benjamin knows the woman whose is meeting us at the airport tomorrow.
______________
5. Can you name the singer whose real name was Gordon Mathew Sumner? ______________
Exercise 8. Choose the correct item to complete the relative clauses. More than one correct answer is
sometimes possible.
1. He's the guy ________ helped me find the job.
a. who
b. whom
c. that
d.no pronoun
2. That's the woman _______ husband works with my brother.
a. who
b. whose
c. that
d. whom
3. The old lady __________ big house is next to the park is complaining about the noise.
a. whom
b. whose
c. that
d.no pronoun
4. The boy ________ you saw at the garden is my brother.
a. whom
b. whose
c. that
d.no pronoun
5. This is the girl to ________ I have sent those flowers.
a. whom
b. whose
c. that
d.no pronoun
Exercise 9. Circle the correct item to complete the relative clauses. More than one correct answer is
sometimes possible.
1. The man who/ whom/ whose/ ∅ is playing the guitar is my brother.
2.The dentist who/ whom/ whose/ ∅ you have recommended is not available for three months.
3. She’s looking for an assistant on who/ that/ whom/ ∅ she can rely
4. The doctor ∅ / who/ whose/ whom I visited last week told me to change my diet.
5. Alicia is the student with who/ whom/ with whom/ who I’m travelling.
6. Can you name artist who/ whom/ whose/ ∅ famous painting is called ‘Guernica’?
7. The engineer who/ whom/ whose/∅ Matt works with for the project is brilliant.
29
Gram. Supp. 14
Focus 2_The Use of WHEN and WHY in Relative Clauses
Objective: Students will be able to use 'when’' and "why" in relative clauses.
USING ‘WHEN’ IN ADJECTIVE CLAUSES
I will never forget the day.
‘When’ is used in an adjective clause to
I met you then (on that day).
modify a noun of time (year, day, time,
century etc.)
(a)
I will never forget the day when I met you.
(b)
I will never forget the day on which I met
✔ If you want, you can use a relevant
you.
preposition before WHICH (ON/IN/AT
(c)
I will never forget the day that I met you.
which) as is (b).
(d)
I will never forget the day - I met you.
✔
If not, you can omit the preposition
and use THAT/ - as in (c&d).
Examples:
Monday is the day. We will come then. (on that day)
Monday is the day when we will come.
Monday is the day on which we will come.
Monday is the day that we will come.
Monday is the day - we will come.
7:05 is the time. My plane arrives then. (at that time)
7:05 is the time when my plane arrives.
7:05 is the time at which my plane arrives.
7:05 is the time that my plane arrives.
7:05 is the time - my plane arrives
July is the month. The weather is usually the hottest. (in that month)
July is the month when the weather is the hottest.
July is the month in which the weather is the hottest.
July is the month that the weather is the hottest.
July is the month - the weather is the hottest.
Exercise 1. Combine the sentences by using ‘WHEN’ or ‘PREP+WHICH.
1. There was a time. Movies cost a dime then.
____________________________________________________________.
2. Summer is the time of the year. The weather is the hottest then.
____________________________________________________________.
3. There came a time. He had to spend his money then.
____________________________________________________________.
4. Yesterday was a day. Everything went wrong then.
____________________________________________________________.
5. 1960 is the year. The revolution took place in that year.
____________________________________________________________.
6. Do you remember the day? We went to the zoo on that day.
__________________________________________________________.
30
USING ‘WHY IN ADJECTIVE CLAUSES
Why is an adverb of reason. The relative clause is relating to why something happened.
In this case it is replacing 'for which'
Preposition + Relative Pronoun (formal)
Do you know the reason for which he left?
The reason for which I turned down the job is
that the pay was too low.
There are many reasons for which people
choose not to get married.
Why as Relative Adverb (informal)
Do you know the reason why he left?
The reason why I turned down the job is that the
pay was too low.
There are many reasons why people choose not
to get married.
Some more examples;
The reason why (for which) I didn't call you is that I've lost your phone number.
We do not know the reason why (for which) he left.
Her mass of library of books is the reason why (for which) she's so well-spoken
Tell us the reason why (for which) you ditched your tent.
The reason why (for which) I called you is to ask for your advice.
The reason why (for which) I am meeting you is that I need to tell you something.
Exercise 2. Use your own ideas to complete these sentences with ‘WHEN’ OR ‘WHY’.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
I’ll always remember the day __________________________________________________.
I’ll never forget the time ______________________________________________________.
The reason ___________________________________ was that I didn’t know your address.
Unfortunately, I wasn’t at home the evening ______________________________________.
The reason __________________________________________ is that they don’t need one.
_______ was the year _______________________________________________________.
I can’t seem to understand the reason ___________________________________________.
The reason why he left the company is __________________________________________.
Could you tell me the reason _________________________________________________?
31
Gram. Supp. 15
Focus 2_ Indirect Questions
Objectives: Students can form indirect questions.
INDIRECT QUESTIONS
- We use indirect questions when we ask for information politely.
- The word order in indirect questions is the same as in statements (subject + verb).
- Indirect questions are introduced with question words (who, what, where, etc.) OR with if / whether.
e.g. a) Direct question: Where is the concert hall?
Indirect question: Could you tell me where the concert hall is?
b) Direct question: Has John been invited?
Indirect question: Do you know if / whether John has been invited?
- Indirect questions are usually used after the following expressions:
I don’t know ... / I’d like to know … / I wonder… / We need to find out… / I’d like to find out…
Do you know…? / Can you tell me…?/ Could you tell me…? / Could you explain…?
- If the indirect question is part of a question, we put a question mark (?) at the end of the sentence.
- If it is part of a statement, we put a full stop (.)
e.g. a) Direct question: How does this machine work?
Indirect question: Could you explain how this machine works?
b) Direct question: Should I call a lawyer?
Indirect question: I wonder if / whether I should call a lawyer.
Exercise 1. Turn these direct questions into indirect questions.
EXAMPLE: Where is the shop? ⇒ Can you tell me where the shop is?
1. What’s the matter
Do you know ______________________________________________________________?
2. How many countries has he travelled to?
I wonder __________________________________________________________________.
3. Who was she talking to?
I wonder __________________________________________________________________.
4. When will they get married?
I wonder _________________________________________________________________.
5.Where is the nearest station?
Could you tell me ___________________________________________________________?
6.Why can't you help your new colleague?
Would you mind telling me _____________________________________________________?
7. What is our new boss like?
I'd like to find out _____________________________________________________________.
8. Where were the boxes?
Could you please tell me ___________________________________________________________?
32
9. Where is Joe?
Do you know ________________________________________________________________?
10. What time does the show start?
Do you have any idea _________________________________________________________?
11. Is he all right?
I wonder ____________________________________________________________________.
12. Have you finished the report yet?
I'd like to know _______________________________________________________________.
13. Is this the right train?
Do you have any idea ______________________________________________ the right train?
14. Could you babysit tonight?
I was wondering ________________________________________________________ tonight.
15. Do they have any free tickets?
Could you let me know __________________________________________ any free tickets?
Exercise 2. Choose the best answer.
1. A: I have called Peter five times already. He seems to be busy. I wonder where _____.
B: Maybe he is at his parent’s house. Why don’t you call his parents?
a. he has been
b. has he gone
c. he is
d. is he going
2. Do you know if _______ him to come early?
a. I told
b. did I tell
c. I am telling
d. am I telling
3. Do you know what ________? I must call him urgently.
a. is his telephone number
b. was his telephone number
c. his telephone number is
d. his telephone number was
4. He treated me badly throughout the holiday. I wonder why ______ so.
a. did he do
b. he did
c. he has done
d. has he done
5. How is the project going, Alex?. I would like to know if ______ the work in time and we can schedule a meeting
with the other department.
a. will you finish
b. can you finish
c. you finish
d. you can finish
6. I wonder how long ______________ last.
a. will this cold weather
b. this cold weather will
c. this cold weather did
7. Could you tell me why ______________?
a. do you leave
b. are you leaving
c. you are leaving
8. I was wondering ______ the recipe.
a. where you found
b. where did you find
c. where found you
9. Do you know ______?
a. if is he going to come
c. whether is he going to come
b. if he's going to come
10. Would you mind telling me ______?
a. how much did the sofa cost b. how much cost the sofa
c. how much the sofa cost
Exercise 3. Complete or rewrite the following. Use the given clues.
1. A: “Have they had dinner yet?” she asked.
B: She wants to know _________________________ dinner yet.
2. A: __________________________ Jack lives?
B: No, I don’t. But we can find his address in the phone book.
33
3. A: Have you seen my keys?
B: Sorry, what did she ask? I could not hear her clearly.
C: She wants to know ________________________.
4. A: What are you looking for?
B: My eyeglasses. Do you know _______________ (put) them?
5. A: Excuse me, could you tell me _________________ the zoo? (can /get to)
B: By underground. Take the yellow line to Green Gardens.
6. I do not know if he ___________________ (be able to/ see) again. He has had five surgeries on his eyes, but with
no luck.
7. Does this bus go to Manhattan?
Could you tell me ________________________________?
8. She asks “Will he come home early?”.
She would like to know _______________________________.
9. A: Did the mechanic repair the car?
B: I don’t know ________________the car.
10. Will it be snowy today?
I wonder ______________________________.
Exercise 4. Change the indirect questions to direct questions.
1. I was wondering if Joe could help me.
____________________________________________________?
2. Do you know what Greg does?
____________________________________________________?
3. Could you let me know where Ben was?
____________________________________________________?
4. Do you have any idea how much it cost?
____________________________________________________?
5. Could you tell me why you didn't come?
____________________________________________________?
34
Gram. Supp. 16
Focus 2_Noun Clauses with THAT
Objective: Students will be able to use ‘that’ in noun clauses to combine sentences.
THAT-CLAUSES
We use that as a conjunction to link a verb, adjective or noun with the following clause.
Verb + (that)-clause
Verbs commonly followed by that include reporting verbs (say, tell, admit, etc.) and mental process verbs
(believe, think, know, hope, etc.):
●
They said (that) four million workers stayed at home to protest against the tax.
●
Everyone agrees (that) we have to act quickly.
●
Recent research proves (that) global warming is already a reality.
●
It’s easy to forget (that) she is just a child.
●
I hope (that) it won’t be a long journey.
●
He knew (that) something bad had happened.
●
Do you think (that)they forgot to pay or that they stole it?
Some verbs connected with reporting can be followed by a that-clause
accept, admit, agree, assume, believe, claim, comment, consider, decide, doubt, explain, expect, feel, forget,
guess, hear, hope, imagine, know, mean, mention, prove, realise, remember, reply, say, see, show, think
Adjective + (that)-clause
We use be + adjective + (that)-clause to express opinions and feelings or attitudes.
●
It’s important (that) we look at the problem in more detail.
●
I’m sure (that) you’ll know a lot of people there.
●
It’s obvious (that) she doesn’t understand spoken English.
●
They were afraid (that) we were going to be late.
Some adjectives commonly used in this way are sure, certain, right, clear, too bad, true, obvious,
important, afraid, pleased, sorry, surprised, worried. We can omit that with no change in meaning.
Noun + that-clause
We use a noun + that-clause to express opinions and feelings, often about certainty and possibility.
We also use that with reporting nouns.
●
He is also having intensive treatment in the hope that he will be able to train on Friday.
●
It’s a well-known fact that English is the principal language of the business community.
●
Dutch police are investigating the possibility that a bomb was planted on the jet.
Some nouns commonly used in this way are belief, fact, hope, miracle, idea, possibility, suggestion,
truth, shame, pity, statement, claim, comment, argument.
35
Exercise 1. Complete the following with your own words.
1. I’m sorry (that) I was late for class.
2. I’m glad (that) _______________________________________.
3. I’m disappointed (that) _________________________________.
4. I’m surprised (that) _________________________________.
5. I am sure (that) _________________________________.
6. I’m happy (that) _________________________________.
7. Yesterday I was annoyed (that) _________________________________.
Exercise 2. Work in groups, or pairs. Change the given sentence into a noun clause. Use it+ any appropriate
expression from the list.
Example: The world is round.
It is a fact that the world is round.
a fact
obvious
surprising
unfair
unfortunate
a pity
clear
true
1. Tim hasn’t been able to make any friends. _____________________________________________
2. Smoking can cause cancer. ________________________________________________________
3. Some women do not earn equal pay for equal work. _____________________________________
4. The Earth revolves around the Sun. __________________________________________________
5. Drug abuse can ruin one’s health. ____________________________________________________
Exercise 3. Complete the sentences with your own ideas.
1.It is my belief that the war between those two countries will end soon.
2. I agree (that) ____________________________________________.
3. It is my theory that ________________________________________.
4. It is my impression that ____________________________________.
5. I’m of the opinion that _____________________________________.
6. I hope (that) _____________________________________________.
Exercise 4. Complete the sentences with your own ideas using that-clauses.
Example: There are two reasons why I don’t want to go out tonight.
The first reason is that I have to study.
The second reason is that I don’t have enough money.
1. There are several reasons why I am studying English.
One reason is _________________________________________
Another reason is ______________________________________
A third reason is _______________________________________
2. I have had three problems since I came here.
One problem is ________________________________________
Another problem is _____________________________________
The third problem I have had is ___________________________
3. One advantage of owning your car is ______________________
Another advantage is ___________________________________
One disadvantage, however, of owning your car is ____________
36
Gram. Supp. 17
Focus 2_Quantifiers 1 (several, plenty of, etc.)
Objective: Can use a wide range of quantifiers with countable (count) and uncountable (non-count) nouns.
Quantifier
Uncountable
countable (PLURAL NOUN)
a lot of / lots of …
a lot of milk / lots of milk
a lot of students / lots of students
plenty of …
plenty of homework
plenty of books
several …
X
several chairs
some water
some books
too much salt
X
X
(too) many teachers
a little milk
X
X
a few pencils
any
any money
any questions
no
no information
no dictionaries
some
(too) much
(too) many
a little / little
a few / few
A few / Few
A few means not many, but enough.
There are a few hotels in this town. You will probably find a room to spend the night.
Few means not many/ hardly any/ almost none.
It can be used with ‘very’ for emphasis.
There are (very) few cupboards in the kitchen. There isn’t enough room to store my plates and glasses.
A little / Little
A little means not much, but enough.
There is a little petrol in the tank. It will get us to the next town.
Little means not much/ hardly any/ almost none.
It can be used with ‘very’ for emphasis.
There is (very) little coffee left. We need to buy some more.
Some
We can use some in questions when we make a request or an offer.
Could I have some water?
Would you like some more biscuits?
Too many / Too much
Too many / Too much has a negative meaning and shows that there is more of something than is wanted or
needed.
There were too many dogs on the beach, so I was very afraid.
I’ve got too much work to do. I can’t go out.
37
Plenty of
Plenty of means more than enough, a large supply of something.
We have plenty of milk, so you don’t need to buy any.
There are plenty of chairs. There is no need for extra ones.
Several
Several means a number of people or things that is more than a few, but not many.
Several passengers were badly injured in a train accident.
EXERCISE 1. Choose the best answer to complete the sentences.
1.I have seen few / plenty of / much nice souvenirs in this shop, so I can’t decide what to buy.
2. There is little / few / a little chance of his getting the job. He has no experience.
3. I have made a lot of / much / plenty notes, but I haven’t written my essay yet.
4. I would like to come to the beach. I just need many / several / a few minutes to get ready.
5. We have a little / any / several apples, so we can make a pie.
6. Could you get any / some / few bananas when you go shopping this afternoon?
7. The film starts at five and it is one o’clock now. We have no / much / plenty of time, so we don’t need to hurry.
8. Were there many / little / plenty people at the conference?
9. We have lots of / any / much vegetables at home, so I didn’t buy any when I went shopping.
10. She has been to Italy some / several / a lot times.
11. A: I had a terrible nightmare last night.
B: That’s because you watch few / lots / too many horror films to sleep well.
12. You’re making several / too much / no noise. I can’t concentrate.
EXERCISE 2. Find and correct the mistake in each sentence.
1. There weren’t no phone calls for you today.
2. Can I have any mineral water with my meal, please?
3. How much books should we bring for this course?
4. Katty has got any close friends in her class. She feels lonely.
5. The teacher’s explanations weren’t clear enough, so many students were able to understand the lesson.
6. If a person has few patience with children, he/ she can’t make a good teacher.
7. How many water do you drink a day?
8. She spends too many money on clothes and luxurious goods.
9. There are too much books in this bag. It’s very heavy.
38
EXERCISE 3. Is chocolate really good for you?
People started making chocolate centuries ago in South America and people have told 1____________ stories
about how healthy chocolate is. 2____________ stories tell us that it can make us happy, too, and that may be true.
3
____________ chocolate may be good for our hearts, but fruit and vegetables are much better for us than
chocolate. Chocolate contains 4____________ fat and sugar-but 5____________ people argue that the fat in
chocolate is good fat because it comes from a particular type of butter. That’s true but most chocolate doesn’t
contain 6____________ of it. So, the answer to the question above is really “no”.
1. a. much
b. few
c. plenty of
2. a. Several
b. Much
c. A lot
3. a. A few
b. A little
c. Many
4. a. little
b. any
c. too much
5. a. a lot of
b. plenty
c. much
6. a. no
b. any
c. few
*Adapted from MyGrammarLab A1-A2, p. 22
EXERCISE 4. Rewrite the sentences using the words so that they have the same meaning.
1. We don’t have much flour to make my favorite cake.
LITTLE
We _________________________________________ to make my favorite cake.
2. There aren’t many days left to the end of school.
A FEW
There are only _________________________________________ to the end of school.
3. My boyfriend eats little chocolate.
MUCH
My boyfriend does not _________________________________________.
4. I stayed in Paris for a couple of days.
A FEW
_____________________________________________________________.
5. We have a little cheese and a few eggs we can eat for now, so we don’t have to go out.
SOME
_____________________________________________________________.
39
Gram. Supp. 18
Focus 2_Quantifiers 2 (All-most-both-none of, etc.)
Objective: Can use 'all of', 'none of', 'both of'', “neither of”, “either of” and 'most of' to describe subsets and proportions
of groups of people and things.
Both of
* refers to two people, things or groups
* has a positive meaning
* takes a verb in the plural.
I have two close friends. Both of my friends/ Both of them are studying at university.
Neither of
* refers to two people, things or groups
* has a negative meaning
* takes a verb in the singular or plural.
I’ve watched two films. Neither of these films / Neither of them has / have won an award.
Either of
* refers to two people, things or groups
* takes a verb in the singular or plural.
You should wear the blue or white shirt. Either of these shirts / Either of them suits / suit you.
NOTE: We can use not...either of instead of neither of.
I’ve read two books. I didn’t enjoy either of them. (I enjoyed neither of them).
All of
* refers to more than two people, things or groups
* can go before plural or uncountable nouns
* has a positive meaning.
There are a lot of famous actors in this film and all of the actors / all of them are talented.
All of the meat contains protein.
None of
* refers to more than two people, things or groups
* can go before plural or uncountable nouns
* has a negative meaning
* takes a verb in the singular or plural with a countable noun.
None of my friends has/ have travelled abroad.
None of the junk food is healthy.
Most of
* refers to nearly all of the people or things in a group or nearly all of something
* can go before plural or uncountable nouns.
It was Sunday and most of the shops were closed. Most of the information in this book is useful.
EXERCISE 1
Complete the sentences with “both / either / neither / most / all / none”.
1. A: How many brothers do you have?
B: Two, and __________ of them are older than me.
2. A: There were a lot of people at the party.
B: I know. But __________ of them were strangers to me. I just know Kevin.
3. A: Mum, did you wash my red T-shirt?
B: Well, I washed two T-shirts, but __________ of them were blue.
4. A: You can’t be lonely. You have lots of friends.
B: Yes, but __________ of them can come to visit today.
40
5. A: You have a lot of books, don’t you?
B: Yes, and __________ of them are in this bookcase. I don’t put them anywhere else.
6. A: Why didn’t you buy anything?
B: Because __________ of those clothes were very nice.
7. A: Did you watch a comedy last night?
B: No. We watched two films, but __________ of them were comedies.
8. A: Both of these dresses are beautiful.
B: Yes, but I didn’t enjoy __________ of them.
EXERCISE 2
Choose the best answer to complete the sentences.
1. I’ve ordered two salads and all / both / neither of them look delicious. I will come here again.
2. In this class, students are very hardworking. I think most / both / none of them will pass the exam.
3. In our restaurant, we usually serve vegetarian dishes because most / either / none of our customers like them.
4. My grandfather is diabetic and he cut out sugar. None / All / Most of our jam contains sugar.
5. We are delighted to be able to welcome none / most / all of the competition winners to the gala evening.
6. A lot of people have seen the accident, but none / most / neither of them volunteered to be a witness.
7. I need to go to the bakery to buy some bread because my brother ate all / none / both of it in the morning.
8. Unfortunately, she slipped and most / neither / both of the coffee spilled over the carpet.
9. I have got two washing machines, but neither / both / either of them are working at the moment.
10. We can go there by train or rent a car. Either / Both / All of them will suit me fine.
11. Oliver has got two jobs, but neither / both / none of them pay very well. He is looking for a new job nowadays.
12. I don’t like either / neither / none of these T-shirts. I will buy something else.
EXERCISE 3
Choose the best answer to complete the conversation.
A: What’s The Restaurant? Have you seen it?
B: Yes, it’s a TV show for people who want to open a restaurant with Raymond Blanc. Nine teams start, but 1 all /
most / both of them have to leave during the series as only one team can win.
A: What do they have to do?
B: Well, each week 2 all / most / both of the teams do a task in their restaurant, but only some of them can succeed.
A: What do you mean? Do any of them have to leave the show?
B: No, 3 all / neither / none of them have to leave at this point, but the worst two or three teams do another task, and
then the worst team has to leave.
A: Do 4 all / both / none the teams come from different restaurants or are they amateur cooks?
B: I think 5 all / most / none of them are complete amateurs- they all have some professional experience.
41
Gram. Supp. 19
Focus 2_Quantifiers 3 (hardly any-not many-much, etc.)
Objective: Can describe quantities using 'hardly/not' + 'any/much/many'.
Quantifier
Type of Noun
hardly any
(sentence—positive
meaning—negative)
“nearly not any”
Example
countable / uncountable
not many
“a very small amount”
countable
not much
“a very small amount”
uncountable
There is hardly any coffee left in the pot.
There are hardly any magazines on the table.
She doesn’t have many books in her room.
There isn’t much water in the glass.
EXERCISE 1. Fill in the gaps with “many, much, a/an or hardly any”.
Claire pushed the door and looked inside. The house was small and there wasn’t 1__________ furniture. There were
some chairs and 2__________ table, but there were 3__________ signs of comfort. There was not 4__________ light,
but Claire could see that there weren’t 5__________ pictures or ornaments. It was as if the owner of the house did not
spend 6__________ time there. After a while, she quietly closed the door and walked away.
EXERCISE 2. Complete the conversation with the words and phrases from the box. Use each only ONCE.
a lot
any
much
many
not many
not much
JEZ: Let’s get something to eat. Are there 1____________ restaurants here?
ALI: Yes, there are quite 2___________, but there’s 3 ____________ variety. What kinds of food do you like?
JEZ: Well, I eat too 4___________ junk food, so I’d prefer something different. Are there any British restaurants here?
ALI: Yes, but 5____________. There are only two, I think, and they’re expensive. Do you eat much Indian food?
JEZ: Well, I have tried Indian food before, but I’m not very keen on it- sorry, Ali. I know you love it. What about
Chinese?
ALI: Oh, there are so 6____________ Chinese restaurants here that everyone gets bored with Chinese food! I
know-we both like Italian. Let’s go to Giovanni’s.
EXERCISE 3. Rewrite the sentences with the words in parentheses. Do not change the meaning.
1. He wants a few presents for his birthday. (not)
_______________________________________________________________
2. We have a little sugar left at home. (much)
________________________________________________________________
42
3. There are almost no good restaurants here. (any)
_________________________________________________________________
4. There are few things to see in this area. (many)
__________________________________________________________________
5. She has got little patience with young children. (not)
__________________________________________________________________
6. He has got almost no knowledge of foreign affairs. (hardly)
__________________________________________________________________
7. After the party, there was almost no food left. (any)
__________________________________________________________________
8. A few students came to the class. (not)
__________________________________________________________________
9. There are only a few people who can speak Hungarian. (not)
__________________________________________________________________
10. There are almost no employees who know the password to the computer. (many)
__________________________________________________________________
43
Gram. Supp. 20A
Focus 2_Quantifiers 4 (no)
Objective: Can use 'no' as a quantifier to indicate the absence or lack of something.
Quantifier
Type of noun
Singular countable noun
NO
(lack of something)
Plural countable noun
Uncountable noun
Example
There is no hospital in this town.
I have no plans to change house.
There are no hotels in this town.
She has no money for the operation.
I have no intention of moving into a new
house.
There is no sugar in the jar.
**We cannot use the quantifier “no” in a negative sentence. We use it in a positive sentence with a negative meaning.
DON’T SAY: I don’t have no money to go abroad.
SAY: I have no money to go abroad. (= I don’t have any money to go abroad.)
DON’T SAY: She never wants no help with the washing up.
SAY: She never wants any help with the washing up.
EXERCISE 1. Choose the best answer to complete the sentences.
1. I have no / any time to waste.
2. He will never do any / no work for me again.
3. There was / wasn’t no bus at that hour, so we took a taxi.
4. I couldn’t / could find any fresh milk at the shop.
5. I don’t have any / no homework to do. Let’s go out.
6. Unfortunately, she has / doesn’t have no success.
7. We have no / any apples, so we can’t make a pie.
8. There is / are no fish in this river.
EXERCISE 2. Rewrite the sentences with the words in parentheses. Do not change the meaning.
1. She doesn’t take any sugar with her coffee. (no)
____________________________________________________________
2. I didn’t take any photos of the party. (no)
____________________________________________________________
3. You have no evidence to convince me. (any)
____________________________________________________________
4. She finished the test without any difficulty. (no)
____________________________________________________________
5. Peter never has any time to visit us. (no)
____________________________________________________________
6. He needs no stamps for the letters. (any)
____________________________________________________________
7. She didn’t have any difficulty in finishing the test. (no)
_____________________________________________________________
8. Peter has bought no new books. (any)
_____________________________________________________________
44
Gram. Supp. 20B
Focus 2_Subject-Verb Agreement
SUBJECT - VERB AGREEMENT RULES
Two subjects joined by “and” are plural.
Water and bread are vital for humans.
When using “or” in a subject containing a singular and plural subject, the verb agrees with the closest
subject.
His sister or his parents are going to help him.
His parents or his sister is going to help him.
Some uncountable nouns end in –s but take a singular verb (such as measles, mumps, aerobics, gymnastics,
mathematics, news).
Aerobics is my favourite sport.
A plural subject describing a specific measurement takes a singular verb (when we talk about an amount of
money, a time period, weight, distance etc.)
Ten miles is too far to walk.
Five hundred dollars is too much for that house.
Nouns which refer to one object that consists of two parts take a plural verb (such as glasses, jeans, pyjamas,
scissors, trousers, gloves etc.).
Special scissors are used to cut this fabric.
My jeans have worn out. I need a new pair.
*** We don’t use a/an or a number with these words. We use the phrase “pair of”.
I want to buy a pair of gloves.
The verb usually agrees with the subject noun even if it is separated by prepositional phrases, relative
clauses, brackets or commas.
The students in the canteen seem to have forgotten the time.
Your method of solving problems is quite different from mine.
When the subject is a gerund, it takes a singular verb.
Washing vegetables with this polluted water is dangerous.
With collective nouns (such as family, staff, team), the verb might be singular or plural, depending on
meaning.
The family has a monthly income of €2.000. (collective noun seen as a whole entity)
The family are all gathering here for New Year. (collective noun seen as a group of individuals)
45
* We always use a plural verb for certain collective nouns such as police, people and cattle.
The police are investigating the accident.
A fraction takes a singular verb if it is followed by a singular noun, but a plural verb if it is followed by a plural noun.
Two-thirds of the earth's surface is covered with water.
Forty percent of the students have passed the exam.
Someone, something, anyone, nobody, anything, everybody etc. take a singular verb.
Someone has called and left a message for you.
Nothing has been done yet.
a lot/lots
a few/few
some
many
most
of + countable plural noun + plural verb
a couple
several
plenty
all
both
Most of his students are successful.
Several of the workers are happy in this factory.
a lot/lots
a little/little
some
plenty
of+ uncountable noun + singular verb
much
most
any
all
All of the fruit was eaten.
Some of the information is accurate.
46
one
each
verb
of+ countable plural noun + singular
every
One of Jack’s children is going to the same school as my son.
Each of the children was given a present.
*** each / every + a singular countable noun + singular verb
Each child was given a present.
EXERCISE 1. Choose the correct answer.
1. Mathematics are /is my favourite subject at university.
2. Six hundred kilometres is/ are too far to drive without stopping.
3. Putting his toys and stuff away was / were my son’s responsibility.
4. The article about the increase in violent crimes were / was written by a well-known writer.
5. The police is /are trying to catch the leader of the gang.
6. More than fifty percent of the world's population are / is living in terrible conditions.
7. Everybody want / wants to be happy, healthy and successful.
8. One of my friends are / is going to open a language school in Tokyo.
9. Most of the equipment in his office is/ are too old.
10. Each of the participants was/ were given a certificate at the end of the course.
11. The news in today’s paper are / is about environmental pollution.
12. This pair of pyjamas is / are really expensive. I will not pay that much!
13. The woman, in addition to her daughter, lives / live here.
14. The information provided from the local residents was / were relevant to include in the research.
47
Gram. Supp. 21
Focus 2_(the) other & another
Objective: Can correctly use '(the) other' and 'another' with nouns.
ANOTHER
is used for a different thing of the same type
means a different one, or an additional or extra.
is followed by singular countable nouns but with the expressions such as “time, distance, money” it can also
be used with plural nouns.
Can you give me another cup of coffee?
I need another five minutes to finish the test.
I’ve already run two miles. I’ll run for another two miles in the evening.
OTHER
means different ones, or additional or extra, or alternative.
is followed by singular uncountable nouns and plural nouns.
Some music calms people while other music has the opposite effect. (different types of music)
What other books by Charles Dickens have you read, apart from Oliver Twist? (additional or extra books)
This T-shirt is too big. Do you have it in other sizes? (alternative sizes)
THE OTHER
The other with a singular noun means the second of two things or people.
There are only two computers in the office. This computer here is new. The other computer is about five years
old.
The other with a plural noun means the remaining people or things in a group or set.
Joel and Karen are here, but where are the other kids? (the remaining people in a group)
Where are the other two dinner plates? I can only find four. (the remaining things in a set – here six plates)
EXERCISE 1. Choose the best answer to complete the sentences.
1. That cake was lovely. Can I have other / another piece?
2. Our grandmother has bought some books for us. These are mine and the other / other books are Dave’s.
3. Some people work during the day, while another / other people work during the night.
4. These shoes are too small. Can I try the other / another shoes, please?
5. Can you lend me other / another 10 dollars, please? I’ve already spent all the money.
6. There were only enough seats for 20 passengers on the bus. The other / Other ten passengers on the bus had
to stand.
48
EXERCISE 2. Complete the sentences with “another” / “other” / “the other”.
1. I like these two shirts, but this one doesn’t fit me. Can I try ___________ shirt, please?
2. Those magazines belong to Jim, and ___________ ones belong to me.
3. Some commuters believe it’s economical to cycle to work while ___________ commuters prefer to use a
car-sharing scheme.
4. We aren’t close to our destination yet- we have ___________ six miles to go.
5. I’ve packed two bags. If you take the green one, I will take ___________ bag.
6. These paintings are for exhibition only, but all ___________ paintings are for sale.
7. If you like it, I can make ___________ cup of tea for you.
8. We all agree that there should be __________ meeting.
9. It took Sandra half an hour to answer the questions, while __________ students in the class spent an hour.
10. Can you give me __________ dictionary over there. This one is too small.
49
Gram. Supp. 22
Focus 2_Modals 1 (permission)
MODALS (PERMISSION)
Asking for Permission
Giving Permission
Refusing Permission
informal
Can I use your car next Saturday?
Yes, you can.
Yes, of course (you can).
Yes, sure.
No, you can’t.
No, I’m sorry.
formal/
polite
Could I ask a question?
May I make a suggestion?
Might I interrupt for a moment?
Yes, you may.
Yes, of course/certainly.
No, you may not.
No, you couldn’t.
No, I’m sorry/I’m afraid
not.
ASKING FOR PERMISSION
Can / Could / May / Might I….? = Do / Would you mind if …?
●
Could and may are more polite than can.
●
Might is formal. May and Might are used to ask for permission when we don’t know the other person very
well.
We normally reply with: Certainly / Of course / Why not? (to give permission)
No, I’m afraid you can’t. (to refuse permission)
‘May I see the manager, please?’ ‘Certainly.’
‘Can I use your pen for a minute?’ ‘No, I’m afraid you can’t.’
GIVING PERMISSION
can / may = you are allowed to do sth
(can-informal, may-formal)
You can have a picnic here. (= You are allowed to have a picnic here.)
‘Can I borrow your dictionary?’ ‘Yes, you can. / Yes, you may.
*** We don’t use “could” or “might” to give permission.
REFUSING PERMISSION
can’t / mustn’t / may not = you are not allowed to do sth
I’m sorry but you can’t / mustn’t park your car here. (=You aren’t allowed to park your car here.)
(informal-refusing permission)
Customers may not enter this area. (=Customers aren’t allowed to enter this area.)
(formal-refusing-written notice)
TALKING ABOUT PERMISSION
●
We use can and be allowed to to refer to laws or regulations.
All citizens over the age of 18 can / are allowed to vote. (law)
50
●
We use could or was/were allowed to to say that we had general permission to do something in the past,
but we can only use was/were allowed to (not could) while talking about permission for one particular action.
I could / was allowed to go out alone when I was 18. (general permission)
I was allowed to go out alone last night. (permission for one particular action) (we cannot use “could”)
●
We can use will / won’t be allowed to to talk about permission at a time in the future.
After you complete the training, you will be allowed to use the equipment on your own.
EXERCISE 1: Choose the best answer.
1. A: Excuse me, sir. Visitors can’t / couldn’t park here, I’m afraid.
B: Oh, I’m sorry. Where can I park instead?
2. A: Must / Might I use your telephone, please?
B: I’m sorry. It’s out of order.
3. A: Good morning. This is Brinley Insurance. Could / Should I speak to Mrs Canford?
B: This is Mrs Canford.
A: Hello, Mrs Canford. May I / Were I allowed to ask you some questions about your house insurance?
B: I’m sorry. I’m rather busy at the moment.
4. A: What’s going to happen after the new anti-smoking laws start next month?
B: Well, people couldn't / won’t be allowed to smoke in restaurants.
A: Will they be allowed to / Can they smoke in offices?
B: No, I don’t think so.
5. A: This old photo of you at school is so funny. Did you always wear old jeans to school?
B: No, we usually wore school uniforms but we could / were allowed to wear jeans on that day because it was the
last day of term.
A: Really? At my old school you could / might wear anything you liked!
EXERCISE 2 Rewrite the sentences with the words in parentheses. Do not change the meaning.
1. You may not use pens in writing exam. (to)
______________________________________________________________________
2. I could return home after 11 o’clock at night when I was young. (was)
______________________________________________________________________
3. All students are allowed to use the library. (can)
______________________________________________________________________
4. Tom can’t touch those files. (to)
______________________________________________________________________
5. I had permission to leave work early yesterday. (was)
______________________________________________________________________
51
Gram. Supp. 23
Focus 2_Modals 2 (don't need to-supposed to, etc.)
MODALS
FUNCTIONS
MODALS
EXAMPLE SENTENCES
A: Where is Tim?
B: He may / might / could be at the library.
may
POSSIBILITY
might
She may / might / could help us with the work.
could
(It is possible that she will help us with the work.)
(She will probably help us with the work.)
( in question forms; use of “may” and “might” is not common)
Could that man be our new teacher?
can
Sue can speak five languages.
(ability in the present)
could
ABILITY
I could swim better when I was young.
(ability in the past)
(repeated past action)
was/were able to
He was able to drive home despite the snow.
(= He managed to drive home despite the snow.)
(single action in the past; we cannot use ‘could’.)
We couldn’t / weren’t able to avoid the accident.
(There is no difference in meaning in negative sentences.)
You look terrible. You should / ought to see a doctor.
You shouldn’t / ought not to smoke.
should
ADVICE
ought to
had better
*We use should / shouldn’t and ought to / ought not to when
we think sth.is a good / bad idea in general or to give advice in a
particular situation.
You’d better check the plane times first.
(If you don’t do this, your journey might be difficult.)
*We use had better (not) to give advice and warnings in a
particular situation. It means “if you don’t do / do this, something
bad will happen''.
52
EXERCISE 1. Choose the best answer.
1. Although he felt ill, he could / should / was able to finish all the paperwork.
2. You should / may / could think about the offer carefully if you don’t want to be sorry.
3. I had to / might / had better be home late tonight, so don’t wait dinner for me.
4. The roads don’t have to / might / had better get very busy tomorrow afternoon because there is a demonstration.
5. Could/ may/ might John be sick today? He missed the meeting in the morning.
EXERCISE 2. Choose the best answer to complete the dialogue.
Jerry: “ Hey Chris, have you seen Tim today? He wasn’t in the class this morning.
Chris: “ No I haven’t. Actually, he 1_________ be in the library. He has a Spanish project to finish until Friday.
However, he 2____________ miss the lessons because will probably fail because of his absenteeism.
Jerry: “You have got a point there. Last year I had the same problem. Luckily our Spanish teacher knew me very well
so I 3____________ persuade her that I wouldn’t miss any lessons at the end of the term. Tim 4___________study for
the project in her free times not at school time. 5______ you speak Spanish well?”
Chris: “Unfortunately no… I 6________ speak Italian fluently but not Spanish. When I was eight we spent a year in
Spain for a year I 7_________ speak quite well but I forgot everything…
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
A. had better
A. can’t
A. was able to
A. might
A. Could
A. can
A. ought to
B. can
B. had better not
B. could
B. should
B. might
B. was able to
B. could
C. might
D. should
C. wasn’t able to
D. may not
C. ought to
D. should
C. was able to
D. can
C. should
D. can
C. should
D.should
C. was able to
D. might
EXERCISE 3. Rewrite the sentences with the words in parentheses. Do not change the meaning.
1. It is a good idea to get a good mosquito repellent when you go camping. (should)
______________________________________________________________________
2. She probably won’t finish the course. (might)
______________________________________________________________________
3. Perhaps Amy will agree to translate these documents for you. (could)
______________________________________________________________________
4. It is possible that Sue will be late this evening. (may)
______________________________________________________________________
5. Steve managed to repair the bike after trying for two hours. (able)
______________________________________________________________________
53
NECESSITY (Present / Future)
must
have to
NECESSITY (Past)
need to
had to
I must study for the exam.
(I feel this is necessary.)
He has to wear a uniform at school.
I had to work until 9 yesterday.
(These are the rules.)
He had to stay home because he was ill.
I need to send my boss an email.
(It’s necessary for me to send my boss an email)
ABSENCE OF NECESSITY (Present / Future)
don’t have to
don’t need to
needn’t
ABSENCE OF NECESSITY (Past)
didn’t have to
didn’t need to
You don’t have to / don’t need to / needn’t attend the
meeting. It has just been cancelled.
We didn’t have to / didn’t need to wait for a long time
to get the tickets. There were only a few people in line.
(It isn’t necessary for you to attend the meeting.)
(It wasn’t necessary for us to wait for a long time.)
Jack is a member of the club, so he doesn’t have to /
doesn’t need to / needn’t pay to get in.
She didn’t have to / didn't need to call a taxi
yesterday. Her friend picked her up.
(It isn’t necessary for Jack to pay to get in.)
(It wasn’t necessary for her to call a taxi.)
EXPECTATION (Present)
EXPECTATION (Past)
am/is/are supposed to
was/were supposed to
You are supposed to finish this work by 12.
(Your boss expects you to finish the work by 12).
You are supposed to be on time for class. If you are
late, the teacher gets angry.
(The teacher expects you to be on time for class.)
We aren't supposed to sit on the grass. The notice
says, "Keep off the grass."
She was supposed to bring the books back yesterday,
but she forgot them.
(We expected her to bring the books back yesterday, but
she didn’t)
I was supposed to go to work early yesterday, but I
overslept, so my boss got angry with me.
(Result: I went to work late.)
54
EXERCISE 4. Choose the best answer.
1. You don’t need to / had better not / didn’t need to bring any food tomorrow. I’ll have enough for us all.
2. We must / had to / were supposed to cancel the picnic because it was raining heavily. So, we stayed at home
instead.
3. When I last crossed the frontier, I needn’t / didn’t need to / am supposed to show my passport.
4. It’s Sally’s birthday on Wednesday. I must / needn’t / had to remember to buy her a present.
5. Oh, look at the sign! We aren’t supposed to / don’t need to / didn’t need to park here. These spaces are for
emergency patients only.
6. Because it’s my day off tomorrow, I should / don’t have to / can’t go to bed early tonight.
7. My sister could / had to /was supposed to arrive at 8 p.m., but her plane was delayed.
8. That looks hot. You had better not / needn’t / weren’t supposed to touch it.
EXERCISE 5. Choose the best answer to complete the dialogue.
Mike: I went skiing at the new dry ski slope last Wednesday. It was great fun.
Della: Really? I didn’t know you 1 ought to / could / must ski!
Mike: Well, I can’t really. But you 2 can’t / had to / don’t need to be an experienced skier. Anyone 3 can / might /
should do it. I mean, I’ve never skied before; so I 4 had to / didn’t have to / might not have lessons. But they have
really good instructors who teach you the basics. After about half-an-hour, I 5 can’t / was able to / must start skiing
reasonably well.
Mike: 6 Did you have to / Can / could you wear special clothes?
Della: Not really. I 7 had to / should / may wear skis, of course. I didn’t have them but I 8 can / didn’t need to / was
able to hire them on the slope.
EXERCISE 6. Rewrite the sentences with the words in parentheses. Do not change the meaning.
1. It is necessary to have a visa to visit the U.S.A. (have to)
You __________________________________________________________________
2. It wasn’t necessary for Ronald to join the meeting. (have)
______________________________________________________________________
3. It was obligatory for all the employees to wear a uniform at the factory. (had)
______________________________________________________________________
4. It is advisable to consult a doctor before taking pills. (you)
______________________________________________________________________
5. Pamela might participate in the meeting. (will)
______________________________________________________________________
6. Was it necessary for you to overwork yesterday? (did)
______________________________________________________________________
7. Is it necessary for all the applicants to take an exam? (have)
______________________________________________________________________
8. There is no need for you to take the dog out today. (not)
______________________________________________________________________
9. Jane’s boss expects her to be in the office at ten. (is)
______________________________________________________________________
10. Alan is good at playing the piano. (play)
______________________________________________________________________
55
Gram. Supp. 24
Focus 2_Question Words
Objective: can ask a range of yes/no and wh- questions
QUESTION WORDS
Word order in an affirmative sentence:
Subject + Verb (Aux+Main verb) + Object (Direct + Indirect object) + Manner adv. + Place adv. + Time adv.
The man + wrote + a letter + to his beautiful wife + enthusiastically + in the train + for two hours yesterday.
WH- question formation: Question Word + Aux verb + Subject + Main Verb +...
NOTE: QUESTION asking about subject >> QUESTION WORD (Who/What/Which) + Main Verb +...
The man / wrote / a letter / to his beautiful wife / enthusiastically / in the train / for two hours / yesterday.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1. Who wrote a letter to his beautiful wife enthusiastically in the train for two hours yesterday?
2. What did the man do enthusiastically in the train for two hours yesterday?
3. What did the man write to his beautiful wife enthusiastically in the train for two hours yesterday?
4. Who did the man write a letter enthusiastically in the train for two hours yesterday?
5. How / In what manner did the man write a letter to his beautiful wife in the train for two hours yesterday?
6. Where did the man write a letter to his beautiful wife enthusiastically for two hours yesterday?
7. How long did the man write a letter to his beautiful wife enthusiastically in the train yesterday?
8. When did the man write a letter to his beautiful wife enthusiastically in the train for two hours?
We normally use the following question words to ask about:
people
Who
Whom
Whose
Which (of)
What
things/animal
s
What
Which (of)
Whose
place
Where
time
How long
How often
What time
When
quantity
How many
How much
manner
How
reason
Why
NOTE:
''What'' is used to ask about people, animals or things when there is an unlimited choice of answers.
● What music do you prefer listening to? (There are many kinds of music to choose from. --unlimited choice)
''Which'' is used to ask about people, animals or things when there is only a limited choice of answers.
● Which hotel are you going to stay at--the “Park Hotel” or the “King’s Hotel”? (There are only two hotels to
choose from.--limited choice)
56
Examples:
A: Who(m) do you admire?
B: I admire my mother.
✔ A: Whose car is this?
B: It’s Ted’s.
✔ A: What music do you prefer listening to?
B: I prefer listening to rock music.
✔ A: What does Ann look like?
(to ask for a description of somebody’s physical appearance.)
✔ A: What is Ann like?
B: She’s friendly.
(to ask for a description of somebody’s character)
B: She’s slim with a fair complexion.
✔ A: What does Ann like doing?
B: She likes playing the guitar.
✔ A: Which actress is your favourite in this film?
B: Jennifer Lawrence.
✔ A: Which house is yours?
B: The brown one.
✔ A: Where have you put my shoes?
B: Under your bed.
*How is used alone OR before an adjective / adverb.
✔ A: How was the party?
B: It was excellent.
✔ A: How long does it take you to get to work?
B: It takes twenty minutes.
✔ A: How often do you exercise?
B: Twice a week.
✔ A: How much (money) did he spend?
B: He spent a lot.
✔ A: How far can a kangaroo jump?
B: A long way.
✔ A: How bad is the news?
B: Very bad.
✔ A: How fast can a cheetah run?
B: A cheetah can run seventy miles per hour.
57
✔ A: Why did you throw away the milk?
B: I threw away the milk because it had gone off.
✔ A: What made you upset?
B: The film which I watched made me upset.
✔ A: Who has won the prize?
B: Dr John Gentle has won the prize.
✔ A: Who wants to make the summary of the story?
B: Sue wants to make the summary of the story.
There are two basic types of questions: object questions and subject questions.
●
●
IN OBJECT QUESTIONS, the question word is the object.
We normally put an auxiliary verb (do/did…) before the subject.
QUESTION asking about object >> QUESTION WORD + Aux verb + Subject + Main Verb +...
A: Who(m) did you call five minutes ago?
B: I called my mother five minutes ago.
●
A: What are you writing?
B: I’m writing an e-mail.
IN SUBJECT QUESTIONS, the question word is the subject.
QUESTION asking about subject >>QUESTION WORD (Who/What/Which) + Main Verb +...
A: Who called you while I was out?
B: My mother called me while you were out.
Subject
1. David
2. Bill
hit
saw
A: What caused the fire?
B: Faulty wiring caused the fire.
Object
Paul.
Julie.
1. a. Who(m) did David hit? Paul.
2. a. Who(m) did Bill see? Julie.
b. Who hit Paul? David.
b. Who saw Julie? Bill.
EXERCISE 1. Complete the gaps with the suitable question words.
1. A: _______________ calories do you consume every day?
B: About 1.800
2. A: _______________ food do you want to eat – a sandwich or pasta?
B: A sandwich, please.
3. A: _______________ sugar do you take in your coffee?
B: One spoonful.
4. A: _______________ are you crying?
B: I’ve hurt my arm.
5. A: _______________ pen is this? I found it on the floor.
B: It’s mine.
6. A: _______________ did you see yesterday?
B: I saw my colleague, Sue.
7. A: _______________ is your new boyfriend like?
B: He is very selfish.
8. A: _______________ spilt coffee on the desk?
B: I did. Sorry.
9. A: _______________ have you been waiting?
B: About half an hour.
10. A: ______________ kind of books do you like reading?
B: Adventure books.
58
EXERCISE 2. Put the words in the correct order to make questions.
1. do / call / how often / you / mother / your ?
_______________________________________________________________
2. what / doing / while / sister / were / you / your / was / the / kitchen / cooking / in
_______________________________________________________________
3. you / go / who / a / with / did / on / picnic ?
_______________________________________________________________
4. use / play / when / did / you / to / what / child / were / a / you ?
_______________________________________________________________
5. the / film / when / arrived / you / had / at / started / cinema / the ?
_______________________________________________________________
6. going / buy / are / a / when / you / to / car / new ?
_______________________________________________________________
7. will / buy / book / why / you / that / grammar ?
_______________________________________________________________
8. when / this / was / book / written ?
_______________________________________________________________
EXERCISE 3. Look at the sentences below and write a question for the bold parts in the sentences.
Example: John often comes
S
Adv
V
to class
place adv
late.
time adv
How often does John come to class late?
1. Tom broke the window.
________________________________________________________________________?
2. Jim invited Jane to the party.
________________________________________________________________________?
3. It takes ten minutes to drive to the supermarket.
________________________________________________________________________?
4. She is happy because she has won the competition.
________________________________________________________________________?
5. I have spoken to the manager’s secretary about my complaint.
________________________________________________________________________?
6. Jack is going to marry Sophia next month.
________________________________________________________________________?
7. I was washing the dishes when my mother arrived home.
________________________________________________________________________?
8. I will finish typing the reports before I go home.
________________________________________________________________________?
9. David has lost his mother’s purse.
________________________________________________________________________?
10. Jane has worked for this company for three years.
________________________________________________________________________?
11. A simple sentence is an independent clause.
________________________________________________________________________?
12. I never get up before 9 o'clock on Saturdays.
________________________________________________________________________?
13. Watching old films is Tim’s favourite hobby.
________________________________________________________________________?
14. The young girl with the long black hair fell from her bike yesterday in heavy rain.
________________________________________________________________________?
15. You need wood, a hammer, a saw, and lots of nails to build a doll's house.
________________________________________________________________________?
59
EXERCISE 4. Write questions about the underlined information about Tolkien.
John Ronald Reuel Tolkien was born 1 in South Africa2 in 1892. He grew up in an orphanage 3 because he
lost his parents when he was young. At the age of 16, he fell in love with 4 a girl called Edith Bratt for the first
time. He entered college and he studied 5 philology at Oxford University. He was very interested in language and
he invented 6 two new languages. He got married to 7 Edith in 1916.
In 1925, 8 he became a Professor of Old English at Oxford University, and after that, he began writing
books. His first book was The Hobbit. In the late 1930s, Tolkien began writing 9 the ‘Lord of the Rings’. It was
published in three parts and became a success. 10 Tolkien’s wife died in 1971. After two years, Tolkien died of
11
pneumonia.
1. _______________________________________________________________________?
2. _______________________________________________________________________?
3. _______________________________________________________________________?
4. _______________________________________________________________________?
5. _______________________________________________________________________?
6. _______________________________________________________________________?
7. _______________________________________________________________________?
8. _______________________________________________________________________?
9. _______________________________________________________________________?
10. ______________________________________________________________________?
11. ______________________________________________________________________?
EXERCISE 5. Write questions to the answers.
1. Ryan won two races.
a. _______________________________________________________________? Ryan.
b. _______________________________________________________________? Two.
c. _______________________________________________________________? He won two races.
2. There are two shirts. The yellow one is mine.
a. _______________________________________________________________? The yellow one.
b. _______________________________________________________________? Mine.
c. _______________________________________________________________? Two.
3. Stanley goes swimming three times a week.
a. _______________________________________________________________? Three times a week.
b. _______________________________________________________________? He goes swimming.
c. _______________________________________________________________? Stanley.
4. Jack called Mary to tell her the good news.
a. _______________________________________________________________? Jack.
b. _______________________________________________________________? Mary.
c. _______________________________________________________________? To tell her the good news.
5. Mike is going to reply to Tim’s email tomorrow.
a. _______________________________________________________________? Mike.
b. _______________________________________________________________? Tim’s.
c. _______________________________________________________________? Tim’s email.
d. _______________________________________________________________? Tomorrow.
60
EXERCISE 6. There is some missing information in the following text. Ask questions to find the
missing information.
Nasuh Mahruki was _____1_____ years old when he started mountain climbing. He is the first Turkish and
Muslim climber in the world to climb Mount Everest in May 1995. He also participated in the “Seven
Summits” project of climbing the highest peaks of each of the continents in ______2______. Although
_____3_____ climbers completed the “Seven Summits” project, Nasuh was the youngest to achieve this. He
lives in Istanbul, but he goes abroad _____4_____. On these trips, he collects _____5_____ for his books
and documentaries. Nasuh Mahruki is also the founder of AKUT. It was set up in Istanbul in _____6_____ .
AKUT has _____7_____ members from different professions such as doctors, engineers. ______8______
also join AKUT to learn search and rescue techniques. Nasuh Mahruki wants to _____9_____ in the coming
years. In this way he is planning to improve the effectiveness of AKUT in Turkey.
1. __________________________________________________________________________?
2. __________________________________________________________________________?
3. __________________________________________________________________________?
4. __________________________________________________________________________?
5. __________________________________________________________________________?
6. __________________________________________________________________________?
7. __________________________________________________________________________?
8. __________________________________________________________________________?
9. __________________________________________________________________________?
61
Gram. Supp. 31
WHAT ABOUT..? / HOW ABOUT..? / COULD (Making Suggestions)
We can sometimes use "What about ..?" and "How about ..?" to make suggestions to people around.
These structures are commonly used in spoken English.
"What about ..?" and "How about ..?" have the same meaning.
We can use them with a gerund (verb + ing)
● How about a nice drink? or, How about having a nice drink?
● What about a short walk around the park? or, What about taking a short walk around the park?
We can also use ‘COULD’ in similar situations when we make a suggestion, or give advice on what someone might
do in a certain situation.
Making a suggestion
We could go to the movies.
You could go to Albania for your vacation.
-What are we going to do this evening?
-Well, we could go to the cinema.
Giving advice
You could visit Bournemouth while you're there.
- There is an interesting job advertised in the paper. You could apply for it.
- What sort of job? Show me the advertisement.
Suggestions (infinitive forms)
Suggestions (-ing or noun forms)
Why don’t (subject)… ?
Shall (subject)… ?
Let’s …
I suggest (subject) …
Would (subject) like to …
What about …?
How about…?
I suggest ….
I recommend…
Why don’t we visit a museum?
Shall we have a picnic?
Let’s meet at the cinema.
I suggest we arrive early.
Would you like to have coffee after class?
What about visiting a museum?
How about a picnic?
I suggest meeting at 4 o’clock.
I recommend taking a taxi.
Offering Helps with ‘COULD’
We use the modal verbs can, could, shall and would to offer to do things for people.
Would you like…?
Would you like someone to….?
Can I….?
I could…..
Shall I….?
Would you like some help?
Would you like me to help you?
Can I help you?
I could help if you need a hand.
Shall I open the window?
62
I could get you another coffee.
Yes please, that would be lovely." or, "Yes please, I'd love one."
I could do the photocopying, if you like."
"It's OK, I can do it." or, "Don't worry, I'll do it.
Exercise 1. Read the dialogue below and answer the questions.
Matt and Zach are in the office.
Matt: Hey, Zach! Do you want to hang out after work?
Zach: Sure, why not? What shall we do?
Matt: I don’t know. What do you have in mind?
Zach: Why don’t we go to the movies?
Matt: I'm not sure about that, to be honest. The weather is so beautiful, and we've been inside all day.
How about trying the new roof-top restaurant that just opened?
Zach: That sounds like a good idea. I hear they have amazing views.
Matt: Me too. Someone told me it can be hard to get a table though.
Zach: Then what about sneaking out of work a little bit early, so we can get one.
Matt: I don't think that's a good idea. The boss has been so strict lately.
Zach: Okay, fine. But if we can't get a table at the restaurant, we're going to the movies
instead. Matt: That's fair. Meet you in the lobby at 5:00 pm? We can walk there together.
Zach: Sounds good. I'll see you then.
Check your understanding:
1. What did Matt ask Zach?
2. What was Zach's suggestion?
3. Why didn't Matt want to go to the movies?
63
Exercise 2. Match the two sentence halves and write a – e next to the number 1 – 5.
1. __ Would you like to come for lunch
this weekend?
a. That would be great. I would appreciate it if he can
help me.
2. __ I could lend you £100 if you want.
b. Well, actually, my mum’s not feeling well. Maybe
another time.
3. __ Can I get you a cup of coffee?
4.__ Would you like me to ask my brother about
the job advertisement?
5. __ Shall I shut the door if you are cold?
c. That’s very kind of you. I’m in need of money
nowadays.
d. No, I’m OK, thanks, I’ve just had one.
e. Oh, yes please. I’m freezing.
Exercise 3. Complete the gaps with the correct phrases.
How about
have any ideas
Let’s
Shall we
We could
Sure
Why don’t we
A: I’m bored. Would you like to do something this afternoon?
B: 1____________. What shall we do?
A: I don’t know. Do you 2______________?
B: Well, 3______________ go to the cinema?
A: That sounds good. Which film shall we see?
B: 4______________ watching a horror film?
A: I don’t like watching horror films. 5______________ watch the new Star Trek film. I hear it is good.
B:OK. What time is it on?
A: It’s on at 3 o’clock. 6______________ get some food before the film?
B: Sure. 7______________ go to the new Thai restaurant on the high street.
A: Good idea. Let’s leave at half past one.
Exercise 4. Fill in the blanks with Shall / How about / What about / Let’s / Why don’t / Would you like to etc.
1. Hey Jim, _____________________________________ go to the movies with us?
2. So, we all want Italian, right? _____________________________________ going that restaurant near the
beach?
3. What can we do this evening? _____________________________________we watch the game in a bar?
4. A: It’s so hot in here!
B: __________________________________ get out of here and go that bar near the bay!
5. Helen called and said she’s going for a walk. __________________________________ going with her?
64
6. I’d like to do something different this weekend. __________________________________ go
sailing!
7. A: What shall we do?
B: I don’t know... It’s not very warm and it looks as if it’s going to start raining. __________________________ a play?
I think there’s a new one in the auditorium.
8. A: Next month we have some days off. Is there anything special you want to do?
B: Yes!! _______________________________go to Madrid! The Cirque du Soleil’s new show will be there that week!
9. It’s warm and sunny, __________________________________ go roller-skating!
10. A: Would you like to go shopping on Saturday?
B: I can’t, I don’t have much money right now. __________________________________ hiking? The weather
is really nice and it’s cheaper!
Exercise 5. Make some offers with ‘could’ in these situations below.
1. You are on a bus. You have a seat, but an elderly man is standing. You offer him your seat
You: ___________________________________________________
Man: Oh. That’s very kind of you. Thank you so much.
2. Paul has come to see you in your flat. You offer him something to eat.
You: ______________________________________________________.
Paul: No, thank you. I’ve just eaten.
3. A friend of yours is interested in one of your books. You invite him to borrow it.
Friend: This looks very interesting.
You: Yes, it’s a good book. _____________________________________.
Exercise 6. Write a suggestion for each conversation below using What about ..? / How about ..? structures.
1. Harry and Ginny are waiting for the bus after class.
Harry: _____________________________________________________________?
Ginny: Not today, I’m too tired. Why not tomorrow?
Harry : Fine.
65
2. Cho and Luna are walking in the mountains. After two hours:
Cho : _____________________________________________________________?
I’m quite tired.
Luna: Yeah, I’m tired too. Let’s sit on those rocks over there.
3. Molly and Arthur’s children are on school holiday next week.
Molly: _____________________________________________________________?
Arthur: Yes, it would be great to be with the kids. I have meetings on Monday and Friday, but I should be able to
take Wednesday off. Is that OK with you?
Molly: Wednesday? Yes, perfect!
Exercise 7. With a partner, practice making suggestions with ‘could’ in the following
situations.
Situation 1
Speaker A: You love movies and you can’t wait to see the new action film this weekend.
Speaker B: You hate action films and would rather do something different (outside if possible). You love any type
of sport and would be willing to go to the skate park, ride bikes or do any other activity which involves movement.
Both Speakers: Try to come to some type of agreement that suits both of you.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Situation 2
Speaker A: You have a girlfriend (boyfriend) who you like very much. The problem is you can never agree on things
to do in the afternoon. It’s a hot day, 90 degrees and you feel like going to the pool. Your gf/bf can’t stand
swimming and would rather be anywhere else.
Speaker B: You like your gf/bf , but you don’t really like swimming very much. You prefer to be somewhere
indoors, maybe at a movie or at a friend’s house in the air conditioning.
Both Speakers: Try to come to some type of agreement that suits both of you.
_________________________________________________________________________________________
66
Gram. Supp. 35
Focus 3_Even if
Objective: Can describe present or future outcomes of a hypothetical situation using 'even if'.
EVEN IF
It is used to emphasize that something will / would happen in any case or condition.
The condition doesn’t matter, the result won’t change.
Even if + present simple, will V1 / present modals
Even if + past simple, would V1
Examples:
Even if you take a taxi, you’ll miss your plane.
I wouldn’t go shopping even if I had spare time.
EXERCISE 1. Complete the sentences with the correct form of the words in parentheses.
1. She doesn’t understand anything. I don’t think she will succeed even if she ____________ (study) day and night.
2. I can’t help you under these circumstances even if you ____________ (tell) me the truth.
3. Even if Tim ____________ (earn) a high salary, he wouldn’t buy a fast car.
4. We will go on holiday even if you ____________ (not join) us.
5. Even if you _____________ (think) you won’t be successful, you should try it at least.
6. I wouldn’t go to the party even if they ________________ (invite) me.
7. Even if she didn’t get a scholarship, she _______________ (get) a course.
8. I ______________ (not get) in touch with him even if he writes to me.
EXERCISE 2. Match the sentences and join them with “even if”.
1. I will go swimming in the sea.
2. You invited her to your party.
3. I have to do regular exercises.
4. I won’t lend him any money
5. You hurry.
6. I don’t want to work for that company.
7. I always wake up at 8 o’clock.
8. Nobody believes him.
a. Its conditions are good
b. He promises to pay it back.
c. I forget to set the alarm.
d. He tells the truth
e. She wouldn’t come.
f. My back aches.
g. You can’t catch the plane. It’s too late.
h. It rains.
1. ____________________________________________________________________________________
2. ____________________________________________________________________________________
3. ____________________________________________________________________________________
4. ____________________________________________________________________________________
5. ____________________________________________________________________________________
6. ____________________________________________________________________________________
7. ____________________________________________________________________________________
8. ____________________________________________________________________________________
67
Gram. Supp. 37
Focus 3_In case & In Case of
Objective: can use 'in case' or 'in case of’ to refer to future eventualities
in case + clause:
used to express that we are doing
something in preparation for
something which might happen.
I will give you the keys in case I go out.
I will buy some milk in case this bottle is not enough.
Bring a map in case you get lost.
I took my umbrella with me in case it rained.
In case of fire, leave the building as quickly as possible.
(‘If there is a fire, leave the building.’)
in case of + noun / Ving
used to say what we should do if or
when something happens.
I told my son to call 112 in case of an emergency.
(‘If there is any emergency, my son is ready to call 112.’)
In case of having an allergic reaction, she has an epiPen with her all the
time.
She has a savings account for her children in case of losing her job.
*Do not use will / would after in case.
* You can use in case with present tense for present / future reference and with past tense for past reference.
EXERCISE 1. Read the sentences below, and fill in the blanks with in case or in case of.
1. ______________ poisoning, do not give the patient anything to eat or drink.
2. ______________ I forget later, here are the keys to the garage.
3. Shall I keep some chicken salad for your brother ______________ he’s hungry when he gets here?
4. ______________ a breakdown, please press the alarm button and call this number.
5. I brought my umbrella ______________ sudden rain.
6. Let’s take our swimming costumes ______________ there’s a pool at the hotel.
EXERCISE 2. Connect the sentences below using in case or in case of.
1. There might be fire. Call the emergency immediately when this happens.
___________________________________________________________________________________
2. It’s dangerous outside. I’ll take my phone with me.
___________________________________________________________________________________
3. You had better close the windows. It may rain heavily.
___________________________________________________________________________________
4. Loren will draw a plan for them. They may get confused.
___________________________________________________________________________________
5. Harry bought some eggs on the way home. His wife might want some.
___________________________________________________________________________________
6. Ted had better come home early. The visitors will come today.
___________________________________________________________________________________
68
Gram. Supp. 44
Level 2_Prefixes & Suffixes
PREFIXES AND SUFFIXES
A prefix is a group of letters placed before the root of a word.
For example, the word “unhappy” consists of the prefix “un-” [which means “not”] combined with the root
(or stem) word “happy”; the word “unhappy” means “not happy.”
A suffix is a group of letters placed after the root of a word.
For example, the word flavorless consists of the root word “flavor” combined with the suffix “-less” [which
means “without”]; the word “flavorless” means “having no flavor.”
Prefixes and suffixes change the meanings of the words. Look at the word below ‘unchangeable’:
un
+ change +
able
prefix
root word
suffix
=
unchangeable
new word
●
The prefix ‘un’ means ‘not’.
●
The root word ‘change’ means ‘to make sth different’.
●
The suffix ‘able’ means ‘can do’.
●
Therefore, unchangeable means ‘not able to be made different’.
● Study the bold words in the sentences. What is the root word of each one? How did you understand their
meanings? What are their parts of speech?
1. The issue is very problematic.
_____________________________
2. We ended up having a very enjoyable day.
_________________________________
3. He was acting very irresponsibly.
_________________________________
Have a look at the explanations below.
1. problem (n): a situation hard to deal with
2. enjoy (v): to have a good time
- atic (suffix)
-able (suffix)
3. responsible (adj): being in charge of - ir (prefix)
careless things
problematic (adjective): difficult to solve
enjoyable (adjective): giving pleasure or happiness
-ly(suffix) irresponsibly (adverb): in a manner of doing
You can see that with the help of prefixes and suffixes, a word can change part of speech and sometimes
meaning (see like-likely). Furthermore, when you know the meaning of any part, it can help you to understand
the whole word most of the time.
Let’s see an example of the variations of the word settle and its different functions in the texts below.
Settle(v)
1. to establish in residence
2. to make quiet or orderly
settle
settlers
settling
unsettle
settlements
resettled
unsettling
In the 1800´s, people who moved from Pennsylvania to Kentucky were called settlers. The forts or towns they
built and lived in were called settlements. If the Indians attacked them and drove them away, people who later came
back and moved onto the land were said to have resettled the land.
On a long trip, a mother may yell at her noisy children to settle down. She may say that their noise has an
unsettling effect on her nerves. She hopes, though, that the quiet, relaxing music she puts on the radio has a settling
effect on them, and they will go to sleep, but their father is afraid that the music may unsettle them more.
In the first text, we need a noun to complete the sentence, settlers is a noun that refers to a name given to
people. Settlements is also a noun showing the name given to towns and resettled is the appropriate form for the
69
present perfect tense. On the other hand, settle and unsettle are verbs that are needed to complete the actions in the
sentences; settling works in this case as an adjective.
Here are some of the prefixes and suffixes with their meanings and example words.
Prefix
un-
dis-
meaning
not
not,
opposite of
mis
wrongly
example
unfriendly, unhappy,
unhealthy, unlikely
disagree, disable, distrust,
dishonest
misunderstand, misuse,
misinformation, misspell
Suffix
meaning
example
-able, -ible
can be done
comfortable,
suitable, sensible,
accessible
-al, -ial
having
characteristics of
personal, natural,
industrial, tutorial
-ful
full of
careful, respectful,
hopeful, beautiful
-ion, -tion,
-ation,
ition
act, process
occasion,
attraction,
organization,
celebration
-ity, -ty
state of
humanity,
personality
royalty, certainty
in-, im-,
il-, ir-1
not
inexperienced,
impossible, illogical,
irresponsible
-ive,
-ative,
-itive
adjective form of a
noun /verb
creative, initiative,
talkative,
competitive
re-
again
reread, rewrite, redo,
rephrase
-less
without
careless, helpless,
effortless,
waterless
over-
above or higher
than something
else
overcook, overweight,
oversleep, overjoyed
- ment
action or process
improvement,
treatment,
government,
statement
pre/post-
before
prehistoric, preview,
postgraduation, post-war
-ness
state of, condition
of
happiness, illness,
darkness,
weakness
co-
together
cooperate, coexist,
co-pilot, coordinate
-ance
act of, state of
dominance,
ignorance,
ex-
after
1. out
extent, exclude
2. former
ex-wife, ex-president
anti-
against,
opposite
inter- /
intra-
among,
between /
inside; within
-ence
difference,
intelligence
-cy
state of being
democracy,
conspiracy,
fluency,
bankruptcy
antisocial, antidepressant,
antibiotic, antifreeze
-er
one who is; a
person or thing that
teacher, singer,
lover, sleeper
international, interaction
-ist
one whose
profession is or
who is in favor of
dentist, chemist,
socialist, racist
intra-departmental,
1
-im => when the root word begins with m or p (e.g.: immature, impure, etc.)
-il => when the root word begins with l (e.g.: illegal, illegible, etc.)
-ir => when the root word begins with r (e.g.: irrational, irrelevant, etc.)
For further exercise: https://www.holy-trinity-broadstairs.kent.sch.uk/attachments/download.asp?file=1084&type=pdf
70
intra-muscular
out-
greater, better,
further, longer
an idea
outnumber, outgrow,
outlive, outweigh
-en
-fy
to make (makes
the root into a verb)
soften, dignify,
sterilize, advertise
-ize,-ise
trans-
over, across
transatlantic, transport,
transoceanic,
transcontinental
-ous
the nature of or
having quality of
poisonous,
glorious,
dangerous,
adventurous
non-
against
nonsense, non-native,
non-stop, non-fiction
-dom
the condition or
state of
freedom, kingdom,
boredom, wisdom
multi-
more than one;
many
multinational,
multi-coloured,
multilingual,
multimillionaire
-hood
state of being
boyhood,
neighborhood,
childhood,
adulthood
bi-
two
bilingual, biannual,
bicycle, biweekly
-ship
state of being
relationship,
hardship,
friendship,
scholarship
auto-
self; of or by
yourself
automatic, autobiography,
automobile, autopilot
-ly
in a manner of
softly, calmly,
bravely, wisely
-y
full of
messy, victory,
noisy, dusty, tasty
EXERCISES
EXERCISE 1. Add adjective SUFFIXES to the words in brackets to complete the text.
The city of Detroit, USA, was famous for its __________1 (value) car industry. In the early days, the city was
__________2 (response) for the majority of cars in the USA, and Detroit’s streets were full of cars. A police officer
called William Potts saw that the organization of the traffic was _______________ 3 (hope) and the traffic was very
slow. So, in 1920, he developed an _______________4 (effect) system of lights to regulate the flow of cars. He used
the same colors as the railway system and put the lights in a tower so that it would be __________5 (ease) for drivers
to see them even on rainy days.
EXERCISE 2. Choose the correct option.
The most famous 1______ in the world is the Eiffel Tower in Paris. It is situated in an area called Champs-de-Mars,
and you get a wonderful view of the surrounding city from the top. 2______, not everyone is impressed by the Eiffel
Tower, and it has received a lot of criticism from many Parisians who think it is ugly and 3______. However, for the
thousands of tourists who visit Paris every year, its 4______ will always remain assured.
1. a. construct
b. construction
c. constructive
d. constructor
2. a. surprise
b. unsurprising
c. surprisingly
d. surprising
3. a. attractive
b. attraction
c. unattractive
d. attractively
4. a. popular
b. popularity
c. popularly
d. unpopular
71
EXERCISE 3. Choose the correct form of the words given into the blanks.
This week, our team is going to celebrate its biggest ACHIEVE / ACHIEVEMENT / ACHIEVER 1 of the last ten
years. We set up a new business with my childhood friends ten years ago. Since then, we have dealt with a lot of
DIFFICULT / DIFFICULTIES 2 in the field. For example, once we couldn’t finish a project on time because one of the
engineers acted as a weak and DECISIVE / INDECISIVE / DECISION 3 leader in that project. He could not organize
the group EFFECT / EFFECTIVE / EFFECTIVELY 4. For this reason, this failure was no surprise for us and
UNFORTUNATELY / FORTUNATELY / FORTUNATE 5, they did not trust us again. Then for some time, no one
offered ASSIST / ASSISTANT / ASSISTANCE 6 to us but with a lot of effort, we managed to improve our business in
time.
EXERCISE 4. Fill in the blanks with the correct form of the words as in the example.
There comes a time when not having a car becomes very 0impractical. Choosing
your first car is an1_________ experience. Most men’s 2_________ is so vivid that
they see themselves speeding along in a 3_________ sports car, attracting
4
_________ looks from those who pass. In 5_________ this does not happen very
often. You have to consider more practical and financial aspects when choosing a
car. The 6_________ is usually between a small city car which is economical to run
and easy to park. However, a larger family car is more comfortable and has more
7
_________ features.
0.PRACTICAL
1. EXCITE
2. IMAGINE
3. POWER
4. ENVY
5. REAL
6. CHOOSE
7. SAFE
EXERCISE 5. Complete the sentences by writing the correct prefix in the blank space. You can use a
dictionary to help you. You can use the same prefix more than once.
dis-in
misreun-im
-over
1. Perla’s excuse for being late was so _____believable!
2. It is _____correct to address people by their first name at formal events.
3. Let's look at this information again. We should _____view it before the test.
4. I saw Allison just a moment ago, but now I can't find her! It seems that she _____appeared.
5. I explained Elisa what was happening, but she definitely ___________understood my point of view.
6. I was surprised by my mother’s call. It was very _______expected.
7. He believes he isn’t ever going to die. He thinks he is ______mortal.
8. Please find another chair. You look _______comfortable.
9. His parents have punished her because of her _____obedience.
10.Take care, as cauliflower goes from undercooked to ______cooked very quickly.
72
EXERCISE 6. Fill in the conversations with the correct form of the words.
1. VIOLENCE 2. BEHAVE 3. EDUCATE 4. GLOBE
Some people think watching too much TV is not good because 1_________ films and programmes cause
aggressive 2____________ and angry feelings, so people stop showing empathy for others. However, others
think that TV is fun and helps us to relax. It can also be 3____________ because some shows and
documentaries teach us a lot of things. Besides, when we watch TV, we can get the latest news and
4
____________ issues. Also, when we compare it to newspapers, TV tells us what is happening right now,
but newspapers give us old news.
EXERCISE 7. Fill in the conversations with the correct form of the words.
1.RELAX
2.WARM
3.PEACE
4.POLLUTE
5.LUXURY
6.POPULAR
7.NOISE
Many people dream of a _________ holiday on a tropical island. They imagine lying on golden beaches,
the 2_________ of the sea, and clear blue sky. Such islands are very 3_________ . They are clean and
4
_________ and the islanders are always hospitable. Although the hotels are often large and 5_________ ,
they welcome you in a quite friendly way. Most visitors don’t want the 6_________ of these islands to
increase. They want to keep their secret to themselves so that they can enjoy their holiday without
7
______________ crowds around.
1
EXERCISE 8. Make new words from the words in parentheses and complete the sentences.
1. Many young people are looking for jobs abroad because of the high ___________________ in Turkey. (EMPLOY)
2. The group is trying to raise public _______________________ about homelessness. (AWARE)
3. He has the right experience and a lot of academic ________________________ for the job. He is sure to get the
job. (QUALIFY)
4. Sites such as YouTube allow you to ________________________ your own videos. (LOAD)
5. You should not forget to ____________________ batteries in your MP3 player as they look very old. (PLACE)
6. If you don’t want to be late for your first class in the morning, you should not ___________________. (SLEEP)
7. A software ______________________ is a person who designs computer programs. (DEVELOP)
8. Gemma speaks British and Spanish fluently; he is _____________________ as his mother is from Cambridge and
his father is from Madrid. (LINGUAL)
9. Blanca failed to patent her _______________________ and she never made a penny from it. (INVENT)
10. It was an _____________________ expedition up the Amazon which we can never forget. (ADVENTURE)
11. He gave her a ____________________________ bunch of flowers for her birthday. (BEAUTY)
12. He got together with his_________________________ friend after about ten years.(CHILD)
13. It was not an individual choice, but it was a(n) ______________________ decision to stage a walk-out in protest.
(COLLECT)
EXERCISE 9. Fill in the blanks with the correct form of the words given.
My trip to Africa was a holiday of my lifetime. During my 1_________________ (forget) holiday in Africa, I
noticed that human beings are the most dangerous things for nature. We cause deforestation as we destroy green
areas without thinking. Moreover, 2_______________ (legal) hunters kill the animals out of the hunting season. As a
result of our 3_______________ (destroy) of nature, ecological balance changes, and this causes natural disasters to
happen. Therefore, to keep the balance and save the world, 4_________________ (conserve) try to attract attention
to the men’s harm to the nature.
73
Gram. Supp. 45
Level 2_Prefixes & Suffixes_Practice (WORKSHEET)
PREFIXES & SUFFIXES
EXERCISE 1. Fill in the blanks with the correct PREFIX to complete the words.
im
micro
un
dis
re
over
Katherine wanted to plant a garden, but she was ____ sure which kind of flower she wanted to grow. Her mother took
her to the gardening store to help her decide. She liked all the flowers so much, and she wished she could plant one
of every kind! Katherine was _____2appointed when her mother told her that would be ____ 3possible. Katherine was
having trouble choosing just one kind of flower. There were so many kinds that Katherine felt ______4 whelmed.
Some had large blooms, and some were so small that they seemed almost ______5scopic! Katherine's mother _____6
minded her that they could choose a different flower next season. Katherine settled on daisies and was very happy
with her garden!
1
EXERCISE 2. Choose the best option.
1. What prefix would you add to the word 'finished' to show that there is still some work to be done?
A) un
B) dis
C) mis
2. What prefix would you add to the word 'view' to indicate that you see something before other people do?
A) re
B) pre
C) dis
3. What suffix would you add to the word 'blame' to show you have done nothing wrong?
A) ness
B) less
C) ed
4. Which of these words cannot be made into another word by adding the prefix 'sub'?
A) way
B) marine
C) book
5. Which of these prefixes means below?
A) under
B) pre
C) over
6. What does the prefix do to the word 'cooked' in this sentence? The pies were precooked.
A) It tells you that you need to cook the pies.
B) It tells you that the pies need cooking again.
C) It tells you that the pies have already been cooked.
7. What does the prefix 'dis' do to the word ''appeared'' in this sentence? The cat disappeared before her very eyes.
A) It tells you that the cat appeared bigger than before.
B) It tells you that the cat vanished.
C) It tells you that the act appeared to be further away.
8. What does the suffix 'ful' do to the word ''house'' in this sentence? She had a houseful that weekend.
A) It tells you that her house was empty that weekend.
B) It tells you that her house was a mess that weekend.
C) It tells you that she had lots of people staying in her house that weekend.
EXERCISE 3. Complete the text with the correct form of the word in brackets.
When I was little, I used to dream of being a train driver, but since then I’ve decided that I’d rather have a more
_________________1 (challenge) job. I’d quite like to be an accountant, but I think it could be a bit
___________________2 (stress) at times, and I don’t know if I could cope too well with all the paperwork. On the other
hand, I don’t really fancy doing a/an __________________3 (skilled) job, either because I think it could get
________________4 (boredom). Labourers on a ________________5 (build) site have to work very hard in all kinds of
weather, so I don’t think I’d like to do that either. One thing I do now is I want my job to be well __________________ 6
(pay), so that I can buy a nice car and a house.
74
EXERCISE 4. Complete the letter of job application with the appropriate form of the words in brackets.
Dear Sir or Madam,
I'm writing in response to your 1____________ (ADVERTISE) for a Digital Marketing Executive. My name is Susan
Nelson and I'm a Social Media Marketing Assistant. I have had this job for the past two years and I believe you will be
2
___________ (INTEREST) in my skills.
My work involves designing and implementing online marketing campaigns across a range of channels. I am very
___________ (COMPETE) in using analytics to assess campaign success and plan future 4____________
(RESPONSE) for each member. I work with a range of social media platforms and tools for digital marketing.
3
I have always worked in the retail industry and am familiar with the 5___________ (DEMAND) nature of business and
have the skills to push your business forward through creativity and 6____________ (DETERMINE). I would like the
opportunity to prove I am 7___________ (RELY) on this role bringing my enthusiasm and experience.
Following my research into your company I feel we would be a good fit for each other and I would welcome the
opportunity to discuss your 8__________ (DECIDE) with you in person.
Please find attached my CV.
I look forward to hearing from you.
Yours faithfully,
Susan Nelson
EXERCISE 5. Complete the text with the correct form of the words given.
Chess-boxing
Most people think chess and boxing are so different that they are almost opposite: one relies on
____________ (STRONG), courage or aggression, the other on mental 2____________(CONCENTRATE), planning
and tactics. However, a new sport has been invented which is a 3____________ (COMBINE) of these two sports:
chess-boxing. In a chess-boxing match, the two 4____________(COMPETE) take part in alternating rounds of chess
and boxing. The contest starts with a round of chess, followed by a round of boxing, followed by another round of
chess, and so on, up to a maximum of eleven rounds: six of chess and five of boxing. The rounds of chess are a
minute 5____________(LONG) than the rounds of boxing.
1
Chess-boxing is a minority sport, but it is growing 6____________ (STEADY). The first world championship
was held in Berlin in 2007 and was won by a 37-year-old German policeman thanks to a checkmate in the chess in
round seven.
EXERCISE 6. Complete the text with the correct form of the word in brackets.
Sleep
Scientists continually offer new _________________1 (interpret) and make new_________________2 (discover)
about the condition known as ‘sleep’. People are paid to sleep with _________________3 (vary) machines attached to
them. These monitor changes in eye _________________4 (move), heartbeat, and body temperature, among other
things. This information is fed into a computer, and after a few _________________5 (calculate) the scientist can
establish the _________________6 (deep) and quality of sleep. It is unclear how successful these experiments are in
establishing _________________7 (exact) what goes on between losing_________________ 8 (conscious) and
awakening. However, one’s_________________9 (behave) the following day is dependent on how
_________________10 (satisfy) the previous night’s sleep was.
75
EXERCISE 7. Complete the text with the correct form of the words given.
Idioms
A high (0) percentage of the English language consists of idioms which a (1)
_____________ will have to acquire to achieve complete (2) _____________.
However, good (3)_____________ is not based on the quantity of idioms used,
but on their appropriate usage.
0. PERCENT
1. LEARN
2. FLUENT
3.COMMUNICATE
Students of English can (4) _____________ make themselves understood using
a minimal amount of idioms, but some feel it is a (5) _____________ to learn
them and then use them as often as possible to make a good (6)
______________ and show how good their language is.
4. EASE
5. NECESSARY
6. IMPRESS
However, using them (7)_____________ can sound worse than not using them
at all. Thankfully, there are (8) _____________ teachers who can provide clear
(9)_____________ and help with practice.
7. CORRECT
8. QUALITY
9. EXPLAIN
EXERCISE 8. Read the sentences 1-5 below and decide on the correct prefix or suffix for the words in italics.
1. Recently, scientists have become interested in strange physchology powers.
__________
2. A professor at Edinburg University is leading an investigate into the issue.
__________
3. He has chosen a controversial and surprise subject-telepathy.
__________
4. But, many people have doubts that this is a science subject.
__________
5. He believes that telepathy is a nature talent.
_________
6. However, some people think that it involves some kind of honesty or trickery.
_________
EXERCISE 9. Complete the paragraph using the words in brackets to form a word that fits into each gap.
Know Your Rights!
If you are a regular ________________1 (SHOP), you should make sure you know your ________________ 2
(CONSUME) rights. For example, did you know that TV, radio and newspaper _________________ 3 (ADVERTISE)
have to tell the truth ? If they say something about a _________________4 (PRODUCE) that isn’t true, they can be
taken to court. Also, if you order something and they promise _________________5 (DELIVER) before a certain date,
you should get some money back if it doesn’t arrive in time.
The general rule is: don’t be afraid to make a _________________6 (COMPLAIN). And if a shop
_________________7 (ASSIST) is _________________8 (HELPFUL) or rude, always insist on speaking to the
_________________9 (MANAGE). The shop certainly doesn’t want to lose one of its _________________ 10
(CUSTOM). Now that more and more people are buying things online, shops have to do more for the
_________________11 (HAPPY) of the buyers.
76
DEFINING RELATIVE CLAUSES WORKSHEET
We use defining relative clauses to identify who or what we are talking about. We can use
Who or that- for people
Which or that- for things
Whose- for possessions
When- for time
Where - for places
Whom- for people (as the
object of the relative clause)
Why- for reasons
The man who/that bought the red car is very wealthy.
The radio which/ that was in the car was worth 2000 dollars.
Look, isn’t that the woman whose handbag you like very much?
I will never forget the day when I met you.
The garage where the man kept the car was very dirty.
She is the woman about whom I told you.
She is the woman whom I told you about.
Tell me the reason why you would like to work in this company
Note: We can leave out the relative pronoun if it is the object of the verb. (whose and where can’t be omitted)
The first car (that) I had was a ten-year-old Volkswagen
The man (who/that/whom) I met yesterday told me how to get to the concert hall.
DEFINING RELATIVE CLAUSES EXERCISES
A. Complete the sentences with relative clauses using the phrases in the box.
they repair bicycles
it makes furniture
they play jazz
my brother works there
there are a lot of parks there
his job is similar to a doctor’s
his classes are so interesting
the new hospital will be there
1. They work on the building site where the new hospital will be.
2. A paramedic is a person ______________________________________.
3. Tom works for a design company ______________________________________.
4. We live in a district
______________________________________.
5. They are looking for musicians ______________________________________.
6. Do you know any mechanics ______________________________________.
7. He’s the lecturer ______________________________________.
8. That’s the bank
______________________________________.
B. Look at the sentences. Correct any mistake.
1. The man whose bought the red car is very wealthy.
2. The garage who sold him the car is in the High Street.
3. The radio was in the car has been missing for two days.
4. The man which radio was stolen went to the police.
5. The policeman which dealt with the case is my next door neighbor.
6. I went back to the town which I was born.
7. The businessman whom is from India is going to visit us next week.
8. The girl is very kind with who I’m sharing the dormitory.
77
C. Write the correct relative pronoun. Then tick the sentences if the relative pronoun can be left, or put a
cross if it cannot.
Example: Charles Dickens was one of the first authors whose books reached a wide public. X
1. This was partly because, with the first book _____________ he wrote, he introduced a range of mainly London
characters which people found interesting and amusing.
2. He invented people ____________names often suggested what they were like.
3. For example, David Copperfield _____________has a heartless stepfather is called Mr. Murdstone.
4. It was also a result of changes in publishing which were introduced at around the time ____________ he began
writing.
5. Books became cheaper because of new methods of printing _____________ machinery used steam-powered
6. His novels were published as serials, and people waited impatiently to read the next part _____________ he
produced.
7. The man _____________ I met yesterday said he really enjoyed the last book of the writer.
D. Combine the sentences using defining relative pronouns. When the relative pronoun is an object, it can be
omitted (except with whose and where).
1. A man answered the phone. He told me you were away.
______________________________________________________________________________
2. The book is about a poor girl. Dany falls in love with her.
______________________________________________________________________________
3. The building was destroyed in the fire. It has now been rebuilt.
______________________________________________________________________________
4. Some people were arrested yesterday. They have now been released.
______________________________________________________________________________
5. Rotterdam is the port. It is the busiest in Europe.
______________________________________________________________________________
6. They are on a ship. It is crossing the Atlantic.
______________________________________________________________________________
7. They say he will never marry the girl. He loves her.
______________________________________________________________________________
8. 2018 was the year. My son was born in that year.
______________________________________________________________________________
9. That’s the car. It was parked outside our house.
______________________________________________________________________________
10. Dallas is the city. Kennedy was shot there.
______________________________________________________________________________
11. Hiroshima is the place. The first atomic bomb was dropped there.
______________________________________________________________________________
78
12. That’s the man. His dog scared me.
______________________________________________________________________________
13. Sunday is the day. Most countries respect a day of rest on Sunday.
______________________________________________________________________________
14. A stapler is a thing. You use it to attach papers together.
______________________________________________________________________________
15. Your mother-in-law is the person. Her son or daughter is married to you.
______________________________________________________________________________
16. I cannot remember the reason. He wanted us to leave.
______________________________________________________________________________
17. That’s the jacket. I bought it in the sales.
______________________________________________________________________________
18. Alex talked to the woman. He sold her house.
______________________________________________________________________________
79
GRAMMAR SUPPLEMENTARY MATERIALS KEY
Gram. Supp. 4_Focus 1_Impersonal 'IT' ANSWER KEY
Exercise 1
1.day > it
2.Road > It
3. the ticket > it
4. Weather > it
Exercise 2
1.It was very cheap.
2. It was Rachel.
3. It is frustrating.
4. It is very warm.
5. It is important to keep it in a safe place.
6. It takes ten minutes to get ready.
7. It is really hard to solve this problem.
Exercise 3
Students’ own answers.
Gram. Supp. 5_Focus 2_Present continuous-temporary_changing situations-negative attitude ANSWER KEY
EXERCISE 1
1. You are always leaving (always/leave) your newspaper on the floor.
2. Kim and Jack are looking for (look for) a new flat these days.
3. No wonder the phone bills are so high! You are constantly talking (constantly/talk) on the phone!
4. More and more people are moving (move) to the countryside these days.
5. Katie is continuously interrupting (continuously/interrupt) me when I’m talking.
6. John is driving (drive) his father’s car while his own car is in the workshop.
7. She is living (live) with her aunt nowadays. She will stay there until she finds an apartment.
8. Unfortunately, my sister’s health is slowly improving (slowly/improve).
9. The number of cars on the road is increasing (increase) day by day.
10. We are renovating (renovate) our kitchen this month, so we are eating (eat) out.
EXERCISE 2
1. am writing
2. am getting
3. get
4. go
EXERCISE 3
1. goes
2. is sitting
3. is talking
4. are trying
EXERCISE 4
1. usually spend
2. are going
5. usually lie
6. read
7. am reading
8. is always complaining
5. loves
6. hates
3. always drinks
7. shows
8. enjoys
4. enjoy
EXERCISE 5
1.am working 3. are you doing
5. do you think
2. want
4. am having
6. usually teach
Adapted from Enterprise Grammar 4, p. 8
Enterprise Pre-Intermediate, Grammar Plus, p.8
Practice Your Grammar 1, p. 3
Adapted from Practice Your Grammar 2, p. 1
C
A
C
B
C
A
A
B
B
A
9. are you doing
10. Are you looking
11. am looking / look
9. wants
5. finishes
7. don’t go
8. seem
9. leaves
10. is playing
11. guess
80
Gram. Supp. 6 Focus 2 Will & Be Going to ANSWER KEY
EXERCISE 1.
1. will get
2. am going to visit
3. will turn
4. am going to work
5. will have
6. am going to put
7. will make
8. is going to fall
9. am going to paint
10. won’t tell
11. am going to be
12. won’t be
13. am going to see
14. will switch
15. is going to read
16. are going to hit
17. will live
18. will be
EXERCISE 2.
2. A: Is she going to visit her grandpa on Friday?
B: No, she isn’t. She is going to do some shopping on Friday.
3. A: Is she going to meet Julie for coffee on Thursday? B: Yes, she is.
4. A: Is she going to clean the attic on Wednesday?
B: No, she isn’t. She is going to cook dinner for friends on Wednesday.
5. A: Is she going to take kids to the amusement park on Sunday?
B: No, she isn’t. She is going to fly to Mexico on Sunday.
6. A: Is she going to do some shopping on Monday?
B: No, she isn’t. She is going to clean the attic on Monday.
7. Is she going to visit her grandpa on Tuesday? B: Yes, she is.
https://www.perfect-english-grammar.com/will-or-be-going-to.html
Double Click 2 Workbook & Grammar Book, Express Publishing, 2005
English Grammar in Use, Cambridge University Press, 2004
Gram. Supp. 7_Focus 2_Double Comparatives ANSWER KEY
Exercise 1
1. b
2. a
3. c
Exercise 2
1. ….. the quieter the roads (are).
2. ….. the wider the choice is.
3. …...the more confused I get.
4. ….. the better you speak
5. ….. the more crowded the beaches get.
Exercise 3
1. ......, the better I feel.
2. ……, the more I liked him.
3. ……., the more profit you make.
4. …….., the harder it is to concentrate.
5. ……., the more impatient she became.
81
Exercise 4
2. The younger the people are, the quicker / the more quickly they learn.
3. The more careful a student is, the fewer mistakes he makes.
4. The more mistakes you make, the more you learn.
5. The more tourists (there are), the more damaged the environment (will be).
6. The easier the job is, the quicker / the more quickly we will finish.
SOURCES
Oxford Practice Grammar Intermediate, John Eastwood, Oxford
English Grammar in Use, Cambridge University Press, 2004
https://en.islcollective.com/english-esl-worksheets/search/double+comparatives#
Gram. Supp. 8_Focus 2_Repeated Comparatives ANSWER KEY
Exercise 1
2. bigger and bigger
3. heavier and heavier
4. more and more nervous
5. worse and worse
6. more and more expensive
7. better and better
8. more and more talkative
9. more and more competitive
10. more and more unbelievable
Exercise 2
2. more and more confused
3. more and more difficult
4. more and more complicated
5. more and more time
6. longer and longer
7. worse and worse
Exercise 3
2.√
3. the
4. √
5. most
6. more
7.√
Exercise 4
1.The kitchen is bigger than the living room.
2. You are fitter than me.
3. Prices get higher and higher.
4. The dress is less expensive than the skirt.
5. They were getting more and more excited.
6. It’s the most romantic story I’ve ever read.
SOURCES
https://speakspeak.com/grammar-articles/better-and-better-more-and-more-repeating-comparative-adjectives-to-show
-change
English Grammar in Use, Cambridge University Press, 2004
Oxford Practice Grammar Intermediate, John Eastwood, Oxford
82
Gram. Supp. 9_Focus 2_The Same As ANSWER KEY
Exercise 1
1. Tony’s car is the same color as Claire’s (car).
2. My phone is the same brand as Jim’s (phone).
3. Carla doesn’t have the same hairstyle as Martina. / Carla's hairstyle is not the same as Martina's (hairstyle).
4. Burcu’s pet is not the same kind as Ali’s (pet).
5. Jo is not the same height as Wilma.
6. Miguel Herran is not the same age as Morgan Freeman.
7. Kyle isn’t the same weight as Kevin.
Exercise 2
1. Teresa works in the same company as Christian / him.
2. Romeo has the same number of cars as Wendy.
3. They are not the same age.
Charlotte is not the same age as her brother.
Her brother is not the same age as Charlotte.
4. I don’t have the same hobbies as my best friend.
My best friend doesn’t have the same hobbies as me.
5. Helen doesn’t have the same number of computer games as Victor.
SOURCES
http://horarioscentros.uned.es/archivos_publicos/qdocente_planes/391056/m2s4grt.pdf
https://www.englishgrammar.org/be-and-have/
https://www.grammar-quizzes.com/sameas.html
Gram. Supp. 10_Focus 2_Superlative Adjectives with 'One of/ Some of/ Among, etc.'
ANSWER KEY
Exercise 1
2. He is one the richest people / men in the world.
3. Actually, it is one of the biggest castles in Britain.
4. She is one of the most successful players in the team.
5. Indeed, it is one of the worst experiences in my life.
6. Well, he is one of the most dangerous criminals in the country.
Exercise 2 Suggested Answers
1. Izmir is one of the largest cities.
2. Istanbul and Konya are some of the most popular cities.
3. Izmir is one of the hottest cities.
4. Kars is one of the coldest cities.
5. Sinop is one of the least crowded cities.
6. Istanbul and Izmir are among the most famous cities.
Exercise 3
1. the most interesting
2. more hospitable
3. the oldest
4. the most modern
5. the best
6. easier
7. the holiest
8. the most important
9. the lowest
10. more pleasant
11. the hottest
12. smaller
83
13. the best
14. friendlier
15. the most frequent
SOURCES
https://en.islcollective.com/english-esl-worksheets/grammar/comparison-comparative-and-superlative/country-profiles/
68232
FCE Use of English, Virginia Evans, Express Publishing
https://www.crownacademyenglish.com/superlative-adjectives/
Gram. Supp. 11 Focus 2_Present Perfect with the Superlative Forms of Adjectives ANSWER KEY
EXERCISE 1
1. This is the most interesting book I have ever read.
2. This is the most beautiful country I have ever visited.
3. I have never drunk such good coffee before.
4. I have never met such a talkative person in my whole life/ before.
5. That is the most successful team I have ever seen.
EXERCISE 2
1. c
2. d
EXERCISE 3
1. the
2. never 3. most
4. ever
5. the
6. before
7. most
8. Ever
Gram. Supp. 12 Focus 2_ If Clauses Zero Type ANSWER KEY
Exercise 1
1. If / When I wake up late, I’m late for work.
2. When / if my husband cooks, he burns the food.
3. I cycle to work when / if the weather is nice.
4. David is sick when / if he drinks milk.
5. If / when you mix water and electricity, you get a shock.
6. If / when you heat ice, it melts.
7. I like to visit the museums when / if I am in a new city.
8. If / when my flatmate cleans the house, she cleans it really well.
9. The river freezes when / if it is cold.
10. Lots of people come when / if Jenny has a party.
11. If / when I go to bed early, I feel good the next day.
Exercise 2
1. If people don’t exercise and eat healthy food, they put on weight.
2.If it’s winter, birds fly south.
3. If Joe works at Browns, he probably knows Annie.
4. We usually go for a walk after supper if there isn’t a good film on TV.
5. If she goes shopping, she buys expensive clothes.
6. If I’m late, I drive fast.
7. If you are hungry, why don’t you cook some soup?
The Good Grammar Book, Michael Swan &Catherine Walker, Oxford
https://www.perfect-english-grammar.com/zero-conditional.html
https://www.perfect-english-grammar.com/zero-conditional-exercise-1.html
84
Gram. Supp. 13_Focus 2_The Use of WHOM and WHOSE in Relative Clauses ANSWER KEY
Exercise 1
1. Mr. Green was the man _who/whom_ I was talking to. can be omitted (O)
2. The pianist __who__ has played at the concert is internationally famous.
3. She loves her flatmate __who/whom_ she met two years ago. can be omitted (O)
4. This is the teacher about __whom__ Roy told a lot.
5. She knew very little about the man with _whom_ she had promised to spend the summer.
5. I have a friend _who_ owns a restaurant outside the city.
6. I like the staff with ____whom_ I work.
7. The candidate for _whom_ we voted couldn’t win the election.
Exercise 2
1. a. The man who I spoke to yesterday gave me good advice.
b. The man whom I spoke to yesterday gave me good advice.
c. The man to whom I spoke yesterday gave me good advice.
d. The man I spoke to yesterday gave me good advice.
2. a. I have just run into a woman who I went to elementary school with.
b. I have just run into a woman whom I went to elementary school with.
c. I have just run into a woman with whom I went to elementary school.
d. I have just run into a woman I went to elementary school with.
3. a. The students who the teacher wasn’t looking at missed the assignment.
b. The students whom the teacher wasn’t looking at missed the assignment.
c. The students at whom the teacher wasn’t looking missed the assignment.
d. The students the teacher wasn’t looking at missed the assignment.
Exercise 3
1. The people (for whom) I was waiting were late.
The people (whom) I was waiting for were late.
2. The young women (whom) we met at the meeting last night are all from Japan.
3. The scientist (whom) we saw yesterday is well known for her research.
Exercise 4
1. I know a man whose last name is Goose.
2. I apologized to the woman whose coffee I spilled.
3. The man whose wallet was stolen called the police.
4. I met the woman whose husband is the president of the corporation.
5. The professor whose course I’m taking is excellent
6. Mr. North teaches a class for students whose native language is not English.
7. I live in a dormitory whose residents come from many countries
Exercise 5
1. who
Exercise 6
1. whose
2. whose
2. who
3. whom
3. hose
4. whom
5. whose
6. whom
Exercise 7
1.The people whom he works in the office are very friendly.
_____with whom____
2. Gary is a person who you can rely on him.
_______X_________
3.The man who I hired to paint my house last week finished the job in three days. _CORRECT_
4. Benjamin knows the woman whose is meeting us at the airport tomorrow. ____who____
5. Can you name the singer whose real name was Gordon Mathew Sumner? ____CORRECT__
85
Exercise 8
1. who/ that
2. whose
3. whose
4. whom/that/no pronoun
5. whom
Exercise 9
1. who
2. who/ whom/ ∅
3. whom
4. ∅ / who/ whom
5. with whom
6. whose
7. who/ whom/ ∅
https://www.eltbase.com/quiz/031_02.htm
http://www.ybd.yildiz.edu.tr/images/files/A%20W9_Key.pdf
Understanding and Using English Grammar, Pearson Education, 1999 by Betty Schrampfer Azar
English Grammar in Use, Cambridge University Press, 2004
https://www.grammarbook.com/grammar_quiz/who_2.asp
https://ielts.com.au/australia/prepare/article-grammar-101-who-vs-whom
https://www.ecenglish.com/learnenglish/lessons/relative-prnouns-who-whose-where-which#:~:text=We%20use%20wh
ose%20in%20relative,by%20a%20noun%20or%20pronoun.
Gram. Supp. 14_Focus 2_The Use of WHEN and WHY in Relative Clauses ANSWER KEY
Exercise 1
1. There was a time when movies cost a dime.
2. Summer is the time of the year when the weather is the hottest.
3. There came a time when he had to spend his money.
4. Yesterday was a day when / on which everything went wrong.
5. 1960 is the year when / in which the revolution took place.
6. Do you remember the day when / on which we went to the zoo.
Exercise 2
Students' own answers
https://www.grammarwiz.com/relative-adverbs.html
Understanding and Using English Grammar, Pearson Education, 1999 by Betty Schrampfer Azar
English Grammar in Use, Cambridge University Press, 2004
Gram. Supp. 15_Focus 2_Indirect Questions ANSWER KEY
Exercise 1
1. Do you know what the matter is?
2.I wonder how many countries he has travelled to.
3. I wonder who she was talking to.
4. I wonder when they will get married.
5. Could you tell me where the nearest station is?
6.Would you mind telling me why you can’t help your new colleague?
7. I'd like to find out what our new boss is like
8. Could you please tell me where the boxes were?
9. Do you know where Joe is?
10. Do you have any idea what time the show starts?
11. I wonder if / whether he is all right.
12. I'd like to know if / whether you have finished the report yet.
13. Do you have any idea if / whether this is the right train?
86
14. I was wondering if / whether you could babysit tonight.
15. Could you let me know if / whether they have some free tickets?
Exercise 2
1. c
2. a
3. c
4. b
5. d
6. b
7. c
8. a
9. b
10. c
Exercise 3
1. She wants to know if/whether they have had dinner yet.
2. Do you know where Jack lives?
3. She wants to know if we have seen her keys.
4. Do you know where I put them?
5. Could you tell me how I can get to the zoo?
6. I do not know if / whether he will be able to see again.
7. Could you tell me if / whether this bus goes to Manhattan?
8. She would like to know if / whether he will come home early.
9. I don’t know if / whether the mechanic repaired the car.
10.I wonder if / whether it will be snowy today.
Exercise 4.
1. Could Joe help me?
4. How much did it cost?
2. What does Greg do?
5. Why didn't you come?
3. Where was Ben?
SOURCES
Adapted from Practice Your Grammar 1, p. 190,191
Grammar way 4, p.183
Gram. Supp. 16_Focus 2_Noun Clauses with THAT ANSWER KEY
Exercise 1
Students' own answers.
Exercise 2 (Suggested Answers)
1. It’s a pity that Tim hasn’t been able to make any friends.
2. It’s true that smoking can cause cancer.
3. It’s unfair (that) some women do not earn equal pay for equal work.
4. It’s a fact that the Earth revolves around the Sun.
5. It’s clear that drug abuse can ruin one’s health.
Exercise 3
Students' own answers.
Exercise 4
Students' own answers.
https://dictionary.cambridge.org/tr/dilbilgisi/ingiliz-dilbilgisi/that-clauses
Understanding and Using English Grammar, Pearson Education, 1999 by Betty Schrampfer Azar
87
Gram. Supp. 17_Focus 2_Quantifiers 1 (several, plenty of, etc.) ANSWER KEY
EXERCISE 1
1. plenty of
2. little
3. a lot of
4. a few
EXERCISE 2
1. no-any
2. any-some
3. much-many
4. has-hasn’t / any-few
5. many-few
6. few-little
EXERCISE 3
1. C
2. A
3. B
4. C
5. several
6. some
5. A
7. plenty of
8. many
9. lots of
10. Several
7. many-much
8. many-much
11. too many
12. too much
9. much-many
6. B
EXERCISE 4
1. We HAVE (A) LITTLE FLOUR to make my favorite cake.
2. There are only a few days left to the end of school.
3. My boyfriend does not eat much chocolate.
4. I stayed in Paris for a few days.
5. We have some cheese and a few eggs we can eat for now, so we don’t have to go out.
SOURCES
Grammarway 4, p.171-174
MyGrammarLab C1-C2, p. 14-15
The way to cope with proficiency exams, p. 244-248
ELS Grammar Book, p.504-508
Gram. Supp. 18_Focus 2_Quantifiers 2 (All-most-both-none of, etc.) ANSWER KEY
EXERCISE 1
1. both
2. most
3. both
EXERCISE 2
1. both
2. most
9. neither 10. Either
3. most
11. neither
EXERCISE 3
1. most
2. all
3. none
4. none
5. all
6. none
7. neither
8. either
4. none
12. either
5. all
6. None
7. all
8. most
4. all
5. none
SOURCES
Grammarway 4, p. 173-174
MyGrammarLab B1-B2, p. 27
Gram. Supp. 19_Focus 2_Quantifiers 3 (hardly any-not many-much, etc.) ANSWER KEY
EXERCISE 1
1. much 2. a
3. hardly any
4. much
5. many
EXERCISE 2
1. any 2. a lot
3. not much
4. much
5. not many
6. much
6. many
EXERCISE 3
1. He doesn’t want many presents for his birthday.
2. We don’t have much sugar left at home.
3. There are hardly any good restaurants here.
4. There aren’t many things to see in this area.
5. She hasn’t got much patience with young children.
88
6. He hardly has got any knowledge of foreign affairs.
7. After the party, there was hardly any food left.
8. Not many students came to the class.
9. There aren’t many people who can speak Hungarian.
10. There aren’t many employees who know the password to the computer.
SOURCES
Enterprise Grammar 4, p.67
Grammarway 4, p. 172-177
MyGrammarLab B1-B2, p.31
Gram. Supp. 20A_Focus 2_Quantifiers 4 (no) ANSWER KEY
EXERCISE 1
1. no
2. any
3. was
4. couldn’t
5. any
6. has
7. no
8. is
EXERCISE 2
1. She takes no sugar with her coffee.
2. I took no photos of the party.
3. You don’t have any evidence to convince me.
4. She finished the test with no difficulty.
5. Peter has no time to visit us.
6. He doesn’t need any stamps for the letters.
7. She had no difficulty in finishing the test.
8. Peter hasn’t bought any new books.
Gram. Supp. 20B_Focus 2_Subject-Verb Agreement ANSWER KEY
EXERCISE 1
1.is
2. is
8. is
9. is
3. was 4. was 5. are 6. is
7. wants
10. was 11. is 12. is 13. lives 14. was
SOURCES
Grammarway 4, p.171-174
MyGrammarLab C1-C2, p. 14-15
The way to cope with proficiency exams, p. 244-248
ELS Grammar Book, p.504-508
89
Gram. Supp. 21_Focus 2_(the) other _ another ANSWER KEY
EXERCISE 1
1. another
2. the other
3. other
4. the other
5. another
EXERCISE 2
1. the other
6. the other
2. the other
7. another
3. other
8. another
4. another
9. the other
5. the other
10. the other
6. The other
https://dictionary.cambridge.org/tr/dilbilgisi/ingiliz-dilbilgisi/other-others-the-other-or-another
FCE Use of English 1, Express Publishing
Grammarway 4, Express Publishing
Gram. Supp. 22_Focus 2_Modals 1 (permission-may) ANSWER KEY
EXERCISE 1
1. can’t
2. Might
5. were allowed to / could
3. Could / May I
4. won’t be allowed to/ will they be allowed to
EXERCISE 2
1. You are not allowed to use pens in writing exam.
2. I was allowed to return home after 11 o’clock at night when I was young.
3. All students can use the library.
4. Tom isn’t allowed to touch those files.
5. I was allowed to leave work early yesterday.
SOURCES
Grammarway 4, p. 74
MyGrammarLab B1-B2, p. 153
Gram. Supp. 23_Focus 2_Modals 2 (don’t need to-supposed to, etc.) ANSWER KEY
EXERCISE 1
1.was able to
2.should
3. might
EXERCISE 2
1. C
2. B
3. A
5. D
4. B
4. might
6. A
5.could
7.B
EXERCISE 3.
1. You should get a good mosquito repellent when you go camping.
2. She might not finish the course.
3. Amy could agree to translate these documents for you.
4. Sue may be late this evening.
5. Steve was able to repair the bike after trying for two hours.
EXERCISE 4
1.don’t need to
2. had to
EXERCISE 5
1. could
5. was able to
3. didn’t need to
4. must
2.don’t need to
6. Did you have to
5. aren’t supposed to
6. aren’t supposed to
3. can
7. had to
7. was supposed to
8. had better not
4. had to
8. was able to
EXERCISE 6
1. You have to have a visa to visit the U.S.A.
2. Ronald didn’t have to join the meeting.
3. All the employees had to wear a uniform at the factory.
4. You should / ought to consult a doctor before taking pills.
5. Pamela will probably participate in the meeting.
90
6. Did you need to / have to overwork yesterday?
7. Do all the applicants have to take an exam?
8. You don’t need to take the dog out today.
9.. Jane is supposed / expected to be back in the office at ten.
10. Alan can play the piano.
SOURCES
MyGrammarLab B1-B2, p.157-158
Grammarway 4, p. 70-77
FCE Use of English 1, p.6-9
The Way to Cope with Proficiency Exams, p. 49-55
Gram. Supp. 24_Focus 2_Question Words ANSWER KEY
EXERCISE 1
1. How many
2. Which
3. How much
4. Why
5. Whose
6. Who(m)
7. What
8. Who
9. How long
10. What
EXERCISE 2
1. How often do you call your mother?
2. What were you doing while your sister was cooking in the kitchen?
3. Who did you go on a picnic with?
4. What did you use to play when you were a child?
5. Had the film started when you arrived at the cinema?
6. When are you going to buy a new car?
7. Why will you buy that grammar book?
8. When was this book written?
EXERCISE 3
1. Who broke the window?
2. Who(m) did Jim invite to the party?
3. How long does it take to drive to the supermarket?
4. Why is she happy?
5. Whose secretary have you spoken to about your complaint?
6. When is Jack going to marry Sophia?
7. What were you doing when your mother arrived home?
8. What will you finish doing before you go home?
9. Whose purse has David lost?
10. How long has Jane worked for this company?
11. What is a simple sentence?
12. Who never gets up before 9 o’clock on Saturdays?
13. What is Tim’s favourite hobby?
14. Whose bike did the young girl with the long black hair fall from yesterday in heavy rain?
15. Why do I / we need wood, a hammer, a saw, and lots of nails?
EXERCISE 4
1. Where was Tolkien born (in 1829)?
2. When was Tolkien born (in South Africa)?
3. Why did he grow up in an orphanage?
4. Who(m) did he fall in love with for the first time at the age of 16?
5. What did he study at Oxford University?
6. How many new languages did he invent?
7. Who did he get married to in 1916?
8. What happened in 1925? / What did he do in 1925?
91
9. What / Which book did he begin writing in the late 1930s?
10. Whose wife died in 1971?
11. What did Tolkien die of?
EXERCISE 5
1. a. Who won two races?
b. How many races did Ryan win?
c. What did Ryan do?
2. a. Which shirt is yours?
b. Whose shirt is yellow? / Whose shirt is the yellow one?
c. How many shirts are there?
3. a. How often does Stanley go swimming?
b. What does Stanley do three times a week?
c. Who goes swimming three times a week?
4. a. Who called Mary to tell her the good news?
b. Who did Jack call to tell the good news?
c. Why did Jack call Mary?
5. a. Who is going to reply to Tim’s email tomorrow?
b. Whose email is Mike going to reply tomorrow?
c. What is Mike going to reply tomorrow?
d. When is Mike going to reply to Tim's email?
EXERCISE 6
1. How old was Nasuh Mahruki when he started mountain climbing?
2. When did he (also) participate in the “Seven Summits” project of climbing the highest peaks of each of the
continents?
3. How many climbers completed the “Seven Summits” project?
4. How often does he go abroad?
5. What does he collect for his books and documentaries on these trips?
6. When was AKUT set up in Istanbul?
7. How many members does AKUT have from different professions (such as doctors, engineers)?
8. Who (also) joins AKUT to learn search and rescue techniques?
9. What does Nasuh Mahruki want to do in the coming years?
SOURCES
Practice Your Grammar 1, p.99
Up to the Point, p. 72
Grammarway 4, p. 180-182
FCE Use of English 1, p. 186-188
Gram.Supp 31_What about-How about-Could_What about-How about-Could ANSWER KEY
Exercise 1
1. Matt asked to hang out with Zach.
2. Zach suggested going to the movies.
3. Matt didn’t want to go to the movies because the weather was so beautiful, and they had been inside all day.
Exercise 2
1.b 2.c 3.d
4.a
5.e
Exercise 3
1. Sure
2. have any ideas
3. Shall we/ Why don’t we
4. How about
5. We could/Let’s
92
6. Shall we/ Why don’t we
7. We could/Let’s
Exercise 4
1. Would you like to
2. What about / How about
3. Shall we / Why don’t we
4. Let’s
5. What about / How about
6. Let’s
7. What about / How about
8. Let’s
9. Let’s
10. What about / How about
Exercise 5
1. You could take my seat.
2. You could eat a sandwich/ a piece of cake etc. if you are hungry.
3. You could take/ borrow it if you want to read
Exercise 6
Answers may vary.
1. How about / What about going to the cinema?
2. How about / What about having a rest?
3. How about / What about taking a day off next week?
Exercise 7
Students’ own answers.
SOURCES
https://www.englishexercises.org/makeagame/viewgame.asp?id=5840
https://engoo.com/app/lessons/making-suggestions/YfHQuDMMEeeFhovFwUXCAw
https://sites.google.com/site/engskillsdevelopment/english-skills-development/3-unit-2
https://learnenglishteens.britishcouncil.org/grammar/intermediate-grammar/can-could-would-invitations-offers-request
s permission
TEACH-THIS.COM, 2016, Activity: What Shall We Do?
Gram. Supp. 35_Focus 3_Even If ANSWER KEY
EXERCISE 1
1. studies
2. tell
3. earned
4. don’t join
5. think
6. invited
7. would get
8. won’t get
EXERCISE 2
1. I will go swimming in the sea even if it rains.
I will go swimming in the sea even if my back aches.
2. Even if you invited her to your party, she wouldn’t come.
3. I have to do regular exercises even if my back aches.
4. I won’t lend him any money even if he promises to pay it back.
5. Even if you hurry, you can’t catch the plane. It’s too late.
6. I don’t want to work for that company even if its conditions are good.
7. I always wake up at 8 o’clock even if I forget to set the alarm.
8. Nobody believes him even if he tells the truth.
93
Gram. Supp. 37_Focus 3_In case & In Case of ANSWER KEY
Exercise 1
1. in case of
2. in case
3. in case
4. in case of
5. in case of
6. in case
Exercise 2
1. In case of fire, call the emergency immediately.
2. In case of a danger, I’ll take my phone with me.
3. You had better close the windows in case it rains heavily. / You had better close the windows in case of heavy rain.
4. Loren will draw a plan for them in case they get confused.
5. Harry bought some eggs on the way home in case his wife wanted.
6. Ted had better come home early in case the visitors come today.
Gram. Supp. 44_Level 2_Prefixes _ Suffixes ANSWER KEY
EXERCISE 1: 1. valuable
2. responsible
3. hopeless
4. effective
5. easy
EXERCISE 2: 1. construction 2. surprisingly
3. unattractive 4. popularity
EXERCISE 3:
1. achievement 2. difficulties
3. indecisive
4. effectively 5. unfortunately 6. assistance
EXERCISE 4:
1. exciting
3. powerful
4. envious
EXERCISE 5:
1. unbelievable 2. incorrect
6. unexpected 7. immortal
3. review
8. uncomfortable
EXERCISE 6:
1. violent
2. behaviors
3. educative/educational
4. global
EXERCISE 7:
1. relaxing
6. popularity
2. warmth
7. noisy
3. peaceful
5. luxurious
EXERCISE 8:
EXERCISE 9:
2. imagination
1. unemployment 2. awareness
6. oversleep
7. developer
10. adventurous 11. beautiful
1. unforgettable
5. reality
4. disappeared
9.disobedience
4. unpolluted
3. destruction
7. safety
5. misunderstood
10. overcooked
3. qualifications 4. upload/download
8. bilingual
9. invention
12. childhood
13. collective
2. illegal
6. choice
5. replace
4. conservationists
FCE Use of English by Virginia Evans, Express Publishing, 1998
https://www.really-learn-english.com/prefixes-and-suffixes-worksheets.html
https://en.islcollective.com/english-esl-worksheets/grammar/prefixes/prefixessuffixes/12195
https://www.enchantedlearning.com/grammar/prefixsuffix/index.shtml
Gram. Supp. 45_Level 2_Prefixes _ Suffixes_Practice ANSWER KEY
EXERCISE 1: 1. un
2. dis
3. im
4. over 5. micro
6. re
EXERCISE 2: 1. A
2. B
3. B
4. C
7. B
EXERCISE 3: 1. challenging
2. stressful
5. A
6. C
3. unskilled
EXERCISE 4: 1. advertisement 2. interested
3. competitive
5. demanding
6. determination 7. reliable
8. C
4. boring
5. building
6. paid
4. responsibility / responsibilities
8. decision
94
EXERCISE 5: 1. strength
5. longer
2. concentration
6. steadily
3. combination
EXERCISE 6: 1. interpretations 2. discoveries
6. depth
7. exactly
10.satisfying/ satisfactory
3. various
8.consciousness
EXERCISE 7: 1. learner
6. impression
3. communication
8. qualified
EXERCISE 8: 1. psychological
6. dishonesty
2. fluency
7. incorrectly
4. competitors
4. movements
9. behavior
2. investigation 3. surprising
5. calculations
4. easily
5. necessity
9. explanations
4. scientific
5. natural
https://www.education.com/worksheet/article/prefix-mix-up/
http://downloads.bbc.co.uk/skillswise/english/en17suff/quiz/en17suff-e3-quiz.pdf
Solutions, Intermediate Student’s Book, Oxford University Press by Tim Falla, Paula A Davies
FCE Use of English, Virginia Evans, Express Publishing, 1998.
http://www.ybd.yildiz.edu.tr/images/files/A%20W9_Key.pdf
DEFINING RELATIVE CLAUSES WORKSHEET ANSWER KEY
A.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
They work on the building site where the new hospital will be.
A paramedic is a person whose job is similar to a doctor’s
Tom works for a design company which/that makes furniture.
We live in a district where there are a lot of parks.
They are looking for musicians who/ that play jazz.
Do you know any mechanics who/that repair bicycles?
He’s the lecturer whose classes are so interesting.
That’s the bank where my brother works.
B.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
The man who/ that bought the red car is very wealthy.
The garage which/ that sold him the car is in the High Street.
The radio which/ that was in the car has been missing for two days.
The man whose radio was stolen went to the police.
The policeman who/ that dealt with the case is my next door neighbor.
I went back to the town where I was born.
The businessman who is from India is going to visit us next week.
The girl is very kind with whom I’m sharing the dormitory.
C.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
that/ which X
whose 
who/ that X
when/ that X
which/ that 
which/ that X
who/ whom/ that 
D.
1. A man who/ that answered the phone told me you were away.
2. The book is about a poor girl with whom Dany falls in love.
The book is about a poor girl (that/ who) Dany falls in love with.
3. The building which/ that has now been rebuilt was destroyed in the fire.
The building which was destroyed in the fire has now been rebuilt.
4. Some people who/ that were arrested yesterday have now been released.
95
Some people who/ that have now been released were arrested yesterday.
5. Rotterdam is the port which/ that is the busiest in Europe.
6. They are on a ship which/ that is crossing the Atlantic.
7. They say he will never marry the girl that/ who he loves.
8. 2018 was the year when/ in which/ that/ - my son was born.
9. That’s the car that/ which was parked outside our house.
10. Dallas is the city where Kennedy was shot.
11. Hiroshima is the place where the first atomic bomb was dropped.
12. That’s the man whose dog scared me.
13. Sunday is the day when/ that/ - most countries respect a day of rest.
14. A stapler is a thing that/ which you use to attach papers together.
15. Your mother-in-law is the person whose son or daughter is married to you.
16. I cannot remember the reason why he wanted us to leave.
17. That’s the jacket which/ that I bought in the sales.
18. Alex talked to the woman whose house he sold.
https://www.perfect-english-grammar.com/relative-clauses-exercise-1.html
https://www.esl-lounge.com/student/grammar/3g31-relative-clause-gap-fill-exercise.php
http://www.ybd.yildiz.edu.tr/images/files/A%20W9_Key.pdf
English Result, Intermediate Student’s Book, Mark Hancock& Annie McDonald, Oxford University Press
Solutions, Intermediate Student’s Book, Jane Hudson, Tim Falla, Paul A Davies, Oxford University Press
Matrix, Upper-Intermediate Student’s Book, Katy Gıde, Oxford University Press
96
Reading
Supplementary
Materials
97
Read. Supp. 2
Level1_Reference
Objective: can understand referencing words at a very basic level
TEXT 1
CASE STUDY: THE KOH FAMILY
Vincent and Helen Koh live in Arcadia, California. They have three children. They are all adults now.
Ellen, the oldest, lives in Arcadia. In fact, Ellen and her parents are next-door neighbors. Unfortunately, she does not
see her parents often. She is the busy mother of three daughters. She is the CEO of the Arcadia Savings Bank. She
also volunteers twice a week at the local hospital. These are only three of her responsibilities.
The Koh's middle child, Tim, lives in Los Angeles, about an hour away from his parents. He visits often and helps them
with their computer problems. Tim is married to Sally. Their son, Steven, is in high school. Tim stays home and takes
care of his family. He works part-time selling houses. Tim loves risky sports. He plays ice hockey once a week. Tim,
his wife, and his son go skiing almost every weekend in the winter.
Jeff is the youngest. He is the "baby," but he is almost 40 years old. He lives in Philadelphia far away from his parents.
Jeff got his Ph.D. in biology, and he is now a university professor. Like his sister, he also volunteers at a hospital. On
weekends he performs in a comedy club. He enjoys it. When he was young, he always made his family laugh. Now
people pay him to be funny.
Practice
A. Look at the reading The Koh Family and then read the sentences below. Choose the word or phrase from
the box that means the same as the underlined word.
Ellen’s
doing stand-up comedy
Tim and Sally’s
Tim, Sally, and Steve
Vincent and Helen Koh
being a parent, a CEO, and a volunteer
1. They have three adult children. (paragraph 1) ______________________________
2. Ellen and her parents are next-door neighbours. (paragraph 2) _____________________________
3. These are only three of her responsibilities. (paragraph 2) ______________________________
4. Their son, Steven, is in high school. (paragraph 3) ______________________________
5. They all go skiing almost every weekend in the winter. (paragraph 3) ________________________
6. He enjoys it. (paragraph 4) ______________________________
98
UNDERSTANDING WORD REFERENCE
A noun names a person, place, thing, or idea. A pronoun is a word that takes the place of a noun.
When you read, it is important to connect pronouns to the correct nouns. Understanding these connections can help
you understand what you read.
Sometimes the pronoun refers to a noun in the same sentence. Other times the pronoun refers to a noun in an earlier
sentence.
Subject pronouns: I, you, he, she, it, we, they
For example:
They have three adult children. (They refers to Vincent and Helen Koh.)
They all go skiing almost every weekend in the winter. (They refers to Tim, Sally, and Steve.)
Object pronouns: me, you, him, her, us, them
For example: He enjoys it. (It refers to performing stand-up comedy.)
There is also a connection between nouns and possessive adjectives (my, your, his, her, its, our, their)
For example:
Ellen and her parents are next-door neighbors. (Her refers to Ellen’s.)
Their son, Steven, is in high school. (Their refers to Tim and Sally’s.)
The words this, that, these, and those make connections to ideas stated before.
For example: These are only three of her responsibilities. (These refers to being a parent, a CEO, and a volunteer.)
There is also often used to refer to (to, at, or in) a place.
For example:
Our son Jim’s living in Barcelona. He wants us to go there for a holiday. (There refers to ‘to Barcelona’.)
A: Where’s my cup of tea?
B: It’s there, on the little table! (There refers to ‘on the little table’.)
You use one or ones instead of a noun that has already been mentioned or known. ‘one’ requires a singular and
‘ones’ requires a plural reference.
For example:
The next train leaves in an hour. The last one has just left. (One refers to train.)
Could you give me my jacket, please? – Of course, is it the brown one? (One refers to jacket.)
Are the new curtains longer than the old ones? (Ones refers to curtains.)
These shoes are better. The ones I tried before didn’t fit well. (Ones refers to shoes.)
99
EXERCISE 1
Read the following paragraph about Wakamaru. Underline the subject and object pronouns in the paragraph
and then draw an arrow to the noun that each pronoun refers to.
Engineers in Japan built a sociable robot named Wakamaru. They designed Wakamaru to help and serve people in a
friendly, caring, and intelligent way. Wakamaru can recognize faces and use gestures. It knows 10,000 words and can
use them to talk to people about the weather and other subjects. Wakamaru can do many tasks for a family. For
example, at night, it moves quietly around the house, but it can wake family members up if there is any trouble. During
the day, Wakamaru can also send them email and text messages.
EXERCISE 2
A. Look at the sentences below. Write the word or phrase that means the same as the underlined words.
1. Giant pandas are black and white Chinese bears. They have a big body, rounded ears, and a short tail. These large
mammals have big heads, too.
These large mammals: ______________________________________________________________
2. The Chinese call the panda "Da xiong mao." It means "giant bear cat" in Chinese.
It: ______________________________________________________________________________
3. The panda is a symbol of peace in China. There are roughly 1,000-1,500 pandas living there.
there: ___________________________________________________________________________
4. Pandas eat about 18 kilos of bamboo each day. Although the pandas eat this plant, they cannot digest it very well.
this plant: _______________________________________________________________________
5. Bamboo plants grow in only a few places. This limits the range of pandas tremendously.
This: The fact that _________________________________________________________________
6. Pandas usually eat while sitting in an upright position. Sitting this way, they can use their front paws to hold their
food.
this way: ________________________________________________________________________
7. Pandas have very thick, oily, woolly fur. It keeps them warm in their cold, wet mountain habitat.
It: ______________________________________________________________________________
them: ___________________________________________________________________________
8. Female pandas give birth to one or two cubs, but usually only one survives.
one:
9. Panda cubs are white at birth. Their coats take on adult colouring about a month after birth.
Their: __________________________________________________________________________
10. The giant panda evolved during the late Pliocene or early Pleistocene period. During those times, the giant
panda's range extended throughout southern China.
those times: _____________________________________________________________________
100
TEXT 2
Read the text carefully. Find out what the underlined words mean and choose the correct option.
On November the second, Mexicans celebrate a holiday 1. On that day refers to ____________.
as old as Mexican history itself. 1On that day, children a. on a school day
don't have to go to school because, just as they celebrate b. on November the second
Mother's Day or Father's Day, they celebrate a special
day to remember their dead relatives. How do Mexicans 2. they refers to ____________.
celebrate this special day? Traditionally, 2they make an a. children
offering in the main room of their house. To make an b. Mexicans
offering, they put a piece of cut-out paper (thin coloured
paper with a design cut out) like a tablecloth on a big 3. it refers to ____________.
table. They find a photo of their beloved relative and put 3it a. the photo of the beloved relative
in the front. Then they think of that person's favourite food b. the tablecloth
and drink and add 4those to the offering. If they can't
remember, they choose typical Mexican food, atole, mole 4. those refers to ____________.
or tamales. According to the tradition, that night 5he or she a. the favourite food and drink of their
will come to their house to share the dinner with them. To relative
guide the person, they light some candles and make a b. atole, mole and tamales
path of flowers with cempasuchit (marigolds). 6These
have been considered the special flower of the dead since 5. he or she refers to ____________.
pre-Hispanic times. On this day, Mexican people eat a. one of their relatives
candy skulls and also give 7some to their friends. In b. the dead beloved relative
addition to that, they make a kind of delicious bread for
this day. 8This is called the Bread of the Dead. That night, 6. These refers to ____________.
people also go to the graveyards to greet and visit their a. the path of flowers
loved ones. If you go to 9one, you will see a lot of people b. marigolds
singing and bringing flowers and food. This holiday in
Mexico is unique in the world. Many foreigners who live 7. some refers to ____________.
10
there are amazed and enjoy seeing the Mexicans a. candy skulls
remember their dead with such happiness.
b. marigolds
8. this refers to ____________.
a. a kind of bread
b. the dead relative
9. one refers to ____________.
a. a graveyard
b. the house of a relative
10. there refers to ____________.
a. in the world
b. in Mexico
101
TEXT 3
Read the following paragraph. Find what the underlined words refer to and write them into the parentheses.
I lose so many things that I’m sure that they (1 things) just get up and walk away. I am jealous of some people. They
are so orderly that they (2_______________) never lose anything. Pens and pencils are never there when I need them
(3_________________). I try to keep a pen near the telephone so that I will use it when the phone rings. But it is never
there when I need it (4_________________). The situation was getting so bad that I decided to do something about it.
I bought a large cupboard with a number of shelves. I then put ten boxes on them ( 5_________________). I put a
label on each box: one (6_________________) I labeled “Pens and Pencils,” another ( 7_________________) I labeled
“Tools,” another “Needles and Pins.” I also bought an address book and put it in the corner of the cupboard. Before
this, I always lost all the addresses and phone numbers I needed. Now I felt very proud of myself. But things did not
change. Pens began to disappear, and one day I found my hammer under the bed. There was only one solution. I
locked the cupboard and put the key on top of it (8_________________). The cupboard was always locked and I was
the only one who knew where the key was. Then I lost it (9_________________) . . .
102
Read. Supp. 5
Level 2_Guessing the Meaning from Context 1
How to use a dictionary effectively
How to guess the meaning of unknown vocabulary
Objective: can deduce the meaning of an unknown word for a concrete action or object, provided the surrounding text
is very simple and on a familiar everyday subject
There are two questions to ask yourself whenever you meet an unfamiliar word.
The first question is: 'Do I need to know the meaning of the word?' If not, you can keep reading and ignore the word.
In order to answer this question, you need to make sure you have a clear purpose in your reading.
The second question you need to ask is: 'Is an approximate (close) meaning enough?' If not, you need to look the
word up in a dictionary.
If the answer to both questions above is 'no', it means you can guess what the word means and then keep reading.
Use the following to help you guess an approximate meaning:
● examine the immediate context of the word (i.e. the sentence the word is in, and words which come before
and after); pay particular attention to linking words;
● examine the wider context of the word (i.e. other sentences in the paragraph);
● look at the structure of the word (i.e. prefix, suffix, root).
The approach to unfamiliar words is summarised in the diagram below.
103
How to use a dictionary effectively
As a student who is learning English language, it is important that you understand how to use a dictionary.
Using a dictionary helps you understand new words. Dictionaries have definitions, but they also have other
information about words. Look at the dictionary entry for the word reply.
●
Use a dictionary to find a definition for the humor.
_____________________________________________________________________________________
1. What is the pronunciation? __________________________________________________________________
2. What is the part of speech? __________________________________________________________________
3. Which syllable is stressed? __________________________________________________________________
4. Write an example sentence. __________________________________________________________________
Exercise 1: Read the definitions of the word humor. Then, read the sentences and write the number of the
correct definition.
humor
1. noun The quality of something that makes it funny or amusing.
2. noun If you have a sense of humor, you are quick to laugh or make others laugh.
3. noun Mood or state of mind.
4. verb To agree with someone or do what the person wants so the person does not become
upset.
5. adjective (humorous) funny, or making you laugh.
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
The play we saw was full of dark humor.
Mary humored her brother, though she disagreed with him.
Jim is in a poor humor today.
Did you find the story humorous at all?
I don’t understand Mandy’s sense of humor.
I doubt this meeting will put me in a good humor.
Exercise 2: Look at the dictionary entry for the word ‘business’ in the Vocabulary Strategy box. Answer the
questions.English is the language of many countries, many people study it. Then they can communicate with others.
They can do business around the world.
1. What part of speech is business?
a. noun
b. verb
c. adjective
2. Which meaning matches the meaning of business in the text above?
a. 1
b. 2
c. 3
3. What word comes before business in the dictionary? ____________
4. What word comes after business in the dictionary? ____________
5. What is the plural form of business?
a. businesses b. /ˈbɪznəs/
c. business's
104
6. What type of noun is business in this sentence? ‘Many businesses use English on their websites’.
a count
b. noncount
PARTS OF SPEECH
Exercise 3: Study the table below and write your own words and use them in your own sentences.
Part of
Speech
Noun (n)
Function
Example Words
Example Sentences
used to name a person, place,
thing, or idea
table, sun, panda
He fed the panda with
bamboos.
We live in London.
_____________________
1) ___________
Verb (v)
Adjective
(adj)
a word used to express an
action or a state of being (a
form of the word “be”)
to study, to read, to know, to
be
a word used to modify (describe
or make more definite) a noun
or pronoun
small, yellow, funny, horrible,
excited, boring
2) ___________
3) ___________
Adverb (adv)
a word used to modify a verb,
an adjective, or another adverb
fast, quickly, suddenly,
honestly, silently, really
4) ___________
She wrote her opinions
about that subject.
He fell down the stairs.
_____________________
She says she likes green
apples better than yellow
ones.
I don’t think it is funny.
_____________________
Please, reply this email
quickly.
Don’t run so fast!
_____________________
Conjunction
(conj)
a word used to join words or
groups of words
and, but, or, so, before,
however, although, because
5) ___________
John and Mary, apples or
oranges.
_____________________
Preposition
(prep)
a word used to show the
relationship of a noun or
pronoun to some other word(s)
in the sentence
on, from, at, under, by, towards
I went inside the house.
We can buy tickets for the
trip to the museum.
Interjection
(in)
a word used to express an
emotion such as pleasure,
surprise, shock and disgust.
Oops, Hooray, Oh, Look out
Ow, Uh-oh
6) ___________
7) ______________
_____________________
Oh, what a beautiful house!
Ouch! I have cut my finger.
(expresses pain)
Uh-oh! This looks bad.
Exercise 4: What is the part of speech of the bold word?
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
Yes! I enjoyed our short vacation to the mountains.
After I did the test, I worked on my science project.
The beach is a great place for a picnic.
Computers are useful, but they can also be really frustrating.
Alexander and Andrew trained for the marathon and ran on Thursday.
Soap and toothpaste are two necessary things for everyone.
Ew! What have you put on this chicken? Is this sage?
8.
105
Exercise 5: Fill in the blanks with the correct words to complete the story meaningfully. Pay attention to the
parts of speech given below for each.
106
Read. Supp. 6
Level2_Guessing Meaning From Context 2
PART 1:
Objective: can deduce the meaning of an unknown word for a concrete action or object, provided the surrounding text
is very simple and on a familiar everyday subject
How to guess the meaning of unknown words
There are many ways to help you guess the meaning of unfamiliar words from the context. Read the explanation
below and study the examples.
1. Definitions / Explanations
A definition gives the meaning of a word. The writer may use words, phrases, or statements to define something. The
writer uses keywords, or signal words to identify a definition, so the reader needs to look for them.
See examples of key words below:
Key words
is/are
is/are defined as
what this means is
may be seen as
is/are called
is/are described as
consist(s) of
is/are known as
means/mean
refer(s) to
e.g. Inflation means a rise in the general level of prices you pay for things you buy.
an unfamiliar word = inflation
signal word = means
the definition = a rise in the general level of prices you pay for everything you buy.
● Some sentences are written just to give the definitions of difficult words - words that readers will need to know to
understand what they are reading.
e.g. One of the amazing features of the Nile Valley is the fertility of the area. This rich earth helped Egyptians to grow
plants in dry seasons.
What does the word “fertility” mean? ___________________________
What is your clue? ___________________________________________________
The second sentence, which tells us that earth was rich and that it helped plants grow, explains the word fertility.
2. Restatement
The writer may use other words, phrases, or sentences to provide the meaning of a difficult word. It is called
“restatement”; the writer repeats the word again or describes it in a different way. Signal words for restatement are
below:
Key words
or
that is to say
in other words
that is
e.g. Africa consists mainly of plateaus, or large flat areas, although you can see those at different levels.
an unfamiliar word = plateaus
signal word = or
meaning = large flat areas
e.g. Jenna felt perturbed; that is, she was greatly annoyed by her sister's actions.
What does the word “perturbed” mean? ___________________________
What is your clue? ___________________________________________________
In this sentence, by using that is, we can see the word is explained by restatement.
3. Punctuation Marks
Some sentences give the definition or explanation for a difficult word with the help of punctuation marks.
Such punctuation is below:
Key words
, commas
( ) parentheses
; semicolon
‘ appositive
- - dashes
: colon
e.g. When butterflies age, get old, the color of their wings fades.
an unfamiliar word = age
signal punctuation = , ,
meaning: handle text = get old
e.g. Origami, Japanese paper folding, is fun and interesting.
e.g. Nobel Prize - the award given for achievements in science- is considered the most prestigious award in the
world.
e.g. The caterpillar molds (loses its old skin) many times as it grows.
107
4. Examples
Examples help the reader to understand the meaning of new words without definition.
See key words or signal words used for showing examples below:
Key words
such as
for example, …
is / are
like
for instance, …
i.e.
e.g. Use navigation buttons such as the “Next” button, the “Previous” button, the “Menu” button, and the “Exit” button,
to go back and forth or jump to other topics while you are using your English software.
unfamiliar words = navigation buttons
signal word = such as
meaning = buttons on computer program that are used for turning on pages
e.g. A large number of Araneae in the world i.e. black widow, tarantula, ant spider, lives in Australia.
What does the word “Araneae” mean? ___________________________
What is your clue? ___________________________________________________
5. Contrast
The reader can guess the meaning of new words by using signal words of contrast. These indicate the opposite
meaning of the new words.
See key words or signal words of contrast below:
Key words
but/ however/ yet
in contrast to / as opposed to
even though / although / in spite of/ despite
whereas / while
e.g. Although Dara and Vipa are very close friends, they are very different. Dara spends a lot of money to buy things
while Vipa loves to economize.
a) spend more money b) save money
c) buy more things than before
d) keep things in a safe
place
e.g. My sisters have sedentary lives; however, I do sports and train at the gym every day.
unfamiliar words = sedentary
signal word = however
meaning = involving little exercise or physical activity
6. Similarity
The reader can guess the meaning of new words by using signal words of similarity. These refer to the words or
phrases mentioned formerly.
See key words or signal words of similarity below:
Key words
like
similarly
the same as
just as
e.g. Germany is producing cars with cutting-edge technology. The other developed countries also use the same
modern technique in their companies.
What does the phrase “the same modern technique” mean? ___________________________
What is your clue? ___________________________________________________
7. Prefix, Suffix, Root
By analyzing the word itself, you can guess the meaning of it.
E-mail can be disadvantageous to people who have stronger oral skills than writing skills.
Imagine that the word you want to guess in this sentence is 'disadvantageous'. This word can be broken down into
three components:
dis-, which is the prefix;
advantage, which is the root;
-ous, which is the suffix.
You can get the following information by studying the word in this way:
it is probably an adjective, because it ends in -ous, which is a common suffix for adjectives,
it is probably negative, because it begins with a negative prefix dis-,
its meaning is probably opposite to the root of the word, advantage.
As before, a good guess for the word 'disadvantageous' at this point would be 'bad'. This is close enough to help you
understand the main idea and keep reading.
108
Exercise 1: Read the sentences and guess the meaning of the unfamiliar words and phrases.
1. Wireless networks are open and available to all, whereas wired networks need a physical connection to gain
access.
unfamiliar words = ____________________________
signal word or mark = ____________________________
meaning = ____________________________
2. He was economical with the truth - in other words, he was lying.
unfamiliar words = ____________________________
signal word or mark = ____________________________
meaning = ____________________________
3. Machu Picchu - an ancient city known for its famous ruins- is located in Peru.
unfamiliar words = ____________________________
signal word or mark = ____________________________
meaning = ____________________________
4. We have insufficient information to make a decision at this point, so we have to do more research to collect
information.
unfamiliar words = ____________________________
signal word or mark = ____________________________
meaning = ____________________________
5. You need to bring many tools to fix this tub: saw, hammer, knife, wrench, and screwdriver.
unfamiliar words = ____________________________
signal word or mark = ____________________________
meaning = ____________________________
6. Globophobia is used to refer to the fear of globalization, though it can also mean the fear of balloons.
unfamiliar words = ____________________________
signal word or mark = ____________________________
meaning = ____________________________
7. She looks best in vibrant colors, like red and pink.
unfamiliar words = ____________________________
signal word or mark = ____________________________
meaning = ____________________________
8. Habitat can be defined as the natural environment of an organism, the place in which it is natural for it to live and
grow.
unfamiliar words = ____________________________
signal word or mark = ____________________________
meaning = ____________________________
9. I was brought up to be polite. Similarly, I have tried to teach my own children good manners.
unfamiliar words = ____________________________
signal word or mark = ____________________________
meaning = ____________________________
10. There are six people who know what we do, and I feel a kinship to them, as opposed to a hate.
unfamiliar words = ____________________________
signal word or mark = ____________________________
meaning = ____________________________
109
PART 2:
Guessing the Meaning from the Context Exercises (A2+)
Exercise 1: Read the text below and try to guess what bold words are (they do not exist and are nonsensical
in English)
1. nouriness: _______________
2. monointig: _______________
Welcome to the nouriness forecast!
Now, let’s see what the nouriness is like today. In the north of the country it’s very windy and cold. There is a chance
of some rain too, so don’t leave home without your umbrella! The monointig is around 10º C. In the east, it’s rainy all
day today, I’m afraid. The monointig is a bit higher, at around 13º. In the west and middle of the country, the
nouriness is dry, but cloudy, so no rain for you, but it is quite windy and the monointig is just 10º. The south of the
country has the best nouriness today. It’s cloudy most of the time but sunny this afternoon. The monointig is around
15º.
Exercise 2: Read each sentence and guess the meaning of the word in bold from the context. Then match the
word with its meaning from the box above. Circle the words in the sentence that helped you guess the word's
meaning.
a. self-respect
b. having a hard time
c. took part
d. have control over
e. lower the stress
f. think I would see
g. be with
h. concentrate on
_____ 1. I was really surprised to see dogs in libraries. I didn't expect this.
_____ 2. The five-year-old boy was struggling with his homework because he'd been sick and missed a week of
school.
_____ 3. The handlers are in charge of the dogs. That is, they are responsible for the dog’s behavior.
_____ 4. The eight-year-old girl was reading much better after a few months in the program, and she became much
more confident. As a result, her self-esteem grew.
_____ 5. Hundreds of children participated in the R.E.A.D. program last year. They had more fun reading than they
did at home because they joined that program.
_____ 6. The children are able to focus on the dog, so they are not giving their attention to their problems.
_____ 7. If we take the pressure off of children, they can relax and perform better.
_____ 8. I like to be around my dog. When I am with her, life is calm.
Exercise 3: Read the sentences below. Read the underlined word in the sentence. Circle the answer choice
that has the same meaning as the underlined word.
1. The student replied to the teacher with a witty answer and the class laughed.
a. funny
b. mean
c. word
2. I looked at my brother with a glare after he broke my toy.
a. confusing
b. dirty look
c. difficult
3. Fireworks on the 4th of July glimmered brightly in the sky.
a. shine
b. light
c. look
4. When we go camping, my father will ignite the fire so we can roast marshmallows.
a. start
b. call
c. see
5. He chose to delete the unhealthy foods from his meal and make better choices.
a. include
b. make more c. remove
6. My grandpa will doze during television shows he watches when he is tired.
a. cheer
b. nap
c. discuss
7. The curious puppy emptied the bag while he sniffed around looking for something to chew.
a. problem
b. interested
c. happy
8. Each day during the spring there is a slight increase in temperature until summer arrives.
a. small
b. increase
c. bright
9. The tower will topple if it has too much weight at the top.
a. pounds
b. grow
c. fall over
110
10. The students who put in the best effort will be included in the celebration.
a. attitude
b. hard work
c. completion
Exercise 4. Read the information below. Then match each boldfaced word with its definition.
Crop circles have been seen in the UK, Australia, Russia, and about 50 other countries. But how--and for what
purpose--are they made? A family in a quiet farmland 1area wakes up one morning to find something very unusual:
someone has cut strange shapes into their crop fields! These huge 2 designs are called crop circles. There are circles,
stars, even 3 images of animals. But where do these crop circles come from?
Some people think that UFOs make crop circles when they land in fields. Others say they are made by aliens from 4
space, but no one knows the 5 purpose.
Another--more realistic--idea is that some people 6 decide to 7 build crop circles as a hobby, or as a kind of art. The 8
technology to make crop circles is very simple--just a rope and a piece of wood. Some teachers and students have
built crop circles for fun.
Crop circles are 9 real--there are photographs and reports of about 12,000 of them. But more 10 research is needed
before we really know how and why these shapes are made.
a. to make something ______
b. a pattern, shape, or plan _____
c. a picture of a person or thing ______
d. to choose to do something ______
e. a place, part, or region ______
f. the reason for doing something _____
g. true or actual ______
h. trying to discover facts about something ______
i. outside the Earth; where stars and planets are ______
j. science and machines to do things ______
The People of Kenya
Jambo! Welcome to Kenya. Kenya is home to many different cultures and ethnic groups, each with different
languages, dialects, and customs. 97% of Kenya's population is African, but they are from 70 different tribes. These
are groups of people with a common past and customs living together. The most well-known ones are Kikuyu, Kamba,
Gusli, Luhya and Luo. The people of Kenya have different life-styles. In Nairobi, Kenya's capital, and other large cities,
the life-style is modern and it is the same as that in Western cities. People in the cities live in modern houses or
apartments. They wear modern clothes like jeans and t-shirts. Outside the big cities, people have a totally different
life-style. Most of Kenya is a desert, land with very little water. In these remote areas, there are no modern
conveniences. There are no roads, no cars or buses, no electricity or running water, no telephones, no schools,
hospitals or shops. People living in these areas are nomads, they don't live in one place for a long time but they travel
to find food and water. They build temporary homes, live there until there is no more food or water and leave to find a
better place. Their homes are made of thatch (dry tree branches, leaves and grass). They also use mud and animal
waste. The land is poor and arid - very dry - so people cannot grow anything. Many people are herders of sheep,
goats, cows and camels. They give their babies milk from the sheep, cows, goats and camels. They also drink it
themselves. When they don't have enough milk, they mix the milk with the blood of the animal and drink it. They think
this will make them strong. They also make soups from some plants and eat meat if they can find it. Kenya has two
great lakes, called Lake Turkana and Lake Victoria. Around these lakes people can fish. These people wrap brightly colored material around their bodies and wear a lot of jewelry like necklaces, bracelets and earrings.
Exercise 5: The following words are all from the text above. Try to guess their meanings.
1. Example: tribes are groups of people with a common past and customs living together.
2. Desert is land with ___________________________________________________________________
3. Remote areas are __________________________________________________________________ big cities.
a) inside or near conveniences.
b) outside and far from
4. _____________________ and ____________________ are just two examples of modern conveniences.
5. Nomads travel from one place to another to __________________________________________________
6. Temporary means _________________________
a) for a short time
b) for a long time
7. Thatch is dry tree branches, _____________________ and ____________________.
8. Arid means _________________________________________________________________________.
9. Herders keep and feed animals. _____________________ and ____________________ are two of these animals.
10. _____________________ and ____________________ are two examples of jewelry.
111
PART 3: Guessing the Meaning from the Context Exercises (B1)
Remember!
Texts often contain words we don’t know. Looking up every word takes time and slows down your reading. To help
you guess the meaning from the context:
1. look at the word and sentence around the unknown word,
2. identify the part of speech,
3. use your knowledge of the world (what you already know about the situation),
4. think if the word has a negative or positive meaning,
5. replace the unknown word with another word with a similar meaning and check whether it makes sense in the
sentence.
Exercise 1: Read the sentences about walking and circle the word or phrase in parentheses that has the same
meaning as the underlined word in each sentence.
1. Many doctors suggest that people schedule (plan / learn / develop) time every day for walking.
2. Many think walking is not very useful, but most experts (professionals / teachers / professors) believe that it is an
excellent form of exercise.
3. Besides helping you lose weight, walking has internal (physical / inner / psychological) benefits such as lowering
blood pressure and strengthening bones.
4. To keep this exercise interesting, vary (keep/ check /change) the location of your walks by going to new and
different places.
5. While you walk, concentrate (work / focus/ keep) on good form. Stand up straight and don't look at the ground while
you walk.
Exercise 2: Read the text below and study the underlined words. Match them with their meanings and write
their parts of speech into the parentheses.
Change happens constantly as the last 50 years have proved. Some changes, such as air travel, the Internet and
mobile phones, provide ease and convenience. Others, like access to education, have had a deeper impact.
Nothing has had a bigger influence on our lives than recent changes in education. Fifty years ago, education was
considered by some a luxury. Nowadays, however, education isn't just a privilege for the chosen few. Young men and
women from all areas of life are becoming professional and improving their quality of life. This will be beneficial to
future generations because a better-educated society is a fairer and more skilled one.
Ironically, however, the change from rural to urban living that drove people to cities in search of better opportunities
has led to several modern-day problems. City dwellers have become less healthy. They no longer eat fresh farm food,
and instead, prefer ready meals and fast food. Urban residents no longer exercise by working the land. They use their
cars instead of walking.
Even though we are so technologically advanced, we are also frivolous. We destroy our forests, build more cars and
roads, and eat rubbish. Environment will all tell you that the future looks dark. More change is on the way and, if we
don’t change the way we think, the next fifty years will be very difficult.
1. convenience (___) _______
a. relating to a city
2. privilege
(___) _______
b. the state of something being easy to get or use
3. beneficial
(___) _______
c. helpful, useful, or good
4. led to
(___) _______
d. not taking anything seriously
5. dwellers
(___) _______
e. a person who lives in a city, town, cave, etc.
6. urban
(___) _______
f. a special right or advantage that a particular person or group of people has
7. frivolous
(___) _______
g. caused
Exercise 3: Skim the text. Choose a suitable title for each paragraph.
A. Keep eggs in the fridge and never eat them raw!
B. Keep cold foods cold!
C. Throw food away when you are not sure!
D. Keep hot foods hot!
E. Always wash your hands, before and after handling
food!
F. Wash fresh fruits and vegetables!
G. Thaw foods safely.
112
Every year, millions of people suffer from foodborne illnesses. These people do not even know that it was food that
caused their illness. Therefore, if you know the basics of food safety facts, this will help you not to become victims of
foodborne illnesses.
1. ___________________________________________
If you are not going to eat food immediately after you cook it, you should keep it hot. However, bacteria can grow well
at temperatures between 10°C and 40°C. Therefore, you should never keep cooked food at these temperatures for
more than two hours to prevent illness.
2. ___________________________________________
Cold salads, dairy products and meat require refrigeration. You should always keep them cold (below 10°C) because if
they warm up, bacteria may grow to dangerous levels.
3. ___________________________________________
Our hands naturally carry bacteria on them. If we transfer those bacteria to the food, they will rapidly grow there.
Similarly, some food, especially raw food, contains a certain amount of bacteria in it as well. Therefore, it is important
not to let the bacteria from raw foods stay on our hands when we handle, i.e., touch or hold food. If we do so, we may
transfer them to our mouth or other foods.
4. ___________________________________________
Never thaw (melt) frozen raw meat and poultry by leaving them on the counter at room temperature. The proper way
to thaw such products is to either thaw them in the refrigerator or thaw them in the microwave oven.
5. ___________________________________________
Because we keep some kinds of fresh fruits and vegetables outside, they may come in contact with different bacteria.
Most of these bacteria are not harmful, but do not forget to wash fresh fruits and vegetables well under running water
before you consume them.
6. ___________________________________________
Eggs may contain the bacteria Salmonella in their yolks, and so it is very important not to leave eggs at room
temperature. The number of Salmonella begins to multiply and grow at room temperature, because there may be
Salmonella in eggs, you should also always cook your eggs well before you eat them.
7. ___________________________________________
Never taste food that has gone bad. If you think that a food is unsafe to eat, do not eat it. Even reheating the food
cannot destroy the toxins of some bacteria. Never eat canned food if the can has a leak. The consequences of
foodborne illness are not worth the money you will save!
Exercise 4. Look at the bold words in the text. Write their parts of speech and match them with their
synonyms OR antonyms.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
suffer
level
proper
consume
multiply
destroy
prevent
rapidly
harmful
consequence
a. ( ) kill
b. ( )suitable
c. ( )increase
d. ( ) eat, drink
e. ( ) degree
f. ( ) be in pain
g. ( ) cause
h. ( ) helpful
i. ( ) slowly
j. ( ) allow
Exercise 5: Read the sentences. Then circle the definition of the boldfaced word.
1. Bronwyn wants to help her community in Melbourne, Australia.
A community is __________.
a. all the people in one place
b. all the people in the world
2. The movie last night was great! I laughed a lot. I was so happy.
You laugh when something is __________.
a. sad
b. funny
3. On The Friendship Page, people write about their goals: a good job, a lot of money, a big family.
A goal is a __________.
a problem you have now
b. something you want in the future
4. When there is not war, people can live in peace.
When there is peace, people are __________.
a. happy and comfortable
b. unhappy and angry
113
5. Karen likes The Friendship Page. She wants to make acquaintance with new people.
When you make acquaintance with people, you __________.
a. call them on the telephone
b. have met them but do not know well
6. If you have a problem, you can get advice on The Friendship Page. Then you feel better.
When you get advice, you get __________.
a. helpful ideas
b. money from your job
7. The Friendship Page is safe for young people. Bronwyn and her helpers watch The Friendship Page very carefully.
When something is safe, it is __________.
a. not dangerous to use
b. very easy to use
8. People on The Friendship Page like to chat about family, work, and friends.
When friends chat online, they__________ to each other
a. write
b. visit
9. Your phone number is personal. You only give it to good friends and family. You don't give your phone number
online.
When something is personal, you __________.
a. don't want everyone to know (about) it
b. tell a lot of people about it
Exercise 6: Before you read about the website The Friendship Page, think about what is on this website. Check your ideas
and then read the text.
1. _____ advice
2. _____ chat
3. _____ e-mail addresses
4. _____ information about Australia
5. _____ people’s real names
6. _____ pictures
7. _____ poem
8. _____ songs
9. _____ phone numbers
10. _____ other
The Friendship Page
Welcome to The Friendship Page -the website about friendship. When Bronwyn Polson was 16 years old, she
wanted to help her community. People laughed at her. They said, "You are so young!" But she didn't listen to them.
She was sure that friendship was important to everyone. So, in 1996, she started The Friendship Page. The
Friendship Page has two goals. One goal is to make the Internet friendlier. The other goal is to bring more peace to
the world. The Friendship Page is really about "peace through friendship." Today, 25 volunteers help Bronwyn with
The Friendship Page. They all work hard, but they have a lot of fun. They think their work is very important. The
Friendship Page is very popular. More than 23,000 people in 200 countries visit every day. That's 8,000,000 people
every year. The Friendship Page is friendly, free, fun, and easy to use. You can make new friends. You can get advice
about friendship. There are interesting pages with songs, poems, quotes, and more. You can also meet new and old
friends in the chat room. People from 7 to 90 years old visit The Friendship Page. Most people are 13-34 years old.
Young people and old people can be friends. They can help each other and learn a lot. Fifty-five percent are female,
and 45 percent are male.
The Friendship Page is very safe. The volunteers watch the website carefully. They want it to be safe for everyone,
especially for young people. They talk to the Australian police about Internet safety, too. On The Friendship Page,
people do not use their real names. There are also no personal email addresses, no phone numbers, and no personal
pictures. Also, when you delete information from The Friendship Page, no one can see it again. The information does
not stay on the Internet. This is not true of some other websites. If you are interested in friendship, please visit The
Friendship Page at www.friendship.com.au.
Exercise 7: Complete the sentences with the correct numbers from the reading.
1. The Friendship Page started in _____________ .
2. _____________ volunteers help Bronwyn with The Friendship Page.
3. _____________ people visit The Friendship Page every day.
4. _____________ people visit The Friendship Page every year.
5. People from _____________ countries use The Friendship Page.
6. People from_____________ to_____________ years old use The Friendship Page.
7. _____________ percent are girls or women. _____________ percent are boys or men.
114
Exercise 8: Read the emails below and find the words with the definitions (1-6) from the text.
Dear Dr. Yu,
I recently read an advertisement about a new diet. The diet consists of vitamin drinks. The ad says this diet is the only
way to get all the vitamins I need. I have a busy schedule so a simple diet like this would save me time. Do you think
this kind of diet is a good idea?
Busy College Student
Dear Busy College Student,
In general, be cautious about taking medical advice from ads. However, the ad is correct about vitamins. They are
important to your health. According to researchers, vitamins support your immune system, keep your bones strong,
and even improve your vision. However, it is best to get your vitamins through a healthy diet.
When you leave for school every morning, put some fruits, nuts, and vegetables in your school bag. These snacks will
give you vitamins A, C, E, and K. Breads and cereals can be easy snacks, too. They provide vitamin B.
When you sit down for a meal, concentrate on eating green vegetables. Meat is also an important source of vitamins B
and D. And don't forget to drink milk for calcium.
Getting a balanced diet doesn't have to be challenging. It can be easy if you snack on healthy foods throughout the
day. If you take this approach to eating, you will find that you feel both healthy and satisfied.
Dr. Susan Yu1. plan of
activities (para. 1)
__________
2. careful (para. 2)
__________
3. become/make better (para. 2)__________
4. a small amount of food (para. 3)__________
5. difficult (para. 5)
__________
6. way (para. 5)
_________
Exercise 9: Read the sentences. Match the words in bold with a synonym from the list below.
Do not use a dictionary. Write the letter of the synonym next to the sentence There is one extra word.
a. adapt
b. expected
c. surprised
d. follow
e. check
f. ineffective
g. complex
h. free yourself of
i. decreasing
1. ______ I was stunned when my parents told me we were moving to a new city. I thought I could finish high school
before we moved.
2. ______ She went to take money out of her bank account, but there was no money left. She didn’t check her bank
statements, so she couldn’t see the amount of money was declining.
3. ______ Ahmed moved to the United States to pursue his dream. He wanted to get a master's degree from an
American university.
4. ______ Humans are complicated creatures and tend to spend a lot of time thinking and planning.
5. ______ If rain is anticipated, it's a good idea to carry an umbrella.
6. ______ Teachers monitor students' progress by giving homework and tests.
7. ______ Change can be difficult in the beginning, but by being patient, we can gradually adjust to it.
8. ______ If we don't let go of the past, we cannot make progress in the present.
115
An Unbreakable Code
In most Hollywood movies, the Native American Navajos still fight on horses in the American Southwest. But during
World War II, a group of Navajos made their language into a weapon to protect the United States. They were the
Navajo Code Talkers, and theirs is one of the few unbroken codes in military history.
Navajo was the perfect choice for a secret language. It is very complex. One vowel can have up to ten different
pronunciations, changing the meaning of any word. In the 1940s, Navajo was an unwritten language. No one outside
of the reservation could speak it or understand it.
The Navajo Code team had to invent new words to describe military equipment. For example, they named ships after
fish: lotso-whale (battleship), calo-shark (destroyer), beshloiron fish (submarine). When a Code Talker received
message via radio, he heard a series of unrelated Navajo words. He would then translate the words into English and
use the first letter of each English word to spell the message. The Navajo words tsah (needle), wol-la-chee (ant),
ah-kh-di-glini (victor), and tsaha ah-dzoh (yucca)' spelled NAVY.
The Code Talkers kept the code a secret. They memorized everything. There were no code books. As a result, no
ordinary Navajo soldier, if captured by the enemy, could understand the code. More than 3,600 Navajos served in
World War II, but only 420 were Code Talkers with the U.S. Marines. They coded and decoded battlefield messages
better and faster than any machine. They could encode, transmit, and decode messages in 20 seconds. Machines of
time required 30 minutes to perform the same job.
Even after the war, the code remained top secret. When they were asked about their role, Code Talkers just said: ‘I
was a radioman.’ War movies and histories came out without mentioning them. The code was never used again and
was finally declassified* in 1968. Only then did the secret come out.
* declassified: made public after having being kept secret
Exercise 10: Read each statement. Decide if it is True or False according to the text. Correct the false ones.
1. Native Americans did a great service for their country.
2. Machine translators worked faster than the Navajos.
3. The Code Talkers had to translate from one language to another.
4. All the Navajos in the U.S. Marines used the code.
5. The code can be used again in the future.
True / False
True / False
True / False
True / False
True / False
Exercise 11: Complete each sentence with the bold words from the text. Use the synonym (a word that means
the same) in parentheses to help you select the correct word.
1. Traditional Navajo people ______________ (remembered) their history to share with the next generation.
2. In 1864 Kit Carson and the U.S. Army ______________ (caught) thousands of Navajo people and made them
march 300 miles to New Mexico as prisoners on the Long Walk.
3. Books ______________ (tell) how the U.S. Army burned Navajo crops, killed their animals, and destroyed their
homes.
4. When the Navajo returned to Arizona, they had to ______________ (stay) on a reservation under U.S. government
control.
5. The Code Talkers served their country ______________ (by way of) the code, but they couldn't vote until 1948.
6. The decision to help their country was ______________ (complicated) for the Navajo because they were not
always accepted as full Americans.
School Reports ‘not tough enough’ - report.
School reports are often not honest enough and give parents the wrong impression of their children’s ability according
to a study published in the journal Education Today. The authors of the study say teachers sometimes do not know
how to write reports; they usually don’t understand the aim of the report. School reports should help pupils improve
their work but many teachers do not give a clear picture of the pupil’s strengths and weaknesses. ‘Many reports are
too positive and pupils often think their grades are better than they really are’. There is a problem at both primary and
secondary school where teachers need more support with how to write reports. Teachers discuss children’s marks
with parents but it is difficult to be honest face-to-face. Some children not only fail to do well on tests but also have
discipline problems.
Exercise 12: Match the underlined words in the text below with a word that has a similar meaning in this context
(options A-F). There is one extra.
A. purpose
B. idea
C. skills
D. behavior
E. success
F. poor performance
___________
___________
___________
___________
___________
___________
116
Read. Supp. 8
Level2_Scanning
Objective: can identify specific information in a simple factual text. (scanning)
Read the text below and do the exercises.
Lindbergh Did It!
Paris Express News-May 27, 1927
PARIS, FRANCEOne week ago, Charles Lindbergh was just a handsome, 25-year-old airmail pilot from a small town in the United
States. Today, he is the most famous man in the world and the most important man in the history of flying.
Last week, Lindbergh started out on an adventure. He flew solo from New York to France. He was the first person to
fly non-stop across the Atlantic Ocean alone. He also set the record for the longest non-stop flight.
Lindbergh took off on his historic flight on May 20th at 7:52 A.M. People called him "The Flying Fool." On that day,
other pilots in the contest waited in New York because the weather was very bad. Lindbergh decided not to wait. He
took five sandwiches, a bottle of water, a notebook, a pen, and a compass. He didn't even have a radio. All he heard
was the sound of the wind and the noise from the plane's engine. He was in the air all alone with his thoughts, his
hopes, and his fears.
After 3,610 miles, 33 hours and 30 minutes and no sleep, Lindbergh landed in Paris on May 21st. At that moment, his
life changed forever. There were 150,000 excited people waiting to greet him. The international media were also there.
Photographers and newspaper reporters wanted to be the first to tell Lindbergh's story. When he got out of his plane
and saw all the excitement, he knew that his life would never be the same again.
When he began this unforgettable flight, he was a quiet young man from a quiet town. This morning, "Lucky Lindy" left
Paris as an international hero.
Practice 1
Circle the best answer to complete each statement.
1. In 1927, Lindbergh set the record for the ____ non-stop flight.
a. first
b. longest
c. highest
2. He was the first person to fly non-stop from ____.
a. France to the United States
b. The United States to France c. New York to San Diego
3. The people waiting in Paris were very ____.
a. excited
b. quiet
c. confused
4. Because of his historic flight, Lindbergh became very ____.
a. handsome
b. lucky
c. famous
117
Practice 2: Use one of the numbers from the box to answer each question. Write your answers in complete
sentences.
150,000
25
3,610
331/2
one
the 21st
7:52
five
the 20th, May
1. How old was Lindbergh when he flew across the Atlantic?
Lindbergh was 25 years old when he flew across the Atlantic.
2. On what date did he take off from New York?
_____________________________________________________________________________________.
3. At what time in the morning did he take off from New York?
_____________________________________________________________________________________.
4. How many people were on Lindbergh's plane when he flew across the Atlantic?
_____________________________________________________________________________________.
5. How many miles was Lindbergh's flight?
_____________________________________________________________________________________.
6. For how many hours was he in the air?
_____________________________________________________________________________________.
7. How many sandwiches did he take on his trip?
_____________________________________________________________________________________.
8. On what date did he land in Paris?
_____________________________________________________________________________________.
9. About how many people greeted him when he arrived in Paris?
_____________________________________________________________________________________.
To find the answers of these questions, you need to search for specific information in the text. This skill is
called scanning.
SCANNING
Scanning is a reading strategy to be used when you want to find specific information quickly. In scanning, you
have a question in your mind and you read a passage only to find the answer, ignoring unrelated information.
How to scan:
● State the specific information you are looking for.
● Try to anticipate how the answer will appear and what clues you might use to help you locate the
answer.
For example, if you were looking for a certain date, you would quickly read the paragraph looking only
for numbers.
● Use headings and any other aids that will help you identify which sections might contain the
information you are looking for.
● Selectively read and skip through sections of the passage.
118
Practice 3
Read an article about student accommodation in which four college students talk about the place they live.
A. Matthew Wren
I live in what’s called a hall of residence where I get full
board as well as a room. It’s not exactly what you call
cheap, though, I pay £87 per week for my single room
and three meals a day. This also includes the use of a
washing machine and ironing board. But I can’t
complain because my room has just been re-carpeted,
the furniture’s new and the cleaner comes in daily. The
main drawback is sharing the bathroom with nine other
students and we don’t have any kitchen facilities. The
first thing I did when I arrived was buy myself a
mini-fridge, so I could have cool drinks whenever I
wanted. But, we’re on the university network, so I have
access to the Internet and free e-mail from my room,
and we get room phones so I can ring friends around
the campus for nothing.
B. Kerry Dunnock
The city where I study is appalling for cheap
accommodation, and the college has nothing of its own
to offer you, but I was lucky, I found a room in a nice
little terraced house with central heating which I share
with three other girls. I have a yearly contract with a
private landlady and I pay £220 a month for my study
bedroom. This is not bad as it also has a large walk-in
wardrobe where I put all my stuff. I share the bathroom,
kitchen and a small living room with the other girls, and
we split all the bills between us. We tried to make a rota
for the washing up, cleaning and putting out the rubbish,
but it’s not always strictly followed. Cooking your own
food is much cheaper than eating at college, and I like it
because I have what I want when I want it.
C. Becky Martin
I live in a college-owned self-catering block. There’s not
much luxury, but I get value for money. For my £38 per
week rent, I get a reasonably-sized room with an old
wardrobe, a tiny desk, one shelf, a rather stained carpet
and a sink. When I first moved in, I probably spent more
on decoration than I did on food. My only real complaint,
though, was that I had to buy a new pillow because the
one I was provided with felt like a plastic bag full of old
towels. I share the kitchen and bathroom with six other
girls. One of them has a TV in her room, but she is a bit
possessive about it. The fridge is not huge, so you’re
always trying to squeeze your food into the last
remaining inch of space. I twice set off the fire alarm by
burning my dinner, so I tended to give up on cooking
after that. We eat a lot of take-aways. In the next block
there’s a games room where we hang out which has
things like table football and satellite TV if you need a
break from studying.
D. Karl Yorat
I made the big mistake of going to a college fairly near
my home. I’m stuck at my parents’ house, so I don’t feel
in touch with what’s going on at campus. In some ways
I’m lucky because I’m not paying out all the money for
food and rent that other people have to find, and I have
someone to do my washing, but I don’t have the same
amount of freedom or privacy as the people who’re
living away from home. I even have to share a room
with my younger brother. When I told my parents I
wanted to move out and go into college
accommodation, they said they’d stop supporting me
financially. So, in the end, I had to give up the idea, that
hasn’t made any of us very happy.
Which student says? Use the letters.
1. My accommodation seems quite expensive.
__A__
8. I would like to have more private space.
_____
2. I have plenty of storage space.
_____
9. It’s easy to keep in touch with people here.
_____
3. My college doesn’t provide accommodation.
_____
10. My room is not very well-furnished.
_____
4. My room is maintained to a high standard.
_____
11. This is the only place where I can afford to live. _____
5. Someone does my washing for me.
_____
12. I save money by doing my own cooking.
6. I would like to have more independence.
_____
13. There are good recreational facilities nearby.
_____
7. I had to buy some extra electrical equipment. _____
_____
119
TEXT 1
Madagascar – When to go
Madagascar has two seasons, a warm, wet season from November to April, and a cooler dry season between May
and October. However, different parts of the country have very different weather.
The east coast is hotter and wetter, with up to 4000mm of rainfall per year. In the rainy season, there are strong winds,
and these can cause a lot of damage. Avoid visiting eastern Madagascar between January and March because the
weather can make road travel very difficult. The dry season is cooler and more pleasant.
The high, central part of the country is much drier and cooler. Not much rain falls in the rainy season, with some
thunderstorms. The summer is usually sunny and dry, but it can be cold, especially in the mornings, with freezing
showers, and it may snow in mountain areas above 2,400m, and even stay there for several days.
The west coast is the driest part of the island. Here, the winter months are pleasant with little rain, cooler temperatures
and blue skies. The summers can be extremely hot, especially in the southwest. This part of the country is
semi-desert, and only gets around 300mm of rain per year.
Read the text above and find out if the statements are True or False.
1. Madagascar has four seasons: spring, summer, autumn and winter.
2. There is more rain in January than in June.
3. The wet season is colder than the dry season.
4. It hardly ever rains in central Madagascar.
5. The wettest part of the island is the east.
6. January-March is a good time to visit eastern Madagascar.
7. The centre of Madagascar is the coldest part.
8. Snow sometimes falls in Madagascar.
9. The west coast has the best weather in December.
10. The north-west is hotter than the south-west.
True / False
True / False
True / False
True / False
True / False
True / False
True / False
True / False
True / False
True / False
TEXT 2
Hotel Reservation
Receptionist: Good afternoon! This is Capitol Hotels in Washington, D.C. How may I help you?
Mr. Abrams: Hi, I’d like to schedule a reservation for this upcoming weekend from Friday night until Sunday.
Receptionist: Sure! Let me check and see what rooms are available. Do you need a room with one bed or two?
Mr. Abrams: My wife and I will be visiting the city, but a room with one bed will be just fine.
Receptionist: Alright... It looks like we have several rooms available. Would you care for a room with a balcony?
Mr. Abrams: A single room with no balcony will suit our needs just fine. I did notice on your website that you have a
pool and an exercise room. Are these facilities available for all hotel guests?
Receptionist: Yes, all hotel guests are allowed access to those facilities. The hotel stay also includes breakfast. We
have a restaurant on-site that also serves lunch and dinner, but those meals are not included in your lodging fee.
Mr. Abrams: Okay, that’s fine. What time are both check-in and check-out?
Receptionist: Check-in for you on Friday can be any time after 3:00 p.m. Check-out will be on Sunday before noon.
Mr. Abrams: Sounds great!
Receptionist: I am glad that I could help you today. Is there anything else that you need at this point in time?
Mr. Abrams: Would you like my credit card information now, or can I take care of that upon my arrival to the hotel’s
reception desk?
Receptionist: We can handle payment upon your arrival on Friday. We look forward to seeing you then!
Mr. Abrams: Thank you! I look forward to my stay.
Receptionist: Enjoy the rest of your week!
120
Read the dialog above and choose the best answer.
1. What is the name of the hotel where Mr. Abrams plans on staying?
a. Capitol Hotels
b. Kennedy Hotels
c. Washington D.C.
d. Lincoln Hotels
2. For how long does Mr. Abrams plan on staying at the hotel?
a. three nights
b. overnight
c. a week
d. two nights
3. What kind of room does Mr. Abrams request to stay in?
a. a single room without a balcony
b. a double room without a balcony
c. a single room with a balcony
d. a double room with a balcony
4. All of the following are amenities the hotel offers its guests except:
a. an exercise room
b. free breakfast
c. a massage room
d. a swimming pool
5. At what time can Mr. Abrams check into the hotel on Friday?
a. before noon
b. after 1:00 p.m.
c. before 11:00 a.m.
d. after 3:00 p.m.
6. When does Mr. Abrams plan on giving the hotel his credit card information?
a. at the end of his stay
b. during the phone call
c. upon his arrival to the reception desk
d. Mr. Abrams wants to pay in cash
TEXT 3:
Read the text about Politeness and choose the best answer (a, b, or c).
1. The writer __________.
a. gives detailed advice to UK visitors
b. compares British and German customs
c. explains how the English language works
2. The writer is probably someone who has __________.
a. lived in England
b. moved to England
c. a family in England
Politeness
It's really true what people say about English politeness: it's everywhere. When squeezing past someone in a narrow
space, people say 'sorry'. When getting off a bus, English passengers say 'thank you' to the driver. In Germany,
people would never dream of doing this: bus drivers are just doing their job! I used to think the German way, until I was
in Britain for a few years. I understood that there were more polite ways of treating people, and I began to adopt some
of those ways too!
When people buy something in a shop, both customer and shop assistant usually thank each other, twice or
more. In Germany, it would be unusual to hear more than one ‘thank you’ in such a conversation. British students
thank their lecturers when leaving the room. English employers thank their employees for doing their jobs, but
Germans think that paying their workers money is already thanks enough! But there is another side to British
politeness. One word that comes to mind here is 'artificial'. Although it is enjoyable to talk with friendly people, it has
often made me wonder what the English really think. In fact, this confused me throughout my stay in England.
Everyone at the University I attended seemed to like me, and people in my class were kind and friendly, but I found it
hard to understand who was really my friend and who was ‘just being polite’. I must say that British politeness is a little
confusing to me. For example, I often wonder why the English get angry suddenly when they drink too much. And then
I think: maybe, drinking is a good excuse for being rude once in a while… After all, having to be polite all the time can
be stressful, right?
121
Read the text again and choose the best answer.
1. The writer __________.
a. used to apologise a lot
b. feels more polite now
c. hates to be rude
2. The writer says Germans, compared to the British, __________.
a. have bad manners
b. say ‘thank you’ less often
c. think more about money
3. How do the English change when they drink too much?
a. They become loud.
b. They joke a lot.
c. They are less polite.
4. The writer is confused by English politeness and wonders if __________.
a. it’s necessary
b. it causes tension
c. it’s exaggerated
TEXT 4
Welcome!
Facilities
Welcome to the new Achileas Sports Centre and
Swimming Pool Complex monthly newsletter! We offer a
wide variety of activities for you and all your family and
friends. Whether your interest is fitness, football, tennis,
basketball or swimming, we can offer you an excellent
range of activities to suit all your needs. We hope you will
enjoy your visit to the new Achileas Complex and take
advantage of the many facilities available.
Five fitness and special-focus gyms, one children’s
gym, Olympic pool and children’s starter pool, four
squash courts, four badminton courts, two basketball
courts, eight outdoor tennis courts, two all-weather
football pitches, Achileas Sports Shop, Achileas
Restaurant.
Opening Hours
Focus on gyms
Swimming Pool
Whatever your fitness level, whatever your age and
whatever your fitness goals, we have something to
offer you in one of our special-focus gyms! If you
would like to lose weight, tone up, increase your
strength or improve your health, we have highly
qualified staff on hand to motivate you in one of our
focus gyms. All of this takes place in one of our five
focus gyms: cardiovascular, resistance training, free
weights, general and sports injury. All our focus gyms
offer state-of-the-art machines and excellent
user-friendly equipment, catering for all your health
and fitness needs.
Monday–Friday
07.00–22.00
Saturday–Sunday & public holidays
08.00–21.00
Sports Centre
Monday–Friday
06.00–22.00
Saturday–Sunday & public holidays
09.00–20.00
Achileas Restaurant
12.00–15.00 &
19.00–23.00
Monday–Saturday Sunday & public
holidays
12.00–15.00 only
Couples
Family
Personal fitness
(2
adults)
(2 adults + 2
children)
$400
$350
each
$1,000
$130
$210
$180
each
$600
Whether you wish to work out once a week or every
day, for ten minutes or an hour, after an initial
consultation, our staff will design your own
personal-fitness programme, tailored to suit your
individual needs. You will also benefit from regular
reviews, where your progress will be monitored and
your programme updated or adjusted accordingly.
3-monthly
$70
$110
$100
each
$330
Monthly
$25
$45
$40
each
$120
Weekly
$20
$40
$35
each
$105
Daily
$10
$20
$15
each
$45
Members
hip
Childr
en
Adult
s
(6–17)
(18+
)
Annual
$250
6-monthly
122
Read the newsletter in detail and write answers for questions.
1. How often is the newsletter published? __________________________________________________
2. What time does the sports center close on public holidays? ___________________________________
3. What is the cost for a family for a six-month membership? ___________________________________
4. How many swimming pools are there? ____________________________________________________
5. What non-sport facilities does the complex offer? Give two examples. __________________________
6. How many different ‘fitness goals’ are mentioned? _________________________________________
7. What do you need to do before the staff can design your personal fitness programme? ____________
8. How is your progress assessed? _________________________________________________________
9. What do they hope to achieve? _________________________________________________________
10. What two things do all the ‘focus’ gyms offer? ___________________________________________
TEXT 5
The History of the Restaurant
According to the dictionary, a restaurant is an eating place. Therefore, according to this definition, the restaurant is as
old as civilization1. For example, there is evidence of2 eating places in ancient Roman ruins.
Most ancient eating places were taverns. Taverns served simple meals and drinks to travelers. By the middle of the
17th century, a new kind of eating place appeared in many parts of Europe. These were cafes. At first, they served only
coffee; later, they served food. Cafes became popular meeting places for writers and their friends.
The restaurant appeared at the end of the 18th century, in Paris. It was very different from the tavern or the cafe. It
gave customers a choice. Restaurants had menus. For the first time, customers decided what to eat, when to eat, and
how much to eat. Also for the first time, customers knew how much the food cost before they ate it. The menu at a
typical Parisian restaurant in the 18th century might have 12 different kinds of soup, 65 meat dishes, and 50 desserts.
Before the restaurant was born, there were different kinds of cooks in France. For example, there were roasters,
bakers, and dessert makers. A roaster could not bake anything and a baker could not make a dessert. This was the
law. Also at this time, the word restaurant had a special meaning. It was a French word for a kind of soup. This soup
was restorative; this means, it made people feel better when they were tired or sick. Eating places served the
restorative soup to customers.
In 1765, man named Boulanger owned one of these soup shops. One day, he broke the law3. He cooked some meat
and put a sauce on it. This made the sauce makers angry. They went to court. Boulanger won, and the modern
restaurant was born. By 1786, a restaurant was a place to cook and serve all types of foods and drinks: soups, meats,
salads, desserts, and wines.
An important time for the restaurant was the French Revolution, around 1792. Before the revolution, many rich people
had chefs in their homes. The French Revolution ended the monarchy4 and the aristocracy5. After the revolution, many
chefs did not have jobs, so they started restaurants. As a result, restaurants became an important kind of business in
France. Now, eating well was for everyone, not just rich people.
By the 19th century, there were many restaurants in Paris and in many big cities around the world. Restaurants
became more than just places to eat; they became places to meet people and to try new things.
Today, the word restaurant can mean many things –a diner, a cafeteria, or a place to eat fast food. There are even
restaurants that show movies, restaurants where people eat in the dark, and underwater restaurants. Who knows
what will happen in the restaurant world of the future?
old as civilization: since the time of the first human cultures
evidence of: proof of
3
broke the law: did something illegal
4
monarchy: ruling by kings and queens
5
aristocracy: upper classes
1
2
123
A. Read the text quickly and the complete as many sentences as you can without looking at the text. Discuss
your answers with a partner.
1. The modern restaurant ______________
a. was born in ancient Rome. b. was born in France. c. was born in the 19 th century.
2. Restaurants were different from taverns and cafes because ______________
a. they served food.
b. they were only for travelers.
c. people had choices.
3. At first, the word restaurant meant ______________
a. a place to eat many kinds of food.
b. a kind of soup.
c. a place to eat meat with sauce.
4. Boulanger changed the idea of the restaurant by ______________
a. starting a revolution.
b. opening a soup shop.
c. breaking the law.
5. After the French Revolution, ______________
a. many chefs needed work.
b. many rich people needed work.
c. Boulanger needed work.
6. Now, the word restaurant means ______________
a. a diner.
b. a cafeteria. c. a place to eat fast food.
d. all of the above.
B. Complete the timeline according to the text. Put the events next to the correct time periods in the chart.
Discuss your answers with a partner.
a. Taverns serve food to travelers.
b. French-style restaurants appear around the world.
c. The restaurant becomes a place to serve all kinds of food.
d. Cafes appear in Europe.
e. The French Revolution happens.
f. Boulanger serves meat with a sauce at his soup shop.
Time Period
Event
1. Ancient times
a. Taverns serve food to travelers.
2. Mid-17th century
3. 1765
4. 1786
5. 1792
6. 19th century
124
Read. Supp. 9
Level2_Skimming
Objective: Can identify main information in a simple factual text. (Skimming)
SKIMMING
Skimming is moving your eyes over a text as you read quickly. You skim when you want to get a general idea
about the information in the text but don’t need to know all of the details.
Skimming is a good way to preview the text. It also helps you save time. For example, you skim when you want
to see if the full text is something you want to read or if it will have the information you need. Through skimming
you can understand:
- what the text is about, what kind of information each paragraph has: names, dates, numbers and key
words, and whether it is relevant to what you are looking for.
- What type of text it is: a report, a letter, an article, a scientific text, etc..
- Who the audience is: children, adults, general public, professionals, etc..
- what the writer’s purpose is: to describe, to inform, to explain, to instruct, to persuade, etc...
- how the writer feels or what his attitude is: angry, sad, critical, happy, agreeing, disagreeing, etc..
To skim,
1. Read the title and any subtitles.
2. Read one or two paragraphs at the beginning.
3. Read the first and/or the last sentence of the other paragraphs.
4. Look quickly at the other paragraphs. Read only a few words here and there. Notice names, places,
dates, and numbers, and words in bold or italic print.
5. Read the last paragraph.
Practice 1. Skim the following text to answer the questions below.
Which is the oldest living tree in the world? Is it the tall redwood tree, called giant sequoia? Botanists say it is
4,000 years old. How about the Wollemi Pine? The Wollemi Pine is only a few million years old. The answer is the
Nightcap Oak. This oldest tree is 90 million years old. It is still alive in the Nightcap Range rainforest, 650 km from
Sydney, Australia, after so many centuries. The Nightcap Oak is a rainforest tree with dark green leaves, small nuts
and small white flowers. It is a living fossil, but it looks like any other tree.
1. The paragraph is mainly about ___________.
a. rainforests in Australia
c. the oldest tree in the world
b. giant sequoia, the redwood tree
d. botanists and trees
2. The paragraph is from ____________.
a. a storybook
c. a textbook
b. a scientific lab report
d. personal letter
3. The writer’s purpose is to _____________.
a. give information
c. give instructions
b. make an excuse
d. make a suggestion
125
Practice 2. Read the four texts. Then read the headlines a–h. Decide which headline goes best with which text.
a) ASTRONAUT WALKS IN SPACE AGAIN
e) Footballer wants to help children
b) Bill Clinton caught in snow in Austria
f) Model and Ex-President in bad weather
c) Eleventh space trip for astronaut
g) Prince Charles gives money to school
d) FOOTBALLER HAS ACCIDENT WHILE PLAYING
h) SCHOOLCHILDREN MEET PRINCE OF WALE
1.__________________________________________
The Prince of Wales, Prince Charles, visited a junior
school in Buckinghamshire last week to help children
with a project about the Royal Family. He told the
children about his life as a member of Britain’s most
famous family and the duties which go with his title.
He then let photos be taken of him with the children
and the teachers for the project work. One of the
questions the children asked was “How much pocket
money do your sons get?”
2.__________________________________________
Footballer Roman Gregory has started a UNICEF
campaign to help children hurt in accidents with land
mines, in countries at war and in peace. The footballer
says he cannot imagine being without an arm or a leg
and knows that many people do not even think about
what the children who have had such injuries go
through. “Many accidents with land mines happen
when children are just playing happily in the fields”,
says Roman, who hopes to get £1 million in the
campaign.
3._________________________________________
4.__________________________________________
Former US President Bill Clinton met model Naomi
Campbell on a snow-covered mountain in Austria.
Naomi’s flight arrived late because of the bad weather
and she nearly fell down getting through the snow. Bill
Clinton helped her through the snow and they chatted
for a while about the weather. Naomi Campbell was
doing a photo session at the same place where
Clinton was at a conference.
NASA Astronaut Jerry Ross works on the so called
“City in the sky” – the international space station – and
has just done a ninth spacewalk as part of his 11 days
on the space station. Ross is the first person to walk in
space so many times and still loves the experience. He
will be returning to Earth later this month.
TEXT 1: Skim the following text to answer the questions below.
Celebrating Midsummer in Sweden
This festival is as close as possible to 24th June, the longest day of the year. It is a very old celebration and
modern Swedes drive to summer cottages to stay, or sail to bays on the coast to celebrate. People in traditional dress
dance around a maypole- a tall pole decorated with flowers. After the dancing, people eat marinated fish with a strong,
spicy drink. It is thought that if a girl who isn’t yet married picks different flowers and puts them under her pillow at
Midsummer she’ll dream about her future husband.
I think that the festival allows people in Sweden to relax and enjoy themselves outside during the long light
days of Midsummer. It also means that the traditional dances, food and drink are remembered. In my opinion this
festival also helps keep families in touch with one another and it helps Swedes know how their great grand-parents
lived. However, I believe that thinking a girl will dream about her future husband if she puts flowers under her pillow is
a rather silly idea.
1. Which paragraph describes the festival? ______________________
2. Which paragraph gives the writer’s opinion? ______________________
3. What order does the following information appear in the text?
_____ a. Food that people eat
_____ b. The date of the festival
_____ c. A belief that people share
_____ d. What people do nowadays at Midsummer
126
TEXT 2
Skim the following text about Portham Village School prospectus to answer the questions below.
1. Is the prospectus aimed at children or parents? ___________________________________________________
2. Would you use the prospectus to: a. find directions to the school? ____________________________________
b. find out what time the school opens? ______________________________
c. find out about school uniforms? ___________________________________
3. As well as illness, which issues does the ‘Absence’ section deal with? ___________________________________
4. Does the prospectus give details of the curriculum? __________________________________________________
5. You can find out about school clubs from this prospectus. True or false? __________________________________
6. The prospectus tells parents about the issues of bullying. True or false? __________________________________
7. Does the prospectus give parents information about school examinations? ________________________________
8. Does the prospectus tell parents how to purchase second-hand uniforms? ________________________________
9. Does the prospectus tell you about school lunches? __________________________________________________
10. The prospectus gives you the telephone number to call if your child is ill. True or false? _____________________
127
TEXT 3
1. We all know that a single day is 24 hours long. However, that is only true about a day on the planet Earth.
That's because it takes the Earth 24 hours to make one rotation. Different planets take different amounts of
time to rotate, or turn. So how long is one day on some of the other planets in our solar system? One day on
the planet Mercury takes over 58 days in Earth time. That's a long day, but Venus has the longest day. A
day on the planet Venus is 243 Earth days long. Jupiter, the largest planet, has the shortest day, just 9.9
Earth hours long. A day lasts less than 10 hours on the planet Jupiter.
2. Are you about to have your first baby? Are you wondering what your typical day will be like? Well, it will
definitely be very different from your typical day now. First, you won't sleep for eight hours at night and stay
awake for the other 16 hours of the day. You will probably sleep when your baby sleeps and be awake when
your baby is awake. Babies have different sleep patterns, but your baby will probably sleep for one to three
hours at a time. When you are awake, you will probably spend a lot of your time feeding your baby and
changing diapers. Expect to be tired most of the time. But you can also expect to feel incredible happiness
when you look at your beautiful new baby.
A. Skim the paragraphs quickly. Pay attention to the words in bold. Then match each paragraph with one of
the topics below.
Paragraph 1.
Paragraph 2.
a. how long a day is on other planets
a. how to take care of a baby
b. why a day on Earth is 24 hours long
b. the normal day of a new parent
c. a normal day on the planet Jupiter
c. why people need a lot of sleep
B. Now read the paragraphs in detail. Were you correct about the gist of each one?
128
TEXT 4
The History of Modern Fashion
1
Today, dedicated followers of fashion look to cities such as New York City, London, Paris and Milan for their
inspiration and to buy the latest trends. The fashion scene changes with every season and in many countries,
this means that there are four collections – one each for spring, summer, autumn and winter. The concept of
fashion trends developed in the 14th century in Europe, but what about fashion in the rest of the world?
2
Early Western travellers going to the East noted that fashion styles did not change rapidly in countries such as
Persia, India, China and Japan. However, this was not always the case as there was also evidence showed
during the dynasty of Ming China of rapidly changing fashions in Chinese clothing. History shows us that
changes in costume often took place at times of economic or social change, which occurred in ancient Rome
and the medieval Arabian Peninsula. Then a long period without major changes would follow.
At this time, most weaving, embroidery, cutting and stitching were hand-crafted by skilled craftsmen and
seamstresses. Many textiles originated in countries such as China, where delicate and beautiful silks were
produced and Turkey with its rich history of embroidery and clothing styles influenced by Central Asia and the
Far East. Until the mid-nineteenth century, in Europe and America most clothing was therefore custom-made
by skilled dressmakers and tailors. This meant that following fashion trends was clearly an expensive interest.
In the twentieth century, mechanised production of textiles and the introduction of the sewing machine
dramatically changed the way fashionable clothes were produced. It led the development of haute couture
and, much later, affordable branded clothing which was the fruit of haute couture. Mass production meant that
clothing became much cheaper and more widely available, yet at the same time was easily adapted to meet
the designers’ demands. As economies grew and people became wealthier, more people could afford to buy
designer clothing across the world.
To sum up, fashion is closely interlinked with the history of the world. Periods of rapid change and movement
of people influenced the textiles and styles that people chose to wear. Nowadays, people are still extremely
conscious about the way they dress for various occasions. Adolescents and young adults feel very strongly
about the brands they wear, whether it is for college, partying or sportswear. Their parents feel the same about
their own designer labels. There are designer or boutique brands all over the world. In many Asian countries,
local designers can charge a small fortune for exclusive bridal wear, wedding attire and other formal wear.
3
4
5
A. Skim the text and choose the best title for each paragraph.
Paragraph
A. Origins of textiles
B. Industrialisation
C. Designer companies
D. Modern approach to fashion
E. General information about fashion in Europe.
F. History of clothing in the East.
B. Find suitable words used in the text to match the synonyms below.
1. true; devoted (adj – para. 1)
a)
2. fast; quickly (adv-para. 2)
b)
3. specially made (adj – para. 3)
c)
4. inexpensive (adj – para. 4)
d)
5. a lot of money (n – para. 5)
e)
129
Read. Supp. 10
Level2_Inference
Objective: can make basic inferences from simple information in a short text.
Practice 1: Read the text below about Mr. Thomas’s morning and answer the questions below.
Mr. Thomas sat on the front porch of his house in a bathrobe and slippers. He put
his head in his hands. He was holding the newspaper. His neighbours were leaving their
houses and getting in their cars. Mr. Thomas sighed. His neighbour Mr. Rosencrantz came
out and saw Mr. Thomas. "Did it again, huh?" said Mr. Rosencrantz. Mr. Thomas said,
"Yep." Mr. Rosencrantz laughed and said, "Here, Mr. Thomas, you can use my cell phone."
Tom thankfully grabbed the cell phone and called his wife. "Honey, I did it again." Mr.
Rosencrantz heard Mrs. Thomas yelling at Mr. Thomas through the phone. "Yes, dear. I'm
so sorry. I'll see you soon," Mr. Thomas returned the phone to Mr. Rosencrantz, sighed
deeply, and ran his fingers through his hair.
1. What did Mr. Thomas do again? ___________________________________________________________
2. How do you know? ______________________________________________________________________
When you read the text, you understand the idea that Mr. Thomas is locked outside his house, and he did this before.
The talk between Mr. Thomas and Mr. Rosencrantz lets us understand this. Mr. Thomas also sat on the front porch
with his hands on his head. We understand that he felt upset and helpless.
Making Inferences adapted from North Star Reading & Writing 1, p. 9
Some answers are easy to find because you can get it directly from the text. Other answers are not easy to find
because you cannot get it directly but indirectly from the text. For example, is the statement below True or False
according the text about Mr. Thomas’s morning?
Mr. Thomas is locked outside his house.
This statement is true. The answer is not directly in the text, but when we read the whole text, we understand- or
infer that Mr. Thomas is outside and his door is locked.
With the help of the evidence, we come to a decision or a logical conclusion. This is called making an inference.
To draw your own conclusions, you need to be able to read between the lines and notice the writer’s choice of words
and phrases. The following are a number of examples to help you become more aware of the writer’s choices:
Words like luckily, unfortunately, obviously, surprisingly, regrettably can tell you about the writer's
feelings about the topic.
a. Luckily, I got home before my parents went to bed (I had lost my keys and I did not want to wake them up.)
b. Unfortunately, I got home before my parents went to bed (They were angry with me because I was late)
Words like certainly, obviously, naturally, probably, likely and unlikely can indicate the level of certainty.
a. The number of traffic accidents will certainly decrease with new laws. (I am sure they will!)
b) It is unlikely that the number of traffic accidents will decrease with new laws. (I don't think they ever will!)
Words like just, only, even, almost and about added to comment on objective facts can change the
message completely.
a. It was a difficult exam. Only 50% of the students passed (Usually a greater percent passes)
b. It was an easy exam. About 50% of the students passed (Usually a greater percent fails)
Words with stronger or additional meaning instead of neutral ones can add value to the ideas.
a. It was a good trip. (There were no problems.)
b. It was a fantastic trip. (I enjoyed myself so much, I'll never forget it.)
c. Her mother was a fine lady with a kind heart. (I adored her!)
d. Her mother was a helpful person (She was all right.)
e. Prime Minister's speech was interesting. (But there was nothing extraordinary.)
f. The Prime Minister's speech was provocative. (It was really stimulating and started a nation-wide discussion.)
130
Practice 2: Match the statements about Picasso to an inference.
1. _____ Picasso went to Spain. He liked the art here. He began to paint faces differently. He painted faces as masks.
2. _____ Often paintings become popular because the painter did something new.
3. _____ In the early 1900s, Picasso painted a portrait to explore the shapes of objects.
4. _____ In the past, artists painted portraits to appear real.
a. Doing something new is important in art.
b. To explore something is to think about it and try something out.
c. In Spain, Picasso saw masks.
d. Artists don’t always follow other artists from the past.
Practice 3: Read the following short text and choose the ideas that you think are possible inferences/
conclusions.
1. From a gang member and murderer to the best-selling author of books: prison has changed Stanley Williams a lot.
a. Stanley Williams went to prison because he was a criminal.
b. He started writing books before he went to prison.
c. He likes being in prison
d. All gang members and murderers can be good writers.
e. He writes about his life in his books.
f. His books are interesting.
2. Child guerrillas of the African country Sierra Leone learn to use guns at the age of 7 or 8 and know everything about
the war. It is a pity that they have to see people killing each other and perhaps they have to kill, too.
a. There is a war in Sierra Leone.
b. It is good for children to learn about the war.
c. Children have to do military service in Sierra Leone.
d. The guerrillas in Sierra Leone use children in the war.
e. They teach children how to use guns at schools in Sierra Leone.
f. It is wrong to make children fight.
g. Children in Sierra Leone kill because they want to.
Practice 4: Write down your own inference with evidence for the following paragraph.
Sample: Jack woke up early on Sunday morning and looked outside the window. It was a warm and sunny day. His
dad called Jack and said, ‘It is a perfect day. Let`s go out and don't forget to bring your bat and ball”. Jack picked up
his bat and ball and the two left the house.
Observations/Evidences
Inferences
The weather is suitable for outdoor activities.
They take a bat and a ball with them.
They will play baseball in the garden or in a park.
Jack’s father doesn’t work on Sundays.
Write down your own inference with evidence for the following paragraph.
As you walk into your classroom early on Tuesday morning, you are immediately greeted by the smell of fresh
hazelnut coffee. Your teacher, who looks slightly more tired than usual, has a large light-brown stain on his new white
shirt. Instead of preparing for the morning's lesson, he is sitting by his desk and rubbing the floor.
Observations/Evidences
Inferences
131
TEXT 1
THROUGH A MICROSCOPE
Botany was the only course I had difficulty with at university. All botany students had to spend several hours a week in
a laboratory looking through a microscope at plant cells, and I could never see through a microscope. This used to
annoy my instructor greatly. He would wander around the laboratory pleased with all the students drawing the flower
cell until he came to me. "I can't see anything." I would say. He would start explaining that anybody could see through
a microscope, and then he would always end up shouting that I could also see through a microscope if I wanted to. "It
takes away from the beauty of flowers," I used to tell him. "We are not interested in beauty here." he would say, "We
are interested only in the mechanics of flars." He would not say flowers. "I can't see anything." I would tell him. "Try it
just once again," he would say, and I would put my eye to the microscope and see a lot of milk instead of a plant cell.
This, he said, was because I could not adjust the microscope properly, so he would adjust it for me, or rather, for
himself and I would try again and see milk. After all these years, whenever I am working on a new drawing, I still
remember him looking at me with all the anger in his eyes.
Exercise 1: Read the text above and choose the statements that are possible inferences according to text.
1. Overall, the writer was a successful student at university.
2. The instructor was not actually a very patient and understanding person.
3. There was a lack of communication between the writer and the instructor.
4. The writer was a troublesome student.
5. The instructor had a different understanding of beauty.
6. Seeing through a microscope is a matter of adjusting it.
TEXT 2:
Exercise 1: Read the text carefully and tick the statements that can be inferred
I recently fantasized about one of my fondest childhood memories: the wonderful smells of the mouth-watering
dishes my mother used to make. The memories of sweet-smelling cinnamon buns in the morning, a hot lunch of real
cream of tomato soup and a grilled cheese sandwich, and the tasty dinner of beef with creamy mashed potatoes and
homemade chocolate cake all made me feel hungry. Wouldn't my family love all of this? Wouldn't it be fun to give them
a taste of yesterday? Imagine my disappointment when I realized the number of fat grams in each of these delicious,
delightful memories of my childhood! What have we become?
_____ 1. Cooking habits have changed over the years.
_____ 2. Homemade chocolate cake was one of the author's favorite foods.
_____ 3. The author's mother didn't like to cook.
_____ 4. The author most probably has children.
_____ 5. The author is now aware that his/her mother's food was unhealthy.
TEXT 3:
Exercise 1: Read the passage and circle the correct choice.
Albert Einstein, a name connected with high intelligence, and one of the greatest thinkers of all time, had a rather
terrific brain. Einstein transformed our understanding of the physical universe and helped create a foundation for the
nuclear age. It was his findings, especially his theory of relativity (E-mc) that made it ready for the dramatic power
released in atomic explosions. Despite his great talent, he was a modest man. He could have developed a "big head"
and considered himself to be better than other less intelligent people. What gave this modest man his extraordinary
thinking and analytical ability? Well, anatomical studies have shown that he did, indeed, possess a "big brain," one
larger than the brain of an average person.
Recent research into the brains of about 100 normal people, along with that of Einstein, used measurements of
various parts of the brains for comparative analysis. Although his brain was similar to the other brains in many ways,
including weight, it was different in one of the critical measurements. Surprisingly, Einstein's brain differed dramatically
in size: it was 15 % wider than the other brains.
The researchers were quick to explain that although the size of Einstein's brain certainly contributed to his exceptional
genius, there are many other factors in the development of intelligence, such as genetics and being brought up in a
motivating environment.
1. The passage implies that ___________.
a) we respect and admire Einstein's genius for years
132
b) Einstein considered himself to be better than other people
c) the size of your head is definitely important in intelligence
2. From the passage, we can conclude that ___________.
a) parents should be concerned about the size of their child's head
b) genetics is not a factor in intelligence
c) many factors, other than brain size, contribute to intelligence
3. The research study of brain size shows that ___________.
a) normal people do not have wide brains
b) Einstein's brain was unusual
c) Einstein's brain differ in many ways from the normal brain
4. The passage implies that parents should ___________.
a) consult with a genetic specialist before having children
b) create a positive learning environment for their children
c) do more research on what contributes to intelligence
133
TEXT 4
Subject: Help! I'm Scared!
Dear Dr. Perry,
Have a problem, and I hope you can help me. Last month when I went up into the attic of my house, a big spider fell
into my hair. I started to panic! I ran from the attic, down into the house, and out the door. My heart was racing, and I
felt sick
Now, I am afraid all the time. In the morning I look for spiders in my shoes. At night I can't sleep because a spider
may fall in my hair. I avoid going to the attic because of spiders. Also, I feel alone. I feel embarrassed because my
family laughs at me. My family says, "Relax! Spiders are small" But I never feel relaxed. I'm always worried.
Can you help? I need some advice.
Ann
Dear Ann,
I understand. Don't worry. A lot of people are afraid of spiders, so fearing spiders is normal. Spiders have many long
legs, and people don't like that. Also, their webs look dirty.
But most spiders are not dangerous, so they cannot hurt you.
But for some people, a normal fear becomes a phobia. When you have a phobia, you cannot have a normal life. You
can't do normal things. Other people may laugh at you, but they don't understand your fear. Don't be embarrassed.
Why do we have phobias? Sometimes they start with a bad experience.
Sometimes we learn a fear from our parents. Sometimes there is no reason:
You might have arachnophobia, the fear of spiders. When you see a spider you might have a panic attack. A
panic-attack is when your heart beats very fast, or you may feel sick. It might also be difficult for you to think.
You can get help for arachnophobia. Here is some advice:
● Read about spiders, so you will be less afraid.
● Look at photos of spiders, both live and dead ones. After some time, you will feel better.
● Try to relax when you see a spider. Think about something nice.
● Talk about your fear with family, friends, or a doctor.
Good luck to you, Ann!
Dr. Perry
Exercise 1: Read each statement. Circle the correct answer.
1. In paragraph 4, Dr. Perry writes, "Don't worry." What does Dr. Perry probably mean?
a. "Your fear is silly"
b. "Being afraid is ok."
c. "Spiders cannot hurt you."
2. In paragraph 5, Dr. Perry writes, "Don't be embarrassed." What does Dr. Perry probably mean?
a. "Laughing is fun."
b. "People will not laugh."
c. "Your fear is not funny."
3. In paragraph 8, Dr. Perry writes, "Read about spiders, so you will be less afraid." What does Dr. Perry probably
mean?
a. "Books help you feel better"
b. "You will understand spiders." c. "You can learn how to kill spiders."
134
Read. Supp. 11
Level2_Note-taking
Objective: can select and /or note information from texts
Have you ever taken notes while reading a passage, an article or a textbook? Why do you take notes? Think about
the reasons for making notes and write them down to complete the mind map below.
Note taking is a study skill which helps you to organize, record, and remember important information you
have read. During your academic life, you are expected to read a lot of materials, such as lecture notes,
formal academic texts, journals, textbooks, etc. Taking good notes while reading is an important part of
academic success as most courses require significant reading for different purposes, such as getting prepared
for the class, to write a paper or just to study for an exam.
Good notes can take different forms and may vary from person to person—or even from text to text. The
following are a few useful techniques for effective note taking:
Before you start reading:
- survey the text and the visual information to see what you will read
- look through the paragraphs to get a general idea about the text
To find and mark relevant information:
- ask yourself what information you need.
- read and underline /highlight relevant information in the text. For example; use different colors to
represent different types of information.
- rewrite the information as notes
To organize your notes:
- use bullet points, headings and numbering
To be concise:
- do not write full sentences. Keep content word (nouns, adjectives, adverbs and verbs), but leave out
words that are not central to understanding/meaning:
articles (a, an, the)
prepositions (in, at, on)
-
verb ‘to be’
auxiliary verbs (have, do)
use simple abbreviations and symbols
e.g.
b/c
&
%
=
(for example)
(because)
(leads to)
(and)
(percent)
(is / means)
∵
∴
>
<
esp.
w/
(because)
(therefore)
(greater than)
(less than)
(especially)
(with)
Depending on your preference, you may take notes in the form of tables, charts, outlines or summaries.
Here are a few note-taking strategies to try:
135
Practice: Label the following strategies (mind map, outline, summary, marking/note-taking, student notes)
136
TEXT 1: Polite Behavior in Four Countries
The first meeting with a new person, especially in business, can be very important. When you are in another country,
do you know how to greet someone? How important is eye contact, looking into the other person's eyes while you
speak? How important is personal distance, the space between you and the other person? Here are some tips on
polite behavior in four countries.
Australia
●
●
●
●
●
People shake hands when greeting each other.
It is the custom to shake hands at the beginning and end of a meeting.
It is polite for visitors to introduce themselves in social situations.
When you speak to an Australian, keep an arm's length distance from the person. Maintaining personal distance is
important in this culture.
Make eye contact with an Australian when having a conversation.
Brazil
●
●
●
●
Brazilians usually stand very close to each other.
Brazilians usually greet each other with long handshakes and eye contact; close friends often hug.
Hugging and backslapping are common among Brazilians, but they usually do not do this with foreigners.
Brazilians often touch each other's arms, hands, or shoulders during a conversation.
South Korea
●
●
●
●
●
●
In South Korea, don't introduce yourself, wait for someone to introduce you to other people.
South Korean men often greet each other with slight bow and sometimes also with a handshake.
Bow at the beginning and end of a meeting.
Some Koreans believe that it's impolite to maintain eye contact with a person who has high status.
In formal situations, Koreans usually do not touch each other's arms or backs during conversations.
Touching is impolite with older people, people of the opposite sex, or people who are not good friends or family.
Turkey
●
●
●
When you meet someone in Turkey, shake hands firmly.
Friends and family often greet each other with either one or two kisses on the cheek.
When you enter a room, if someone does not greet you first, greet the oldest person or the person with the highest
status first. In social situations, greet the person closest to you, then move around the room or table
counter-clockwise.
personal distance in
Australia
hugging in Brazil
bowing in south Korea
greeting in Turkey
A. Fill in the chart with the behavior rules from the four cultures discussed in the text above. Not every culture
has rules for every behavior.
Cultures
Greetings
Maintaining
personal distance
Introductions
Touching
1. Australian
2. Brazilian
3. South Korean
4. Turkish
137
B. Use the Venn diagram below to compare business behavior in two cultures. Choose two cultures from the
text or two other cultures that you know. Write the similarities and differences.
TEXT 2: POTATO
A. Look through the text and find the paragraph which gives you information about the potato plant. Then
read the paragraph and label the parts of the potato plant.
It is thought that potatoes came from the Andes Mountains of Peru, and the Incas planted them thousands of years
ago. Peruvians, the people of Peru, were very proud of their potatoes. They decorated their houses with potato
figures. The Quechua Indians also live in this region now, and they have more than 1,000 different names for
potatoes. The word potato comes from the Caribbean word batata. It meant sweet potato.
Potatoes are a necessary part of a healthy diet because they are nutritious. Potatoes are high in Vitamin
C and potassium. Just one medium potato has 45% of the Vitamin C and 21% of the potassium our bodies need every
day for good health. One medium potato has almost three times more potassium than one medium orange. Potatoes
are also a good source of fiber. Just one serving of potatoes has 12% of the fiber we need every day. Potato skin also
has nutrients. It contains fiber, potassium, iron, zinc, phosphorus and B vitamins. That's why it's best to eat potatoes
with their skins.
Potato plants grow quickly in about 20 days, but it takes longer for the potatoes, 100 to 140 days, to develop under the
ground. The plants do not like very cold or very hot temperatures, but today you can find potatoes any time because
people grow them all over the world. Potato plants have flowers, leaves, stems, tubers and roots. The flower of the
potato plant is perfect. It contains both male and female flower parts. The color of the flower depends on the variety or
138
type of potato. It can be white, lilac, purple or violet. The stem is the central part of a plant, above the ground. Potato
plants have a different stem system. Their stem system is both aboveground and underground. Leaves and flowers
grow from the part of the stem above the ground. The underground stem system, on the other hand, has tubers and
roots. We eat the tubers of the plant and call them potatoes.
B. Read the text and complete the missing parts of the outline with your own notes.
POTATO
history
●
●
●
●
nutrition
●
●
from Peru, Incas 1000s of yrs. ago, plant p
p figures in houses
today Quechua Indians: >1000 names
p from batata: Caribbean
healthy, nutritious
1 medium p: 45% 1) ___________________________________________
21% 2) ___________________________________________
(3x1 medium orange)
3) __________________________________________fiber
●
4)
_______________________
●
●
p. plant
●
●
parts
flower
nutrients e.g. 5) ____________________
eat with skin
grow: 20 days; p: 6) ___________________________________________
not v. hot or cold temp
perfect: both 7) ____________________ parts
colours: 8) ________________________________________
depends on 9) ________________________________________
●
●
leaves
stem
●
●
●
tubers
roots
●
●
above & underground stem system
above: flowers & leaves
under: tubers & roots
in stem system
eat tubers
139
TEXT 3
Read the text on your own. Certain words signal that the writer is presenting a new idea. Some examples of
these words are first, first of all, second, finally, another kind/way, and a third type. Find and underline these
words in the text.
What Makes a Good Ad?
No one is sure how many advertisements, or ads, we see every day. However, some people think that we see about
250 ads each day. What do you think? Think about the ads that you see on TV, in magazines, on buildings, on the net,
and on phone apps. One study showed that Internet users see more than 1,700 online ads each month. We don't
really notice all 250 of these daily ads. There are a few reasons for this. One reason is we only notice ads for things
that we are interested in. Another reason comes from scientific research: Researchers say it isn't possible for our
brains to focus on everything we see. And a third reason is that some ads are better than others. So what makes a
good ad?
First of all, a good ad gets people's attention. An ad can't have an influence on people if no one looks at it or watches
it. An advertisement can get people's attention with an exciting photo, surprising facts, or an interesting story.
Second, a good ad reaches its target audience. Advertisers need to know who their target audience is and where it is.
For example, the target audience of an ad for baby food is the parents of young children. Therefore, advertisers
should find out what TV shows these parents watch, what magazines they read, and where they spend their time.
Finally, a good ad is always easy to remember. One way to make an ad easy to remember is to include a great
slogan—a short phrase about a product or service. Another way is to include a fun song. People enjoy repeating
slogans and singing fun songs, and that will help them remember an ad. An ad that gets people's attention, reaches its
target audience, and is easy to remember can really help sell a product or persuade people to use a service.
Complete the chart with the information from the text.
140
TEXT 4
What are the Characteristics of Online Communication?
Everywhere you go, you see people texting, sending emails, and posting thoughts and photos to social networks. Of
course, this kind of online communication isn't the same as in-person communication. There are several important
differences.
When you talk to people face-to-face, you can see them. Their faces and the way they move their bodies can tell you
about their emotions. Imagine that you are having coffee with a friend. Your friend says, "I have something to tell you."
If your friend is smiling, you know the news is good. If your friend looks sad, you know the news is bad. When you
communicate by text message or email, you can't see these clues. You can use emoticons, such as ☺ or ☹, but these
are very informal. You can't use these in more formal communications, such as emails to your professor or your
employer.
You can hear a person's voice when you talk in person. Again, this helps you understand how the other person feels.
Does the person sound angry or is the person making a joke? Does the person sound polite or rude? With online
communication, such as emails and texts, it's easy to misunderstand someone's feelings because you can't hear their
voice.
We usually keep online communication brief and to the point. In other words, people often use text messages, emails,
and social networking posts to communicate short messages. When you talk to someone face-to-face, you are more
likely to talk about several different topics and develop new ideas as you communicate. You can also do an activity
together, such as having lunch or taking a walk.
Do you prefer to communicate online or in person? Communicating online is great for some situations. It's also quick
and you can send a text or email when you want, even when the other person is sleeping. However, in-person
communication allows you to understand a person's emotions. It also lets you build relationships because you can do
social activities while you talk.
Read the text on your own. Complete the chart with the information from the text.
Differences between Online communication and In-person communication
Online communication
In-person communication
TEXT 5
Bullet Trains
Bullet trains are high-speed trains. They are a safe, cheap, and fast way to travel. They travel more than 124 miles
(200 kilometers) per hour. The name bullet comes from their speed and shape. Today, these trains are popular forms
of intercity travel all over the world.
Bullet trains got their start in Japan. The population of this country grew very fast in the 1950s. Japan's trains and
roads became crowded. People needed a new way to get around. Japanese officials hoped a new kind of train would
solve their transportation problems. The government opened the first Shinkansen (the network of high speed trains in
Japan) in Tokyo, in 1964. The Tokaido Shinkansen ran 320 miles (515 kilometers) between the cities of Tokyo and
Osaka and reached 135 miles (217 kilometers) per hour!
Today, the Tokaido Shinkansen is the world's busiest high-speed rail line. It carries 151 million passengers a year. It
transports more passengers than any other high speed line in the world. Between Tokyo and Osaka, the two largest
metropolises in Japan, up to ten trains per hour with sixteen cars each (1,300 seat capacity) run in each direction, with
a minimum headway of three minutes between trains.
With the help of new technology, bullet trains will be much more efficient in the future. This means they will make less
noise and use less energy!
141
Fill in the blanks according to the information given in the text.
1.
Bullet trains are _________________________________________ than traditional trains. (Write three
advantages)
2. The bullet train got its name from its _________________________________________________.
3. Transportation became a problem in Japan in the 1950s because
a) ________________________________. Japan solved this problem by introducing the world's
b) ________________________________ bullet train in c) __________________________________.
4. The Tokaido Shinkansen provided rail service between a) _____________________________ and
b) _______________________________ at a speed of c) ___________________________________.
5. Today, the world's busiest high-speed rail line is a) ___________________________________ because the
number of passengers it carries is b) ______________________________________ a year.
6. A bullet train between Tokyo and Osaka has a) __________________________________, and each one can carry
b) ______________________________ passengers.
7. In the future, bullet trains will probably produce a) ___________________________________ and
b) ___________________________________________________.
TEXT 6
Michael Jackson
The following are the main events in Michael Jackson's life, but they are not in the correct order. Read and
order them. Put the letters on the lines.
1. _________ 2. _________ 3. _________ 4. _________ 5. _________ 6. _________ 7. _________
A. Michael began his musical career at the age of 5 as the lead singer of The Jackson 5 family group in 1964. The
Jackson 5 recorded 14 albums.
B. On June 25th, 2009, Michael Jackson suffered a cardiac arrest in his Los Angeles home. They immediately took
him to hospital, but he died later that morning. He was 50 years old at the time of his death.
C. In 1994. Michael married his first wife, Lisa Marie Presley, daughter of Elvis Presley. They divorced in 1996.
D. Michael Jackson was born on the 29th of August, 1958, in Gary, Indiana. He was the 7 th of nine children. His
brothers’ names are Sigmund "Jackie'', Toriano ''Tito", Jermaine, Marlon, and Steven "Randy", and his sisters' names
are Rebbie, Janet and La-Toya.
E. In 1983, Michael performed his famous dance move called the Moonwalk for the first time. "Bad", "Dangerous
History", "Invincible" and "One more Chance" are some of Michael's other successful solo albums. He toured the
world and took his concerts to many countries.
F. Later that same year, Michael married his second wife, nurse Debbie Rowe. Their first child, Prince Michael Joseph
Jackson, was born in 1997. Their daughter, Paris Michael Katherine Jackson, was born on April 3, 1998. A year after
that, Michael and Debbie divorced.
G. In 1977, Michael made his first film, starring in the musical The Wiz. His first solo album was Off the Wall. It was a
big success around the world. Jackson's 1982 album Thriller was the world's best-selling album of all time.
142
Read the text again, and fill in the blanks according to the information given in the text.
a. Michael Jackson was born in Gary, Indiana, in 1958. He had 1________________________________
Their 2______________________________________________________ and Steven. He also
3
________________________ sisters. His 4______________________________________________ started when
5
_____________________________________ old. The Jackson 5 was a 6___________
_____________________
8
and
Michael
was
________________
7
of
the
group.
They
made
_______________________________________.
b. Michael 9_______________________ film in 1977. His first solo album was very successful 10____
_______________ . He made the best-selling album of all time, Thriller 11_______________________. "Bad" and
"Dangerous" are just two of Michael's other successful 12___________________________.
c. Lisa Marie Presley was Michael's 13__________________________________. She was 14_______
________________ of Elvis Presley. Debbie Rowe, his second wife 15___________________________
The couple had 16______________________________, a boy and a girl. Michael and Debbie
17
________________________ a year after
18
__________________ birth.
On June 25th, 2009, Michael Jackson
died in ___________________________ in Los Angeles because
19
20
_________________________________________________.
143
TEXT 7
Rock of Legends
Site: Uluru-Kata Tjuta National Park (Ayers Rock)
Uluru is close to very center of Australia about 450
Location: Northern Territory, Australia
km (280 miles) by road from the closest town.
Category: Natural and Cultural
Status: World Heritage Site since 1987
Uluru changes color at different times of the day: it can be
grey, brown, red, orange, or yellow- and sometimes
purple, when it rains.
For scientists, it's the biggest rock in the world. For
tourists, it's a center for outdoor adventure. For
Australians, it's a symbol of national identity. For
Aboriginal people, it's a traditional holy place. For
everyone who comes to this special place, Uluru has a
different meaning.
From far away, Uluru looks like a mountain, but it's really
one big rock in the middle of a desert, 348 meters (1.142
feet) tall. An explorer named William Gosse made the first
map of the area in 1873. He named it Ayers Rock for the
prime minister of Australia. The first tourists started
arriving in the mid-1930s, and in 1958, the land became a
national park.
Uluru is one of the few places in the world that is both a
Natural and a Cultural World Heritage Site. There are
Aboriginal rock paintings on its sides, and many Aboriginal
stories about its history and origin. In 1985, the
government gave the land back to the Anangu Aborigines,
and changed the name back to the Aboriginal word Uluru,
meaning "Great Pebble" (or "Great Stone").
At Home in the Desert
The land around Uluru is home to the Anangu
Aboriginal people. The Anangu have lived in the
Australian desert for more than 20,000 years, but
today there are only about 4,000 left. In the past, they
lived by catching animals and finding desert plants.
Now they live in small villages, but they still speak
their traditional language, called Pitjantjatjara. About
20% of them can speak English.
Should Visitors Climb Uluru?
The Anangu never walk on Uluru, because for them,
it is a holy place. They ask visitors not to climb on the
rock. But every year, more than 500,000 tourists
come to Uluru, and about a third of them climb to the
top. Some people believe there should be a law
against climbing the rock. But tourists spend $75
million there every year, so there is no simple answer
to the problem.
144
Read the text and complete the notes below.
ULURU: Field Notes
Site: Uluru-Kata Tjuta National Park
Location: ____________________ , Australia
Information:
- Uluru is not a mountain, but a big ___________. It's a symbol of ____________________ for Australians.
- The land became a national park in ___________. It's both a(n) ___________ and a(n) ___________
heritage site.
-The explorer William Gosse gave it the name ____________________
- The land was returned to the Aborigines in _________________. The Aborigine word Uluru means
' _____________________' or 'Great Stone.'
- The Anangu Aborigines have lived in the desert around Uluru for over ____________ years. There are
only ________________ of them living there right now.
- The Anangu never walk on Uluru as it is a ___________________ for them.
- More than ____________________tourists visit Uluru every year.
ONLINE PRACTICE
Work with a partner. Decide on three athletes that you are both interested in learning about.
Use Google or another major search engine to find sites with the information you want. Fill in the table below
with your notes.
Athlete
Nationality
Date Of Birth
Sport
Training
Techniques
1.
2.
3.
Source: Well Read 2, p. 78
145
Read. Supp. 16
Reading Revision Material B1 (LEVEL 2)
TEXT 1
A. Preview the timeline and then answer the questions.
1. What is the title of the timeline? _________________________________________________________________
2. What is the first date in the timeline? _____________________________________________________________
3. What is the last date in the timeline? ______________________________________________________________
4. What are some of the boldfaced words and expressions? List five of them. ________________________________
5. What is the timeline about?
a. the invention of the dishwasher
b. food inventions in the last 100 years
c. recent food invention
A Timeline of Food Inventions
This timeline shows some food inventions in the last 100 years.
1896
1889
Ice-Cream Cone: New Yorker Italo
Dishwasher: Josephine Cochran
Marchiony invents the first ice-cream
invents the first dishwashing machine.
cone. The United States Patent Office
1900
You can find dishwaters in many homes
gives Marchiony a patent for it in
today.
December 1903.
1924
Frozen Food: Clarence Birdseye starts
a fish-freezing business. Birdseye lived
in Labrador, in northern Canada. There,
he watched Eskimos freeze animals for
food. This gave him the idea for his
invention.
with seed sizes.
1949
Seedless Watermelon:
Warren Barham, a scientist,
grows watermelons with no seeds
after years of experimentation
1994
Flavr Savr Tomatoes: Calgene, a
biotechnology company, creates a
new kind of tomato. It is extra firm
and never loses its shape. It stays
firm all the way to the supermarket.
1938
Canned Soft Drinks: The first canned soft
drink appears in 1938. The continental Can
Company invented the can, which leaked in
the beginning. It took many years to improve.
1950
2000
1946
Microwave Oven: Dr. Percy
Spencer, an engineer, discovers
microwave energy. While testing
a special tube, Spencer realized
that the chocolate in this pocket melted. This tube
is an important part of the microwave oven today.
2002
Tear-free Onions: Shinsuke Imai
uses genetic modification to create
a new kind of onion. It does not
make you cry when you cut it.
B. Scan the timeline and answer the questions.
1. Who invented the ice-cream cone?
________________________________________________________________
2. Which invention was an accident? ________________________________________________________________
3. Who invented the seedless watermelon? ___________________________________________________________
4. Which invention did not work at first? _____________________________________________________________
5. Which invention came from someone else’s idea? ____________________________________________________
146
TEXT 2
A. Read the text about the World’s Oldest Person and choose the best answer.
The text is about someone who ________.
a. was the world’s oldest person. b. will be the world’s oldest person. c. may have been the world’s oldest person.
World's Oldest Person Turns 128 by Thomson Fontaine
Dominicans yesterday celebrated the birthday of the world’s oldest living person Elizabeth (Ma Pampo) Israel who
turned 128.
Unfortunately, the Guinness Book of World Records has not officially recognized Ma Pampo since they are still
checking the facts. A certificate has been issued by the Roman Catholic Church with her birth date stated as January
27, 1875, but since it is not an official record, it cannot be used to confirm the claim.
The claim was further thrown into doubt when it was learned that at some point in her life she was called Minetta
George. Guinness officials have said that it is important to clarify these issues before Ma Pampo can be given the title
of the oldest person on earth.
Born in Portsmouth, Dominica, and the daughter of slaves, she started working on a plantation at the age of 25 and
retired 79 years later. Ma Pampo says the reason for her long life is her diet - including lots of dumplings (cooked food
made from flour and water) and bush tea. She has survived her husband and two children.
Dominica’s largely untouched and unspoilt environment, which is still unpolluted, has been given as the main reason
for longevity on the Island.
Editor's Note Since the publication of this article in January 2003 Ma Pampo died in October of that year without ever
being recognised as the World's Oldest Person by the Guinness Book of World Records. Unfortunately, her death
came before the scientific community could confirm her age.
B. Read the text again and choose the best answer.
1. Who says Ma Pampo is the oldest person on earth?
a. The Church.
b. People in her country.
c. The Guinness Book of Records.
2. What is the position of the Guinness Book of Records?
a. They refuse to give Ma Pampo the title.
b. They want to check the facts.
c. They will give Ma Pampo the title.
3. What is Ma Pampo’s explanation for her long life?
a. She worked hard all her life.
b. She ate lots of cooked food.
c. She ate the right kind of food.
4. Ma Pampo’s husband is ________.
a. still alive
b. younger than her
c. dead
5. Why do people in Dominica live a long time? Because ________.
a. of the clean atmosphere
b. the country has a small population
c. the people live in a happy society
147
TEXT 3
The story of the Aral Sea
A message from Life co-author Helen Stephenson
I remember reading about the Aral Sea a long time ago. I think it was one of the first environmental stories that had an
impact on me. Since I first read about it, there have been twists and turns in the story, which these three short news
items from the National Geographic news page explain.
April 2010
One Sunday afternoon in Kazakhstan last August, three dozen fishermen met near the shore of the North Aral Sea.
They brought food to eat and they had races and throwing contests. Afterwards, they relaxed telling stories and
singing songs about the Aral Sea and fishing and how much they loved both of these things. For many years before
this, there had been no reason to celebrate. The Aral Sea in Central Asia, once the fourth largest lake in the world,
had shrunk because of irrigation and drought. Then in 2005, the Kazakh government and the World Bank constructed
a dam that separated the northern and southern parts of the sea, allowing the northern part of the Aral Sea to start to
recover. There are fish in the water again and for the past four years, fishermen have come here to celebrate. Philip
Micklin is a scientist who has been studying the sea since the 1980s. ‘Nature can come back.’ he says.
October 2014
Satellite images released this week show that the eastern part of the Aral Sea is completely dry. ‘It is likely the first
time it has completely dried up in 600 years,’ said expert Philip Micklin. The Aral Sea once covered 67,300 square
kilometres. It’s actually a freshwater lake, not a saltwater sea, since two of Central Asia's biggest rivers, the Amu
Darya and the Syr Darya, flow into it. The Aral Sea used to be a busy place. It provided work for 40,000 people and
supplied the Soviet Union with a sixth of its fish. As the lake dried up, it separated into several small lakes which
together were only a tenth of the lake’s original size. The eastern part nearly dried up in 2009, but it recovered in 2010
after substantial rainfall. Now, it’s completely dry.
June 2015
Yusup Kamalov, a scientist from Uzbekistan, is my guide. We’re standing looking at a vast desert. Except that it’s not
like any other desert – there are abandoned fishing boats lying on the sand. Fifty years ago, the southern shore of the
Aral Sea was right where we stand. Now it is 80 kilometres away to the northwest and we set off to drive to the water’s
edge. On the way, we pass oil and natural gas rigs standing on the sand. ‘Each year a few more are put up,’ says
Kamalov. ‘Can you imagine,’ he says, ‘that 40 years ago the water was 30 metres deep right here?’ Eventually, we see
a silver line sparkling on the horizon. We reach the water and I try to swim – but the water is so salty I just float on the
surface. And with 110 grams of salt per litre of water (compared to about 35 grams in the world’s oceans), no fish are
able to survive here. ‘This is what the end of the world looks like,’ says Kamalov.
A. Read the article and choose the correct option.
1. What happened to the Aral Sea over the period of the news stories?
a. It dried up more.
b. It filled up more.
c. The water level didn’t change.
2. Which of these things are NOT mentioned as having an effect on the Aral Sea water level?
a fishing
b. irrigation
c. the dam
3. How many areas of the Aral Sea are mentioned?
a. two
b. three
c. four
4. Which term describes the first news story?
a. negative
b. optimistic
c. pessimistic
5. According to the first news story, what happened after the building of the dam?
a. The Aral Sea returned to its former size.
b. There was more water available for irrigation.
c. There were more fish in the northern part of the Aral Sea.
6. According to the second news story, ________.
a. the Aral Sea has shrunk into ten small lakes.
b. the eastern part of the Aral Sea has never been dry before.
c. the water in the Aral Sea comes from rivers.
7. According to the second news story, ________.
a. about 40,000 fishermen used to fish in the Aral Sea.
b. most of the fish people in the Soviet Union ate came from the Aral Sea.
c. the Aral Sea used to provide food and jobs.
8. According to the third news story, the southern Aral Sea now produces ________ instead of fish.
a. oil
b. salt
c. sand
9. According to the information in the third news story, what can you assume is true?
a. It’s too dangerous to swim in the Aral Sea.
b. Only saltwater fish live in the Aral Sea.
c. The Aral Sea is saltier than the Pacific Ocean.
10. According to the third news story, what is Kamalov’s view of the Aral Sea’s future?
a. negative
b. neutral
c. positive
148
TEXT 4
A. Read the text below and choose the best answer.
The text was probably written to ________.
a. to give the reader more information about GM
b. to give the scientists’ view of GM
c. to persuade the reader to avoid GM food
GENETICALLY MODIFIED FOOD FAQs
Q: What is genetically modified food?
A: GM means scientists have changed the genetic structure of food in order to make it look nice, to help it fight
disease and to give it a longer life.
Q: How is GM food made?
A: GM food is made by taking genes (DNA) from one organism and putting it into another. For example, natural
potatoes are mixed with chicken genes or tomatoes are mixed with fish genes.
Q: So what’s the problem with GM?
A: Many people feel we have not done enough research into GM; they say we need to know more because the food
chain could be in danger. If we make a mistake, it could be bad for future generations.
Q: What can we as consumers do about GM?
A: If you grow your own food in your own garden, you are very lucky. But if, like most people, you buy your food in a
supermarket, you should check the label. About 50% of the food we buy has soya in it. A lot of the soya in food is
genetically modified. The problem is that the label does not always tell you exactly what the food contains.
Q: Do people want GM food?
A: 70% of people, when asked, usually say they do not want GM food. Why? Because they say no-one knows what
the long-term effects of GM will be. We are creating a Frankenstein that we will not be able to control.
B. Read the text again and choose the best answer.
1. Why do scientists change the genetic structure of food?
a. to make it taste more natural
b. to make it taste nice
c. to make it last longer
2. GM food is made by ________.
a. mixing different vegetables
b. mixing genes and natural products
c. mixing fish and tomatoes
3. What is one disadvantage of GM products?
a. They have damaged the food chain.
b. They can cause disease.
c. We don’t know enough about them.
C. Read the text again and decide if the following statements are true (T) or false (F) or if there is no
information (NI).
True
1. Diseases do not affect GM food.
2. We need to do more research into GM food.
3. We do not yet know all the dangers of GM food.
4. The label on supermarket products is not easy to read.
5. Soya is often genetically modified.
Fals
e
No Information
TEXT 5
A. Think about answers to the following questions.
1. Do you think you have a good memory? Why, or why not?
2. What do you do when you need to remember something important?
3. How do you usually study for a test?
B. Read the third paragraph of the article. Write the three kinds of memory described.
1. ______________________________________.
2. ______________________________________.
3. ______________________________________.
149
C. Decide which diagram below is best for organizing the information above.
For Better Grades Use Your Brain!
If you're like most students, you probably started this new
academic year with a resolution to study harder. Now,
science can help you keep your resolution. Recent
discoveries in brain research point to better ways to learn.
How does the brain save new information? Think of the
last time someone told you their phone number. Could you remember that number five minutes later? Probably not!
That's because it was in your short-term memory.
Our memory actually has three components. Sensory memory takes in information from our five senses and is stored
for just a few seconds while our brain processes it. Short-term memory works like a "holding _ area for new
information” that's where you keep the phone number while you dial it. But if you can put the phone number into
long-term memory, you'll remember that same phone number next week. This part of your memory holds everything
from irregular verbs to the names of all your cousins.
When you study, you transfer new information into long-term memory. Every time we learn something new, the
structure of the brain actually changes as we build new connections to information that we already know. When there
are more connections to the new information, it's easier to find it again.
Brain researchers have discovered four key points for effective study:
a. Make an effort. The brain remembers better when we are interested in the subject, already know a little about it
and know we will need the information in the future.
b. Find the most important information and organize it. Your brain can process only a limited amount of information at
one time, so don't try to remember every detail. When studying a textbook, look for titles, headings, and illustrations to
show you the main ideas.
c. Make the new brain connections stronger. One technique is to recite the ideas out loud in your own words. This is
the most powerful way to transfer information from short-term to long-term memory. Another method is drawing a
picture of the information to activate the visual part of the brain.
d. Give the new material time to soak in-- your brain has to build new physical connections. For this reason, it's better
to study for several short sessions than one long one. And cramming the night before a big test doesn't help.
By understanding how the brain works, and following these four tips, you can make this your most successful
academic year ever.
D. Read the entire passage carefully. Then answer the questions.
1. Which topic is NOT discussed in the text?
a. short and long-term memory
b. how to study for tests better
c. why some people are very smart
2. According to the text, what does drawing a picture do?
a. It puts information into short-term memory.
b. It shows people you are trying to learn.
c. It makes the connections in the brain stronger.
3. Which sentence is most likely to be true?
a. Reciting ideas out loud is better than drawing them.
b. It's better to have information in your long-term memory when doing a test.
c. Brain researchers understand short-term memory best.
150
E. Read the following sentences. Decide if they are true (T) or false (F).
T/F
T/F
T/F
T/F
T/F
1. When we learn new facts, we save them in our long-term memory.
2. You remember better if you start studying a long time before a test.
3. Our brains change physically when we learn new information.
4. Saying new information out loud is a good way to memorise it.
5. You have to memorize every small detail to learn a subject.
F. Complete the following sentences with the boldfaced words in the text.
1. Fresh fruit and vegetables are essential ___________ of a healthy diet.
2. Her ___________ relationship with Josh was still very much alive in his mind, even though it had never been
particularly romantic.
3. I got my money through an electronic ___________ into my account.
4. Another necessary step involves helping to educate those who are less interested and less likely to ___________
to educate themselves.
5. The ___________ of proteins enables scientists to understand the function they perform.
6. One ___________ for remembering new English words is writing them in a notebook.
7. ___________ writing is a formal style of writing used in universities and scholarly publications.
151
TEXT 6
A. Work with a partner. Match the movie titles with the posters. Then answer the questions below.
1.
2.
3
.
____ a. The Wizard of Oz
____ b. Jurassic Park
____ c. The Wolf Man
What do you know about these movies?
B. Answer the questions and discuss your answers with a partner.
1. In The Wolf Man, an actor becomes an animal. How do you think the filmmaker made this happen?
2. In The Wizard of Oz, a watch disappears. How do you think the filmmaker made this happen?
3. In The Jurassic Park, the dinosaurs look real. How do you think the filmmaker made this happen?
C. Read the following sentences from the text. Check ( ✔) the part of speech for the underlined words.
1. Now he's a werewolf, a creature that is half-man, half-wolf.
□ a. noun
□ b. verb
□ c. adjective
2. First, with the camera off, the makeup artists applied a little hair and put on slightly longer teeth.
□ a. noun
□ b. verb
□ c. adjective
3. In one scene, a dinosaur-a Tyrannosaurus rex-attacks a man.
□ a. noun
□ b. adjective
□ c. verb
4. FX specialists studied the work of paleontologists, people who study ancient animals.
□ a. noun
□ b. adjective
□ c. verb
5. They made the models move with hydraulic systems--systems that use the force of water to make machines move.
□ a. noun
□ b. adjective
□ c. verb
D. Before reading, look at the title and headings. Try to guess what the text and each section is about.
How They Did It: Secrets from FX Experts
The theater goes dark, the movie begins, and the audience is waiting expectantly. Anything can happen, especially
when a movie has great special effects. Some moviegoers just relax and enjoy the scenes. Others wonder: “How did
they do that?” How does a person become an animal? How do people disappear in movies? Where do they get those
real-looking dinosaurs? Here are some FX secrets.
Changing
How do FX specialists turn a person into an animal? For example, in The Wolf Man (1941), the main character, played
by Lon Chaney Jr., goes outside at night. There's a full moon. Suddenly, his face begins to change. He grows hair and
sharp teeth. Now he's a werewolf, a creature that is half-man, half-wolf. How did they do it? To create this effect,
makeup artists applied fake hair and teeth to the actor's face. They did this in stages. Here's how: First, with the
camera off, the makeup artists applied a little hair and put on slightly longer teeth. Then the camera filmed the actor.
The camera turned off again, and the artists put on a little more hair and even longer teeth. They repeat this until the
actor's transition to "werewolf" was complete.
Disappearing
In many films, characters and objects suddenly disappear. For example, in The Wizard of Oz (1939), Dorothy throws
water on the Wicked Witch of the West. The witch melts and vanishes in a cloud of steam. Here's how the FX
specialists made this happen: Margaret Hamilton, the witch, was actually standing on a small elevator in this scene. It
was built into the floor of the set. Her clothes were nailed to the floor. They stayed in place as Hamilton went below the
floor on the elevator. Her clothes contained pieces of dry ice (CO2). Water mixed with CO2 makes steam, so the witch
looked like she was disappearing in a cloud.
Fantastic Creatures
Dinosaurs, monsters, and imaginary creatures look real and move realistically in many special effect scenes. A good
example is in Jurassic Park (1993). In one scene, a dinosaur-a Tyrannosaurus rex-attacks a man. To make realistic
dinosaurs for Jurassic Park, FX specialists studied the work of paleontologists, people who study ancient animals.
They learned how dinosaurs really looked and moved. They built models of dinosaurs. They made the models move
with hydraulic systems—systems that use the force of water to make machines move. They also used a remote
control system called telemetry. These two systems were programmed into a computer. The computers rans the
models. This made the dinosaurs' movements seem realistic because they looked the same every time the creatures
moved. Some moviegoers are curious about FX secrets; others are not. Either way, good special effects help
filmmakers tell stories with imagination, and they enable audiences to experience fantasy.
152
E. Answer as many questions as you can without looking at the text. Discuss your answers with a partner.
1. What is the text about?
a. how filmmakers created some famous FX scenes
b. how filmmakers made some famous movies
c. how filmmakers make people change or disappear in movies
2. What is the most important idea in each section of the text? Write your answers in the left column below. Then find
an example in the text for each section.
What is this section about?
What example does the author give?
Section 1:
Section 2:
Section 3:
F. Answer as many questions as you can without looking at the text. Discuss your answers with a partner.
1. What does a werewolf look like? ________________________________________________________
2. In The Wizard of Oz, how does the witch disappear? __________________________________________
3. In The Wizard of Oz, what made the cloud of steam? ________________________________________
4. In Jurassic Park, how did the filmmakers learn about dinosaurs? ________________________________
5. How did the filmmakers use computers in Jurassic Park? _____________________________________
TEXT 7
We Are in Vietnam
A. Answer the following questions.
What do you know about Vietnam? Write a few words about each topic.
a. location ____________________________________________
b. climate ____________________________________________
c. cities
____________________________________________
d. history ____________________________________________
B. Scan the text on the next page and find the dates of the four blog posts.
Post 1: _______
Post 2: _______
Post 3: _______
Post 4: _______
C. Read each blog post quickly to find the following information.
_______________________Post 1: Which city did they go to first?
_______________________Post 2: Where is the market that they visited?
_______________________Post 3: How long did they go hiking for?
_______________________Post 4: What is in Vung Tau?
153
Posted on April 6 by Juliana
Post 4. Hue is a unique city with lots to see. I would love to stay longer, but Tom and I are both ready for
the beach. Tomorrow we'll take the train back to the south, and then we're going to a town called Vung Tau.
It has several beaches and is famous for crafts made out of seashells. Vietnam is an amazing country with
so much variety-- big modern cities, small traditional towns, mountains, jungles, and beaches. Two weeks
here just isn't enough.
Posted on April 4 by Juliana
Post 3. Now we're in the old capital city of Hue. After hiking around the Sapa mountains, it's nice to have
accommodation with electricity and a shower. Our trip to Sapa was long and exhausting. From there, we
took a van to a small village in the mountains and went hiking for three days. The people who live there are
called Hmong. They live a very basic life-no electricity or telephones. They don't have many possessions,
and they are the kindest, friendliest people I've ever met. Everyone smiles and says "hello." Kathy and I
can only speak a few words of Vietnamese, so smiling is the best way of communicating. This afternoon,
we're taking a walking tour in Hue. We're going to visit the Forbidden Purple City, where the emperor lived.
Posted on March 27 by Juliana
Post 2. Ho Chi Minh City is fantastic! The pagodas are fabulous, and the different Buddha statues are
wonderful to look at. We visited a market in Cholon, in the western part of the city, and saw an amazing
range of fruits and vegetables. Everything was so colorful. We took hundreds of photographs. Later today,
we take the train north. We'll stay in Hanoi for two days, then catch a bus to Sapa. Tom can't wait to go
trekking in the mountains.
Posted on March 24 by Juliana
Post 1. Greetings from Vietnam! Tom and I arrived here this afternoon tired but excited. This is our first trip
to Asia and the friendliness of the people is amazing. All the different sights and smells make us eager to
try everything-especially the food. We're looking forward to eating spring rolls and pho for dinner. Our hotel
is cheap and very clean. The owners are friendly and helpful; they seem to like us. They gave us drinks
when we arrived and they have told us about some places that we shouldn't miss. We plan to stay here in
Ho Chi Minh City for a few days and visit temples in the city, then travel to the north.
D. Read the following sentences. Decide if they are true (T) or false (F). Write the number of the post where
you found the answer.
T/F
1. In the past, Vietnam had an emperor.
_____
T/F
2. Many Hmong people speak English.
_____
T/F
3. This is Juliana's second trip to Vietnam.
_____
T/F
4. The market in Cholon has many kinds of vegetables.
_____
T/F
5. The town of Vung Tau is famous for its mountains.
_____
E. Read the following sentences about Juliana's trip. Circle your answers. Then write the words or phrases
from the reading that helped you find the answers.
1. She thinks the market in Cholon is really (great / expensive / noisy).
2. She thinks the Hmong people are very (practical / modern / friendly).
3. She likes hotels that are (expensive / traditional / simple).
4. At the end of her trip, she says she wants to (go home and see her friends / visit more of Vietnam / learn to cook
Vietnamese food).
F. Complete the postcard using the boldfaced words in the text.
154
G. Change the verbs in the advertisement below by using -ed or -ing.
Eco Tours
Tired of going to the same 1bor___ places? 2Interest___ in taking a vacation to an 3excit___ location? Want a
4
relax___ beach holiday, but also want to help save the environment? If you answered "yes" to any of these
questions, then you should book your holiday with Eco Tours! Not only will you experience the best vacation of your
life, but ten percent of the cost of your trip also goes to protecting the local environment. Call us today to talk. Don't be
5
embarrass___ to ask questions, we want you to have the perfect vacation! If you are 6worr___ about the cost, don't
be. Our prices are very reasonable. We know that you'll be 7pleas___ with your EcoTours holiday, so give us a call at
(888) 555-3458, or visit us online to find out more at www.heinle-ecotours.org.
TEXT 8
A. Think about answers to the following questions.
1. A "start-up" is a very small business that is still in the process of growing. Would you like to have a start-up? Why,
or why not? If you answered "yes," what kind of business would you like to have?
2. What are some advantages and disadvantages of being a business owner?
3. What kind of person do you have to be to start and run your own business?
B. Skim the first paragraph of the passage to answer the following question. You will have to infer information
from the passage. Underline the sentences in the first paragraph that helped you find the answer.
Which is considered the most common career path?
a. go to university, then get a job afterwards
b. start a business while in university
c. start a business after university
C. Skim the rest of the passage, then read the sentences below. Circle the sentence that best describes the
secret behind each person's success.
1. Brian Laoruangroch
a. sell products from your own store or website to save money
b. find the simplest way to sell your products, even if you have to pay extra for the service
2. Whitney Williams
a. fall in love with someone who has the same interests as you
b. spending time on your work now will help you be successful later
155
3. Zac Workman
a. start small and let your company grow
b. think big and don't listen to people who tell you "No"
College Start-Ups
Most college students see their time at university as the first step in their career path; afterwards, they will go out into
the working world and get a job. But some students have great ideas that simply cannot wait until graduation day. With
many free resources and technologies available to them, more and more university students are finding ways to start
small businesses while they are still in school. Let's take a look at a few enterprising undergraduates and their
companies.
Green Mobile
As a student at the University of Missouri, Brian Laoruangroch used to sell refurbished cell phones on eBay as a
hobby. But when Brian realized how much money he could make by buying, fixing, and reselling phones, he decided
to create his own website to resell the phones. His parents loaned him money, and he received money from his local
government to found a company called Green Mobile, which now has local retail stores and about 20 employees.
Brian said balancing work and studies was challenging, but he didn't forget to pay attention in class. "I was learning
important business concepts while I was using them in my own business," he said.
Whitney Williams Collection
Whitney Williams has always been creative, and she enjoys making things in her spare time. While in elementary
school, she sold handmade stationery to people in her neighbourhood, and later she expanded her offerings to
include one-of-a-kind purses. When Whitney visited Italy as a student at Texas Christian University, she fell in love
with the handmade jewellery she saw there. It inspired her to start her own jewellery business. Instead of partying with
friends or traveling, Whitney spent most of her weekends for the next two years selling her high-quality jewellery at
small shops and private sales. As a result, the Whitney Williams Collection is now produced and sold around the
world. Whitney hopes to eventually expand her brand to include shoes, clothing, and accessories.
156
Punch
As a competitive swimmer, Zac Workman became very familiar with energy drinks. However, Zac found problems with
most energy drinks. They either tasted bad, used chemicals that weren't healthy, or made the user feel tired again
when its sugary energy was used up. This spurred Zac to do some research when he got to the University of Indiana.
Using an old family recipe for fruit punch, Zac developed an energy drink with natural ingredients, and found a partner
to produce it. His energy drink, called Punch, became popular on his campus. As his business grows, Zac says he's
learning on the job. "People would think it would be difficult to balance class and a business," he said, "but I'm learning
more now than I ever have in the classroom."
D. Choose the correct answers for the following questions.
1. According to the article, how many employees does Green Mobile have?
a. only 1
b. about 20
c. over 30
2. Who did Whitney sell her first products to?
a. her neighbours
b. her classmates
c. her teachers
3. Which best describes Zac's energy drink Punch?
a. a drink made especially for swimmers
b. a fresh sports drink that Zac made every day
c. an all-natural drink that helps athletes
E. Write B (Brian), W (Whitney) or Z (Zac) next to the statements below. More than one answer is possible.
_______ a. turned a hobby into a business
_______ b. developed a product for athletes
_______ c. used family money to start the company
_______ d. says lessons learned in school have helped in managing a business
_______ e. started the company while still in university
_______ f. creates new and original products to sell
_______ g. worked weekends and did not see friends very often when starting the company
F. Study the words boldfaced in the text and then match each word with its definition.
1. ___ resource
a. able to make money from new, interesting ideas
2. ___ enterprising
b. products used for writing letters and notes
3. ___ retail
c. money, skills, or time that is available when needed
4. ___ concept
d. to get bigger
5. ___ stationery
e. the land and buildings of a university or college
6. ___ expand
f. concerning the sale of things to people in stores
7. ___ spur
g. motivate, inspire
8. ___ campus
h. an idea about how something is or should be done
G. Complete the following sentences using words from Exercise F. You might have to change the form of the
word.
1. I'd like to have a(n) __________ business selling personalized notebooks, but I don't have the __________ to start
one!
2. The school decided to__________ the size of its __________ so that more students could attend.
3. Don't be afraid to fail. Sometimes that can __________ you on to great success.
4. Mr. Galison is very __________; his business __________ always seem to earn lots of money for the company.
TEXT 9
A. Complete the table below with the names of any endangered animals and extinct animals you know.
Endangered animals
Extinct animals
B. Scan the factsheet and add any animals mentioned to you list of endangered animals.
C. Read the factsheet and match the main ideas (1-4) to the paragraphs where they are mentioned (A-D).
1. How hunting and overfishing cause animals to become endangered
_____
2. The difference between endangered and extinct animals
_____
3. How governments and normal people can protect animals
_____
4. How humans destroy and pollute animal habitat
_____
157
D. Look at the bold words in the question below. Which paragraph (A-D) of the factsheet should you look at to
find each answer?
1. Who are most responsible for animal extinctions and endangered species?
_____
2. Why does pollution and chopping down trees cause problems for animals?
_____
3. What do people hunt animals for?
_____
4. Which large sea creatures have become endangered because of overfishing?
_____
5. What can individuals do to protect animal species from becoming endangered?
_____
6. What should governments do about hunting and fishing of animals?
_____
7. What should governments invest in to get more animals back into the wild?
_____
Endangered species
A
B
C
D
An endangered species is a group of animals that could soon become extinct. Extinction happens when the
last of the species has died out and there will be no more. Many species are nearly extinct and could
disappear off the face of the earth very soon if we don't do anything to save them. There are many reasons
why species become endangered but most of them are due to humans. However, there are things that we
can do to save endangered species.
Habitat destruction is the main reason why animals become endangered and this happens in two ways.
When humans move into a new area, the animals' habitat - where they live is destroyed and there is nothing
to eat because humans chop down trees and build houses and farms. Animal habitats are also destroyed
because of pollution. Chemicals in rivers and poisons on farms cause the destruction of habitats and animals
can no longer live there.
Endangered species are also the result of hunting and fishing. Animals such as the Arabian oryx have been
hunted to the edge of extinction because of the high price of their meat. Other animals are killed for their fur,
bones or skin, or just for sport. Some seal species are now on the verge of extinction because they are killed
for their fur to make coats. Tigers are shot to make medicine and tea from their bones, and crocodiles are
caught to make bags and shoes. Overfishing means that large sea creatures like whales, tuna and sharks
have all become endangered species, because too many are caught to make things like shark's fin soup.
So what can individuals and governments do to protect animal and plant species from becoming
endangered? We should take care not to pollute natural areas, and farmers or companies who destroy
animal habitats should face a financial penalty. The public can help out by refusing to buy any products that
are made from animals' body parts, such as seal fur coats or crocodile bags. Governments can help, too, by
making it against the law to hunt, fish or trade in endangered species. They can also provide funding for
animal sanctuaries and zoos, to protect animals from extinction by breeding more endangered animals,
which they later release into the wild. If we all cooperate by taking these steps, we will protect our planet so
that our children and their children can enjoy it too.
E. Read the factsheet again and answer the questions (1-7) in exercise D.
F. Read the last paragraph of the factsheet and find the words and phrases that mean the same as the bold
words below.
1. Companies who destroy animal habitats should pay a fine.
_______________
2. Individuals should help to protect animals by choosing not to buy products like fur.
_______________
3. The government can make it illegal to hunt, fish or trade in endangered species.
_______________
4. Governments can pay for animal sanctuaries and zoos.
_______________
5. If we work together by taking this action, we can protect our planet.
_______________
158
TEXT 10
A. Work with a partner. Discuss the questions below.
1. What kinds of museums are there in your country?
2. Should schools take children to museums as part of their education? Why / Why not?
3. How can museums make their exhibitions fun for visitors?
B. Match the words and phrases in the box to their definitions (1-9).
ancient
archaeology
fossil
exhibition
exhibit
field
knight
history
sword
1. the remains of an extinct prehistoric animal or plant
2. the study of human cultural objects and sites from the past
3. an object in a museum
4. the study of plants and animals
5. a display of objects or artworks in a museum or gallery
6. very old
7. area of study
8. a fighting man from the medieval period
9. a log weapon that cuts
_______________
_______________
_______________
_______________
_______________
_______________
_______________
_______________
_______________
C. You are going to read four brochures about museums. Scan each text and match it to one of the museums
(1-4).
1. Warwick Castle
Text ______
2. the Porsche Museum
Text ______
3. the Museum of Science and Industry Chicago
Text ______
4. the Natural History Museum
Text ______
D. Read the text and answer which museum (A-D) would you visit to do the following?
5. listen to a guide on headphones
1. learn ancient fighting techniques
___________
6. produce chemical reactions
2. look at classic automobiles
___________
7. stay overnight
3. participate in science experiments
___________
___________
4. discover extinct animal life
___________
___________
___________
E. Work with a partner and circle the best answer (a-c) to complete each statement below.
1. Sleepovers are offered at the Natural History Museum ______
a. to attract children to the museum.
b. to sell more museum tickets to adults.
c. to allow more time to visit the museum.
2 Companies use the Mediaeval Knight School at Warwick Castle ______
a to learn about sales techniques.
b. to teach staff to fight.
c. to help team-building.
3. Porsche wants to attract children to the museum ______
a. to inspire children to become engineers in the future.
b. to help advertise the cars.
c. to sell model cars in the gift shop.
4 The goal of the Museum of Science and Industry Chicago is ______
a. to educate children about chemistry.
b. to make science funny for children.
c.. to motivate children to have a career in science.
159
Look at rocks and bones, dig up your own fossils, and find out how to
identify prehistoric animals and plants at the Natural History Museum.
Dinosaurs became extinct around 65 million years ago, so how do we
know what they looked like and how they behaved? Bring your pupils to
our Dino Scene Investigation workshops to find out! If you want more
from your dinosaur experience, you can actually spend the night in the
museum. Our Dino Snores programme takes you into the museum and
on your way to your 'bedroom' you solve a puzzle. You can then watch a
film before going to sleep under the Diplodocus dinosaur. Although
museum admission is free, there is a charge for the Dino Snores events,
so see the website for details.
DINO SCENE
INVESTIGATION
TEAM-BUILDING
THE MEDIAEVAL WAY
Bring your staff to our special Mediaeval Knight School for a company
event they won't forget! Our experienced knights will tell you about the
history of Warwick Castle and will take you back to mediaeval times
when the Castle's soldiers were getting ready to fight. Your employees
will improve their business skills, such as leadership and trust, while they
learn about fighting with swords and bows and arrows.
For more information, contact our Sales Team.
Porsche has a unique history in motor racing and engineering
innovation. The Porsche Museum in Stuttgart, Germany has around 80
of the most famous Porsche models in the history of the company.
Children can take part in the 'Museum Rallye', which is a quiz relating to
the exhibits. There is also a special children's audio guide, which is
available in several languages. They can learn about the exhibits in any
order and at their own speed. It serves to present the excitement and
variety of the Porsche brand to children from all over the world.
'LIVE SCIENCE’
EXPERIENCES
AND LEARNING LABS
EXCELLENT TECHNOLOGICAL
ACHIEVEMENTS
IN MOTORING!
Our vision is to inspire children to achieve their full potential in the fields of
science, technology, engineering and medicine. In our 'Live Science'
experiences, you can be an atom and discover which other atoms you
bond with, or experiment with gravity by throwing things over the balcony!
In our 'Moving with Newton' Learning Lab, you can learn about Newton's
three laws of motion, or take part in our 'Colourful Chemistry' Learning Lab
and see what happens when you mix and heat chemicals to produce light
and colours.
You'll find this and so much more at the Museum of Science and Industry
Chicago!
160
TEXT 11
A. Study the following text and answer the questions.
One significant feature of most industrialized societies in the developed world is the breaking up of the family and the
rise of individualism. This is especially true of countries of the west or a few in the Far East, such as Japan. The
Japanese, however, seem to have developed a technology that may help to strengthen communication among
humans. They have designed a new human-like robot to help humans interact with each other.
The robot has been made as human as possible because it is intended to help increase interaction within
uncommunicative families. The humanized machine, which is nearly 40 cm high and can walk about on its own, is
fitted with two digital cameras, four microphones and five sensors. Therefore, it can listen, talk and even pass on
messages. What's more, it can utter more than 3,000 phrases. It cannot only recognize humans but also respond
differently to different persons. For example, if you do not like it, it will run away from you. If you do, it will be a good
friend! That's not all. The robot can project facial expressions formed by light-emitting diodes.
The new robot will be tested by 100 families so that it can be improved further. However, one cannot help wondering
about the effect this robot will have on families where the family members already do not talk to each other. Would
having a robot really make communication easier?
1. The topic of the text is ____________.
a. the breaking-up of the family b. a new personal robot c. the effects of robots on humans
2. The text concerns ____________.
a. industrial societies
b. Western countries
c. Far-eastern countries
3. The text is written for____________.
a. scientists
b. family counsellors
c. the general public
4. What is the main idea of each paragraph? Match the paragraph numbers with the main ideas given.
Para. 1 ____
a. It is not certain whether the new robot will make communication between humans easier.
Para. 2 ____
b. The Japanese have created a robot to overcome their communication problems.
Para. 3 ____
c. The new robot has many human-like features.
5. Which pronouns, words or word groups are used to refer to the robot?
______________________________________________________________________________________________
6. Which linkers and structures are used to signal:
a. an example:
____________________
e. a contrasting idea
____________________
b. a reason:
____________________
f. a result
____________________
c. an additional idea
____________________
e. an alternative
____________________
d. a purpose
____________________
f. a condition
____________________
7. What are the human-like features of the robot?
a. ________________________________________
c. ________________________________________
b. ________________________________________
d. ________________________________________
e. ________________________________________
8. What is the author’s tone in the text? Find examples of the words or word groups in text which signal the writer’s
attitude.
______________________________________________________________________________________________
9. Do you agree with the writer? Why?
______________________________________________________________________________________________
TEXT 12
A. Work with a partner. Try to answer the questions below.
1. What percentage of your diet should be ____?
a. fruit and vegetables
b. carbohydrates
c. dairy products
d. proteins
2. How do countries help people avoid obesity?
B. Read the essay in more detail. Which paragraphs contain the themes (1-6) below?
1. a tax on certain foods
______
2. the importance of the government’s role
______
3. a healthy diet
______
4. nutritional value
______
5. an introduction to the subject
______
6. advertising
______
161
C. Read paragraphs B-E again and make notes on why the author suggests these solutions to the problem of
obesity.
ways to tackle obesity
reason
a balanced diet (paragraph B)
1
packaging labels (paragraph C)
2
A food tax (paragraph D)
3
A ban on junk food advertising (paragraph E)
4
education campaigns (paragraph F)
5
D. Read the essay again to look for the examples that the author uses to add detail to the argument.
topic
1 carbohydrates
examples
bread …
2 dairy products
3 proteins
4 sweet foods
5 high-fat foods
6 sugary foods
162
A
B
C
Tackling obesity
Obesity is becoming a major problem in many D Some people argue that foods that are high in fat,
parts of the world. In Britain alone, there was a
such as pizza and potato chips, and those high in
30% increase in the number of people being
refined sugar, like chocolate and sweets, should be
admitted to hospital with problems related to
taxed. This would make junk food too expensive for
obesity last year.
people to buy in large quantities. In Denmark, there
An estimated 60% of British adults are overweight.
is now a tax on products that contain more than
2.3% of saturated fat. However, taxing fast food is
One way of tackling obesity is to eat less but to eat
difficult because fast food companies are rich and
more healthily. An average man needs around
powerful.
2,500 calories per day, while an average woman E
requires around 2,000 per day. We should eat a
The role of advertising should not be forgotten.
balanced diet which consists of a variety of foods
Advertising junk food at times when children are
in order to maintain a healthy weight. A healthy diet
watching TV was banned in Malaysia in 2007. This
should include approximately 35% fruit and
was designed to better protect them from the
vegetables; 35% carbohydrates, such as bread,
influence of advertising while they learn how to
rice, potatoes and pasta (or other starchy food);
choose between treats and foods that are good for
around 15% dairy products like milk and cheese;
them. On the other hand, there have also been TV
10% proteins, for example meat, fish, eggs and
education campaigns to encourage people to eat
beans; and only around 5% should be sweet foods
five portions of fruit and vegetables per day. It has
- namely cakes or biscuits especially those that are
been estimated that if people ate enough fruit and
high in fat and sugar.
vegetables, up to 2.7 million lives per year could be
saved.
In many countries, nutritional values are shown on F
food packaging. In Britain, there is traffic light
Governments need to promote healthy eating and
system to show more clearly how good or bad a
the importance of five portions of fruit and
particular food product is. Red next to 'sugar', for
vegetables per day. Similarly, they need to fight
example, means that the product is high in that
obesity by discouraging people from eating fats and
particular item; yellow means the product is neither
sugars. They must also encourage people to be
high nor low in sugar; and green means the
more active by providing opportunities for everyone
product only has a small amount of sugar in it. The
to get fit, no matter how rich or poor they may be. If
traffic light system helps people to know
governments can change people's habits, the world
immediately whether the food product is good for
will be a healthier place in the future.
them.
TEXT 13
A. Discuss the questions below.
1. What kind of animal makes the best pet?
2. Why do you think this animal is a good pet?
B. Look at the pictures in reading. What do you think is going on? Circle one of the choices and discuss your
answers with a partner.
a. a dog gets sick and goes to hospital
b. a dog visits a sick person
c. a dog cannot be separated from his owner
C. Now read the text to find out if your prediction is correct.
D. Read each statement. Decide if it is True or False according to reading. Check the appropriate box. If it is
false, chance it to make it true. Discuss your answer with a partner.
T/F
T/F
T/F
1. The first paragraph is ONLY about the effects of animals on people with mental illnesses in the past.
2. Animals help people communicate more.
3. Because people with animals are not as lonely as people without pets, their health is better.
163
E. Complete each sentence with a phrase from the list on the right.
_____ 1. Spending time with animals can
a. patients talk more.
_____ 2. Animals are different from people because
b. often live longer.
_____ 3. When visitors bring pets to the hospital,
c. they cannot tell us their opinions.
_____ 4. After a big operation,
d. patients with pets get better faster.
_____ 5. Older people who have pets go to
e. the doctor less often.
_____ 6. Older people with pets in their lives
f. make a person’s heart rate slower and relax children
who are upset.
F. Find each word in the reading and match it with its meaning.
_____ 1. encouraged
_____ 2. harsh
_____ 3. proof
_____ 4. survival
_____ 5. calm
_____ 6. beneficial
_____ 7. unique
_____ 8. elderly
_____ 9. loneliness
_____ 10. surgery
_____ 11. criticize
a. unpleasant
b. say what faults someone or something has
c. an operation by a doctor
d. old
e. try to persuade someone to do something by giving support.
f. act of continuing to live
g. unhappy feeling when by oneself
h. special, rare
i. make relaxed
j. facts
k. positive
In the presence of Animals
By Sarah Burke in Science and Society
As far back as the 1790s, the owners of a senior citizens' home in York, England, encouraged patients to spend time
with farm animals, believing that this would help their mental state more than
the sometimes harsh therapies used on the mentally ill at the time. In recent
years, scientists have finally begun to find proof that contact with animals can
increase a sick person's chance of survival and has been shown to lower
heart rate, calm upset children, and get people to start a conversation.
Scientists think that animal companionship1 is beneficial because animals are
accepting and attentive2, and they don't criticize or give orders. Animals also
have a unique ability to get people to be more social. Visitors to nursing
homes, for example, get more social responses from patients when they come
with animal companions, researchers have found.
Not only do people seem happier when animals are nearby, but they may also
live longer. Studies show that a year after heart surgery, survival rates for
heart patients were higher for those with pets in their homes than those without
pets. Elderly people with pets make fewer trips to doctors than those who are
without animal companions, possibly because animals lessen loneliness. A
professor of public health at UCLA says that pet ownership might provide a
new form of "low-cost health intervention3.
1
companionship: friendship
2
accepting and attentive: agreeable and caring
3
intervention: the act of preventing something undesirable (unwanted)
164
TEXT 14
A. Look at the title of the reading. Do you think the text contains mostly facts or opinions? Discuss your
answer with a partner.
B. Read the text to find out if your prediction was correct.
C. Write the number of the paragraph that matches each main idea from the reading.
1. Paragraph _______ is about how people's health might improve faster from laughter.
2. Paragraph _______ describes different areas of the brain that are responsible for laughter.
3. Paragraph _______ explains that there are not many scientific studies about why we laugh.
4. Paragraph _______ is about surgery done on a teenage girl to control her epileptic seizures.
5. Paragraph _______ is about the physical benefits of laughter.
6. Paragraph _______ explains a discovery the scientists made about the part of our brain that causes laughter.
D. Complete the sentences by matching a sentence beginning on the left with its ending on the right.
1. In an article called "Electric Current
a. by relaxing muscles.
Stimulates Laughter" doctors explained
b. emotional, cognitive (thinking), and motor (muscle
2. In this reading, humour is divided into three
movement).
parts:
c. that every time they stimulated a small area of their patient's
3. Laughter can
brain, she laughed.
4. Laughter can improve people's health
d. change someone's breathing.
E. Underline the antonym of the word in bold. Compare your answers with a partner.
funniness
seriousness
comedy
humour
due to
because of
as a result of
in addition to
increase
reduce
raise
improve
boost
increase
improve
decrease
morale
insecurity
optimism
self-confidence
get it
understand
misinterpret
comprehend
F. Look at the notes about details from the reading. Decide if each detail is about “laughter” or “the brain” and
list each in the correct category.
165
LAUGHTER
Laughter and the Brain
THE BRAIN
By Eric H. Chudler
Laughter . . . it's fun . . . it's funny. . . but why do we do it? What part
of the brain is responsible for laughter and humour?
There are not many answers to these questions because there
have not been very many experiments on laughter.
Part of the reason for this is that laughter is not a big medical
problem.
A paper published in the journal Nature (vol. 391, page 650, 1998)
called "Electric Current Stimulates Laughter" has provided a bit
more information about how the brain is involved with laughter. The
paper discussed the case of a 16-year-old girl named "A.K." who was having surgery to control seizures 1 due to
epilepsy2. During surgery, the doctors electrically stimulated2 A.K.'s cerebral cortex to map her brain3. Mapping of the
brain is done to determine the function of different brain areas and to make sure that brain tissue that will be removed
does not have an important function.
The doctors found that A.K. always laughed when they stimulated a small 2 cm by 2 cm area on her left superior
frontal gyrus (part of the frontal lobe of the brain). This brain area is part of the supplementary motor area.4 Each time
her brain was stimulated, A.K. laughed and said that something was funny. The thing that she said caused her to
laugh was different each time. A.K. laughed first, then made up a story that was funny to her. Most people first know
what is funny, then they laugh.
The authors of the paper believe that the area of the brain that caused laughter in A.K. is part of several different brain
areas which are important for:
• the emotions produced by a funny situation (emotional part of humour)
• the "getting it" part of a joke (cognitive, thinking part of humour)
• moving the muscles of the face to smile (motor part of humour).
The physiological study of laughter has its own name: 'gelotology." Research has shown that laughing is more than
just a person's voice and movement. Laughter requires the coordination of many muscles throughout the body.
Laughter also:
• increases blood pressure
• increases heart rate
• changes breathing
• reduces levels of certain hormones
• provides a boost to the immune system5
Can laughter improve health? It may be a good way for people to relax because muscle tension is reduced after
laughing. There are some cases when a good deep laugh may help people with breathing problems. Perhaps
laughing can also help heart patients by giving the heart a bit of a workout. Some hospitals even have their own
"humour rooms," "comedy carts,' and clown kids in attempts to speed a patient's recovery and boost morale.
seizures: brief periods when someone is unconscious and cannot control the movements of his/her body
electrically stimulated: used the power carried by wires to get a muscle or group of muscle to move
3
map her brain: to make a visual representation of her brain
4
supplementary motor area: a part of the brain that helps control movement
5
immune system: the system by which the body protects itself against disease
1
2
166
READING SUPPLEMENTARY MATERIALS ANSWER KEY
Read. Supp. 2 Level1_Reference ANSWER KEY
TEXT 1 Northstar 1 Reading and Writing, p.153
Practice
A. 1. Vincent and Helen Koh
2. Ellen’s
3. being a parent, a CEO, and a volunteer
4. Tim and Sally’s
5. Tim, Sally, and Steve
6. doing stand-up comedy
Exercise 1
https://ngl.cengage.com/assets/downloads/pathways_pro0000000046/pathwaysrw_1_unit6.pdf
1. engineers: they 2. Wakamaru: it 3. 10,000 words: them 4. family members: them
Exercise 2 off-line readings 1_MetuPress, p.17
1. giant pandas
2. Da xiong mao
3. in China
4. bamboo
5. The fact that bamboo plants grow in only a
few places
6. in an upright position
7. thick, oily, woolly fur / pandas
8. one panda cub
9. Panda cubs’
10. during the late Pliocene or early Pleistocene
period
TEXT 2 Adapted from off-line readings 1_MetuPress, p5
1.b 2.b 3.a 4.a 5.b 6.b 7.a 8.a 9.a 10.b
TEXT 3
http://englishusb112.pbworks.com/f/guia_focus_
reading.pdf
1. things
2. orderly people
3. pen and pencils
4. pen
5. shelves
6. box
7. box
8. cupboard
9. key
167
Read. Supp. 5_Level2_How to Deal with Unknown Vocabulary 2 Answer Key
How to use a dictionary effectively / How to guess the meaning of unknown words
Exercise 1
1
Exercise 2
1. a
2. b
4
3
3. bushel
Exercise 3
Students’ own answers.
Exercise 4
noun
conjunction
Exercise 5
Answers may vary
5
4.businessman
adjectiv
e
adverb
2
5. a
verb
3
6. a
preposition
interjection
Read. Supp. 6 Level2 Guessing Meaning From Context 2 Answer Key
How to guess the meaning of unknown words
Exercise 1
1. unfamiliar words = wired
signal word or mark = whereas
meaning = connected to a computer or other device by a wire
2. unfamiliar words = economical with the truth
signal word or mark = in other words
meaning = he was lying
3. unfamiliar words = Machu Picchu
signal word or mark = - … meaning = an ancient city known for its famous ruins
4. unfamiliar words = insufficient
signal word or mark = so we have to do more research to collect information
meaning = not enough
5. unfamiliar words = tools
signal word or mark = : saw, hammer, knife, wrench, and screwdriver
meaning = equipment
6. unfamiliar words = Globophobia
signal word or mark = refer to
meaning = the fear of globalization and balloons
7. unfamiliar words = vibrant
signal word or mark = like red and pink
meaning = bright and strong
8. unfamiliar words = habitat
signal word or mark = defined as
meaning = the natural environment of an organism
9. unfamiliar words = good manners
signal word or mark = similarly
meaning = being polite
10. unfamiliar words = kinship
signal word or mark = as opposed to
meaning = friendship
168
Guessing the Meaning from the Context Exercises (A2+)
Exercise 1
1. weather 2. temperature
Source:
https://learnenglishteens.britishcouncil.org/skills/listening/elementary-a2-listening/weather-forecast
Exercise 2 (Longman academic reading skills
1 reading. Page 11)
1.f (really surprised)
2.b (because ..missed a week of school)
3.d (are responsible for)
4.a (confident)
Exercise 3
https://www.education.com/worksh
eets/determining-meaning-using-co
ntext-clues/
1. a
5.c (joined)
6.h (giving their attention)
7.e (relax and perform better)
8.g (am with her)
2. b
3. a
4. a
5.c
6.b
7.b
Exercise 4 Source: Reading Explorer Intro: p 10-13
E. a.7
b.2
c.3
d.6
e.1
f.5
Exercise 5: dbeofflinereadings1, p.8-9
2. little water
3. b
4. school, telephone, road, car, etc.
5. find food and water
6. a
g.9
8.a
9.c
10.b
h.10
i.4
j.8
7. leaves and grass
8. very dry
9. sheep, goats, cows and camels
10. necklaces, bracelets and earrings
Guessing the Meaning from the Context Exercises (B1)
Exercise 1: Source: Inside Writing 1, p. 20
1. plan
2. professionals
3. inner
4. change
5. focus
Exercise 2: Source:
https://www.english-grammar.at/online_exercises/word-formation/wf062.change-lifestyles.htm
1. b (n)
2. f (n)
3.c (adj)
4. g (v)
5. e (n)
6. a (adj)
7. d (adj)
Exercise 3: dbeofflinereadings1, p.57-58
1. D
2. B
3. E
4. G
5. F
6. A
7. C
Exercise 4. dbeofflinereadings1, p.57-58
1. f (v)
2. e (n)
6. a (v)
7. j (v)
Exercise 5.
1. a
2. b
3.b
(adj)
8.i
(adv)
4. d (v)
5. c (v)
9. h (adj)
10.g
(n)
3. b
4. a
5. b
6. a
7. a
8. a
9. a
Exercise 6
Answer may vary
169
Exercise 7 Source North Star Reading and Writing 1, p 7-8
1. 1996
2. 25 3. more than 23,000
4. 8 million
5. 200
Exercise 8. Source North Star Reading and Writing 1, p 7-8
1. schedule
3. improve
2. cautious
4.snack
Exercise 9 Source Inside Writing 1, p 27
1. c
3. d
2. i
4. g
6. 7 to 90
7. 55 / 45
5. challenging
6. approach
5. b
6. e
7. a
8. h
Exercise 10: Source Longman Academic Reading Series 1, p, 35
1. True
2. False
3. True
4. False / Only 420
Exercise 11:
1. memorized
2. captured
3. mention
4. remain
5. via
5. False / can’t
Exercise 12 Source
https://rcel2.enl.uoa.gr/kpgeschool/images/pdf_files/B_Students_Book_English.pdf
a. aim
b. picture
c. ability
d. discipline
e. extra
6. complex
f. weakness
Read. Supp. 8_Level2_Scanning Answer Key
Practice 1
1. a 2. b 3. a 4. C
Practice 2
2. Lindbergh took off on his historic flight on May 20th.
3. Lindbergh took off on his historic flight at 7:52 A.M.
4. There was one person on the plane.
5. It was 3,610 miles.
6. He was in the air for 331/2 hours.
7. He took five sandwiches.
8. Lindbergh landed in Paris on May 21st.
9. There were 150,000 people.
Source: North Start 1- Reading & Writing, p. 128
Practice 3
2. B 3. B 4. A 5. D 6. D 7. A 8. D 9. A 10. C 11. D 12. B 13. C
Source: https://www.tsu.ge/data/file_db/sagamocdo/MA%20Sample%20Test%20B2.pdf
Text 1
1. F
3. F
5. T
7. T
9. T
2.T
4. T
6. F
8. T
10. F
Source: https://www.examenglish.com/B1/b1_reading_madagascar.htm
Text 2
1. a
2. d
3. a
4. c
Source: https://lingua.com/english/reading/hotel-reservation/
5. d
6. c
Text 3
1. b 2. a
Exercise 2
1. b
2. b
3. c
4.c
Source: https://rcel2.enl.uoa.gr/kpgeschool/images/pdf_files/B_Students_Book_English.pdf
170
Text 4
1. monthly
2. 20:00
3. $600
4. two pools
5. Achileas Sports
Shop, Achileas
Restaurant.
6. four
7. an initial consultation
8. regular reviews
9. enjoy your visit and
take advantage of …
10. state-of-the-art
machines and
excellent user-friendly
equipment
Source: https://www.loescher.it/download/varie/9781316636558_estratto.pdf
Text 5
A.
1. b 2. c
B.
1. a 2.d
3. b
4. c
5.a
6. d
3. f
4. c 5. e
6. b
Source: Well Read 1 p.12
Read. Supp. 9_Level2_Skimming ANSWER KEY
Practice 1. dbeofflinereadings1
1. c 2. c 3. a
Practice 2. https://www.dsh-germany.com/_downloads/certificates/telc/pdf/telc-english-a2.pdf
1. h 2.e 3.f 4. a
TEXT 1 https://www.trinitycollege.com/resource/?id=6254
1. First paragraph
2. Second paragraph
3. 1-b, 2-d, 3-a,
4-c
TEXT 2 http://teach.files.bbci.co.uk/skillswise/en05skim-l1-w-skimming-a-school-prospectus.pdf
1. parents - in the first sentence it says ‘your child’
2. a. No, the prospectus doesn’t include directions to the school.
b. No, the prospectus doesn’t say what time the school opens.
c. Yes - under the heading SCHOOL UNIFORM?
3. holidays
4. No, the prospectus doesn’t give details of the curriculum.
5. True - this is under the heading EXTRA CURRICULAR ACTIVITIES.
6. False - this information isn’t included in this text
7. Yes - the prospectus does give parents information about school examinations. It says ‘see page 9
regarding examinations’.
8. Yes - the prospectus tell parents how to purchase second-hand uniform under the heading SCHOOL
UNIFORM.
9. No - the prospectus doesn’t include information about school lunches.
10. False - the prospectus tells you to phone the school office if your child is ill, but it doesn’t include
the phone number.
TEXT 3 Pathways 1 Reading, Writing and Critical Thinking p.8
Paragraph 1. a Paragraph 2.b
TEXT 4 https://www.trinitycollege.com/resource/?id=6254
A. 1.E 2.F 3.A 4.B 5.D
B. 1. dedicated 2. rapidly 3. custom-made
4. affordable & cheaper
5. fortune
171
Read. Supp. 10_Level2_Inference Answer Key
Practice 2
1. c
2. a
Source: Trio 1, p 52
Practice 3
Observation:
the smell of fresh hazelnut coffee
Teacher looks slightly more tired than usual
Text 1
Text 2
Text 3
Text 4
3. b
4. d
Inference:
Somebody made fresh coffee.
He is usually tired, and it is possible that he hasn’t
slept through the night.
Something is bothering him.
She spilled some coffee on the floor
He is sitting by his desk and rubbing the floor
Practice 4
1. a/ f
2. a /d
Source: dbe.off-line.readings1. p. 113
Exercise 1
1. yes
2. yes
3. yes
4. no
Source: dbe.off-line.readings2. p. 22
Exercise 1
1, 2, 5
Source: Reading Strategies for the Intermediate Level, p. 190
Exercise 1
1. a
2. c
3. b
Source: Reading Strategies for the Intermediate Level, p. 191
Exercise 1
1. b
2. c
Source: North Star Reading & Writing 1, p. 104, 106
5. no
6. no
4.b
3. a
https://en.islcollective.com/english-esl-worksheets/grammar/past-simple-tense/reading-inference/92780
Read. Supp. 11_Level2_Note-taking ANSWER KEY
Practice
A. Outline B. Note-taking C. Mind map D. Summary E. Student Notes
TEXT 1
Key: Polite Behavior in Four Countries
source: Well Read 1 p.101
A. A. 1. handshake; maintain an arm’s length; introduce self; no example
2. handshake, eye contact, hug; stand close; no example; hugging and backslapping, touch arms, hands and
shoulders
3. slight bow, handshake, bow at meetings; no example; wait for someone to introduce you; no touching
4. shake hands; no example; greet oldest; no example
B. e.g. Similarities and differences between Australia and Brazil
Similarities: hand shaking, making eye contact
Differences: Brazilians stand very close to each other; Australians keep an arm’s length distance
Brazilians touch each other’s arms, hands, or shoulders during conversation;
Australians maintain personal distance
TEXT 2
Key: Potatoes Source: dbeofflinereadings1 p. 53
2.leaves
3. stems
A. 1.flowers
B.
1. Vitamin C
2. Potassium
3. 12%
4. Potato skin
5. fiber, potassium, iron,
phosphorus and B vitamins
6. 100 to 140 days
4. tubers
zinc,
5. Roots
7. female and male parts
8. white, lilac, purple or violet
9. the variety or type of potato
172
TEXT 3
What Makes a Good Ad? Source: Trio 2 Reading, p. 24, 25
Supporting idea 1: Good ads get people’s attention.
Example or Detail: An ad can include an exciting photo, surprising facts, or an interesting story
Supporting idea 2: Good ads reach their target audience
Example or Detail: Advertisers need to know what their audience watch or read and where they spend their time
Supporting idea 3: Good ads are easy to remember
Example or Detail: Ads can include a great slogan or a fun song
TEXT 4
What are the Characteristics of Online Communication? Source: Trio 2 Reading, p. 36-37
Online communication: can’t see emotions, kept brief and to the point, quick, and accessible whenever you want
In-Person communication: can hear a person's voice and understand a person's emotions, longer
communication, do activity together
TEXT 5
Bullet Trains Source: dbe.off-line.readings0.5, p.100-101
1. safer, cheaper and faster
2. shape and speed
3. a) trains and roads became very crowded OR it grew very fast b) first c) Tokyo OR 1964 (OR both)
4. a) Tokyo b) Osaka c) 135 miles/217 km
5. a) Tokaido Shinkansen b) 151 million
6. a) 16 cars b) 1,300
7 a) less noise b) use less energy
TEXT 6
Michael Jackson Source: dbe.off-line.readings0.5, p.55-56
1.D 2. A 3. G 4. E 5. C 6. F 7. B
1. five brothers
4. (musical) career
9. made his first
2. names are
5. he was five years 10. around the
Sigmund, Toriano,
6. family group
world
Jermaine, Marlon
7. the lead singer
11. in 1982
3. had three sisters
8. 14 albums
12. (solo) albums
13. first wife
14. the daughter
15. was a nurse
16. two children
17. got divorced
18. their daughter’s
19. hospital
20. he suffered a
cardiac arrest
TEXT 7
ULURU: Field Notes Reading Explorer Intro p.73-75
Site: Uluru-Kata Tjuta National Park
Location: Northern Territory, Australia
Information:
- Uluru is not a mountain, but a big rock. It's a symbol of national identity for Australians.
- The land became a national park in 1958. It's both a(n) National and a(n) Cultural heritage site.
-The explorer William Gosse gave it the name Ayers Rock.
- The land was returned to the Aborigines in 1985. The Aborigine word Uluru means ' Great Pebble ' or 'Great
Stone.'
- The Anangu Aborigines have lived in the desert around Uluru for over 20,000 years. There are only 4,000 of
them living there right now.
- The Anangu never walk on Uluru as it is a holy place for them.
- More than 500,000 tourists visit Uluru every year.
173
Read. Supp. 16 Reading Revision Material B1 ANSWER KEY
TEXT 1 Source: Well Read 1, p 8-9
A. 1. A Timeline of Food Inventions 1889 2. 1889 3. 2002 4. dishwasher, Frozen Food: Ice-Cream Cone,
Canned Soft Drinks, 1949, Seedless Watermelon 5. b
B. 1. Italo Marchiony 2. Microwave oven 3. Warren Barham 4. canned soft drinks 5. Frozen Food
TEXT 2 https://rcel2.enl.uoa.gr/kpgeschool/images/pdf_files/B_Students_Book_English.pdf
A. a
B. 1. a 2. b 3. c 4. c 5.a
TEXT 3 https://www.ngllife.com/student-zone/interactive-reading-practice
1 a 2 a 3 b 4 b 5 c 6 c 7 c 8 a 9 c 10 a
TEXT 4 https://rcel2.enl.uoa.gr/kpgeschool/images/pdf_files/B_Students_Book_English.pdf
A. a
B. 1. c 2. b 3. c
C. 1. NI 2. T 3. T 4. NI 5. T
TEXT 5 Source: Active Skills for Reading 2, p: 12-15
A. Answer may vary.
B. 1. short term memory 2. Sensory memory 3. Long term memory
C. b
D. 1. c
2. c
3. b
E. 1.T 2.T 3.T 4.T 5.F
F. 1. components 2. long term 3. transfer 4. make an effort 5. structure 6. technique 7. academic
174
TEXT 6 Source: Well Read 1, p. 28-32
A. 1.c 2.a 3.b
B. 1-2-3: The answers may vary.
C. 1.a 2.b 3.a 4.a 5.b
D. The answers may vary.
E. 1. A
2. Section 1: How FX specialists make things and people change: a man becomes a werewolf in The Wolf Man
Section 2: how FX specialists make things and people disappear: a witch mels in The Wizard of Oz
Section 3: how FX specialists make fantastic creatures: making the dinosaurs of Jurassic Park
F. 1. Half-man, half-wolf
2. She is standing on an elevator with her clothes nailed to the floor. They stay in place as she goes down the
elevator.
3. dry ice mixed with water
4. they learned by studying the work of paleonthologists
5. The computers made the dinosaurs move.
TEXT 7 Source: Active Skills for Reading 2, pgs: 22-25
A. Answers will vary.
B. Post 1: March 24 Post 2: March 27 Post 3: April 4 Post 4: April 6
C. Post 1:Ho Chi Minh Post 2: Cholon Post 3: 3 days Post 4: beaches and famous crafts
D. 1. T / 3 2. F /3 3. F /1 4. T / 2 5. F /4
E. 1. great 2. friendly 3. simple 4. visit more of Vietnam
F. 1. exhausting 2. accommodation 3. basic 4. fabulous 5. range 6. eager 7. unique
G. 1. boring 2. Interested 3. exciting 4. relaxing 5. embarrassed 6. worried 7. pleased
TEXT 8 Source: Active Skills for Reading 2, p: 98-101
A. Answers will vary.
B. a
C. 1.a 2.b 3.a
D. 1.b 2.a 3.c
E. a. B, W
b. Z
c. B
d. B
e. B, W, Z
f. W, Z
g. W
F. 1.c 2.a 3.f 4.h 5.b 6.d 7.g 8.e
2. expand, campus
3. spur
4. enterprising, concepts
G. 1. stationery, resources
175
TEXT 9 Unlock Reading and Writing 3_Cambridge
A. Possible answers
Endangered animals: blue whale, giant panda, Chinese alligator, great white shark, Indian elephant, white
rhinoceros, Arabian oryx, sea turtle
Extinct animals: Tyrannosaurus rex, woolly mammoth, dodo, Caspian tiger, sabre tooth tiger, woolly rhinoceros,
Asiatic lion, Arabian ostrich
B. Oryx, seals, tigers, crocodiles, whales, tuna, sharks
C. 1.C 2.A 3.D 4.B
D. 1.A 2.B 3.C 4.C 5.D 6.D 7.D
E. 1. Humans.
2. Their habitats are destroyed.
3. For food, for fur to make coats, and skin to bags and shoes, for make sport, to make medicines and teas from
their bones.
4. Whales, tuna and sharks.
5. We can take care not to pollute natural refuse to buy any products which are areas and made from animals'
body parts.
6. Governments car make it against the law fish or trade in endangered species. to hunt,
7. They can provide funding for animal sanctuaries and zoos where endangered animals can be bred and then
released back into the wild.
F. 1.face a financial penalty
2. refusing to buy
3. against the law
4. provide funding for
5. cooperate by taking these steps
TEXT 10 Unlock Reading and Writing 3_Cambridge
A. Possible answers
1. Science museums, maritime museums, natural history museums, military museums, open-air museums, zoos,
art galleries
2. Museums inspire and stimulate young minds and help children learn together in an informal environment.
3. Hands-on activities, audio-visual and interactive exhibits, actors in historical costumes make museums fun. and
play areas
B. 1. fossils
2. archaeology
3. exhibit
4. natural
5. exhibition
6. ancient
7. field
8. knight
9. sword
C. 1.B 2.C 3.D 4.A
D. 1.B 2.C 3.D 4.A 5.C 6.D 7.A
E. 1.a 2.c 3.b 4.c
TEXT 11 Source: Reading Strategies for the Intermediate Level, p. 218-219
A. 1.b 2.c 3.c 4. (1a) (2c) (3b)
5. it, the humanized machine, a good friend (para 2)
6. (a) for example (b) because (c) and, what's more, not only, but also (d) so that (e) however (f) therefore (g) if…
7. (a) can walk about on its own (b) can listen (c) can talk (d) pass on messages (e) can recognize humans (f) can
respond differently according to the person
8. The author is sceptical. Though he seems to be advocating the idea of robots, he questions the concept in the
last paragraph: “one cannot help wondering…” “Would having a robot really make communication easier?”
9. The answers may vary.
176
TEXT 12 Unlock Reading and Writing 3_Cambridge
A. 1. a. fruit and vegetables 35%
b. carbohydrates 35%
c. dairy products 15%
d. proteins 10%
2. Answers will vary
B. 1D 2F 3B 4C 5A 6E
C. 1. to maintain a healthy weight
2. to show more clearly how good or bad a particular food product is
3. to make junk food too expensive for people to buy in large quantities
4. to better protect children from the influence of junk food advertising
5. to encourage people to eat five portions of fruit and vegetables per day, to exercise and discourage them from
eating fats and sugars.
D. carbohydrates: bread, rice, potatoes, pasta, other starchy food
dairy products: milk, cheese
proteins: meat, fish, eggs, beans
sweet foods: cakes, biscuits
high-fat foods: pizza, potato chips/crisps
sugary foods: chocolate/s, sweets
TEXT 13 Source: Longman Academic Reading Series 1 p.3
A. Answers may vary
B. Answers mat vary
C. b is correct.
D. 1.F The first paragraph is not ONLY about the effects of animals on people with mental illnesses in the past.
The contact with animals can calm upset children and help people start a conversation. 2.T 3.T
E. 1f 2c 3a 4d 5e 6b
F. 1e 2a 3j 4f 5i 6k 7h 8d 9g 10c 11b
TEXT 14 Source: Longman Academic Reading Series 1 p.139
A. Answer may vary.
B. facts
C. 1.6 2.2 3.1 4.2 5.5 6.3
D. 1.c 2.b 3.d 4.a
E. 1.seriousness
2. as a result of
3. reduce
4. decrease
5. insecurity
6. misinterpret
F. Laughter: boosts morale; caused by something funny; helps patients to feel more optimistic; may help breathing
problems and heart patients; may help people recover faster; more than just a person’s voice and movement; not
a medical problem; reduces muscle tension
The brain: other details on the list
177
Writing
Supplementary
Materials
178
Writ. Supp. 1 Sentence Structure 1
UNDERSTANDING SENTENCE BASICS
From Words to Sentences to Paragraphs
We use words to form sentences. A sentence is a group of words that expresses a complete thought.
The words in a sentence are in a special order.
book name your
is what are you
student where
my
what’s this
is
a
I am a student.
This is my book.
What’s your name?
Where are you from?
We use sentences to form paragraphs. A paragraph is a group of sentences. All the sentences are
about the same person or thing.
My classmate Yerena Politiva is an interesting person. She is from Ukraine. She speaks
Ukranian and Russian. She lives with her family. She is married. She has a son and a daughter. She
works part-time at an animal hospital. I hope to learn more about her.
Sentence Structure
In English, we make sentences with a subject-verb combination. Sometimes there is an
object (a noun or pronoun) and/or other information after the verb.
Simple sentence : S + V + O
Subject
a. Maria Simms
b. She
c. Maria
d. She
+
Verb
plays
is practicing
likes
enjoys
+
Object
+
the piano
the piano
classical piano music
listening
Adverbs(manner/time/place)
well.
every day.
a lot.
very much.
Verb
can play
practices
+
Object
Other Information
extremely well.
for three hours.
Simple sentence : S + V
Subject
e. Maria Simms
f. She
+
+
179
Word Order in Questions
SENTENCES
Statements
Questions
1. I am from Colombia.
2. My name is Diego.
3. I am a student.
4. My first language is Spanish.
1. Where are you from?
2. What is your name?
3. Are you a new student?
4. Do you speak English?
ACTIVITY 1. Work alone or with a partner. Underline the subject and the verb in each sentence.
Write ‘V’ for the verb, and write ‘S’ for the subject.
1. My class has 18 students.
S
V
2. We come from seven different countries.
3: The class starts every day at 9.00 a.m.
4. Our teacher is Mr. Robinson.
5. He is young and friendly.
6. He speaks slowly.
7. I am a beginner.
8. I understand him most of the time but not always.
ACTIVITY 2. Unscramble the words below to make correct English sentences.
Topic: My Family
1. is not / very big / My family
My family is not very big.
2. There / only four people / are
_______________________
3. two sisters / I / have
_______________________
4. I / very much / my family / love
______________________
5. Karen / my mother’s name / is
______________________
6. once a week / go out / I / with my family
______________________
ACTIVITY 3. Write five to eight sentences about your family. Follow the example in Activity 1.
Topic: My Family
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
180
Grammar and Sentence Structure
Subjects, verbs, and objects
In English, every sentence has two main parts: the subject and the main verb. As you study
the following simple sentences, look for this pattern.
Subject
The subject is the person or thing that does the action. The subject comes before the verb.
Look at these simple sentences. The subjects are underlined.
Maria Simms plays the piano.
She practices the piano every day.
Maria likes classical piano music a lot.
Maria goes herself every two weeks. (no object)
Verb
Each sentence needs a verb in English. Some verbs are words for actions. This kind of verb
describes movement or change. The verbs in these two sentences about Miki are action verbs.
Miki drives a convertible.
She sings a song.
Verbs do not always describe actions. The verbs in these two sentences about Miki do not
describe any movement or change. They are non-action verbs. Miki is not doing anything.
Miki is a student.
She has friends at school.
She likes biology.
She wants a cake.
She needs a dictionary.
ACTIVITY 4. Underline the verb in each sentence and write ‘A’ for action verbs and ‘N’ for
nonaction verbs as in the example.
1. I have a cell phone.
N
2. I make calls to my friends everyday.
3. My friends call me, too.
4. Sometimes my friends send me a text message.
5. My phone has a camera.
6. My phone is very important to me.
7. Most of my friends are students.
181
Object
The object is the thing or person after the verb. The object answers the questions who(m)? Or
what? The object is the thing or person that receives the action of the verb. Some verbs, such as like,
and enjoy must have an object after them. These are called transitive verbs.
Look at these simple sentences. The objects are in boxes. (These objects are also called
direct objects)
Maria Simms plays the piano.
She practices the piano every day.
Maria likes classical piano music a lot.
Some verbs (e.g. buy, give, send, show, tell, teach, write, etc.) can have two objects. These are
direct and indirect objects. Look at the following sentences:
Her friend gave her a birthday present.(two objects)
Her friend gave a birthday present to her. (two objects)
Her friend bought her flowers. (two objects)
Her friend bought flowers for her. (two objects)
Note: Some verbs, such as die, happen go and arrive can never have an object after them. These
verbs are called intransitive verbs.
Traffic accidents happen here every week. (no object)
The letter arrived yesterday. (no object)
Jane died yesterday. (no object)
Checking for the Subject and the Verb.
Every sentence should have a subject and a verb. It is a common mistake for student writers
to leave out the subject or the verb. A sentence without a subject or without a verb is called a
fragment. A fragment is only a piece of a sentence, not a full sentence. So, it is incorrect.
Fragment: John is my brother. Works at Ames bank in Miami. (Incorrect -It has no subject)
Sentence: John is my brother. He works at Ames bank in Miami.
Fragment: Many Japanese people a white car. (Incorrect -It has no verb)
Sentence: Many Japanese people have a white car.
Sentence: Many Japanese people drive a white car.
In writing, a fragment is a serious mistake. A fragment shows the reader that the writer did not
check his or her work carefully. When you write your sentences, check each of them to make sure that
THERE IS A SUBJECT AND A VERB.
Commands
In command (imperative) sentences, the subject is you. However, the word you is not usually
stated.
Examples:
Open the door now! (NOT: You open the door now!)
Do not say that word! (NOT: You do not say that word!)
182
ACTIVITY 5. Subjects and verbs
Read these sentences about making tuna salad. Underline each subject and the verb. The first one
has been done for you.
1. Tuna salad is easy to make.
5. First, I cut up the onion.
2. The ingredients are simple and cheap.
6. Then I add the tuna fish and the mayonnaise.
3. Two ingredients are tuna fish and mayonnaise.
7. Finally, I add some salt and a lot of pepper.
4. I also use onion, salt, and pepper.
8. Without a doubt, tuna salad is my favorite food
ACTIVITY 6. Sentence or Fragment?
Read each group of words. If it is a fragment, write F on the line. If it is a complete sentence, write S
on the line. If it is a question, write Q. The first two have been done for you.
1. ___S____ Billy Mitchell lives in a big apartment.
6. ______ You a student.
2. ___F____ My mother breakfast every morning.
7. ______ Michael likes classical music.
3. __________ Is incredibly delicious.
8. ______ Nancy and Jeanine very best friends.
4. __________ Does carol have a car?
9. ______ The girls play soccer after school.
5. __________ They my cousins from Miami.
10. ______ I am from Colombia.
PARTS OF SPEECH
Learning about the parts of speech is the first step in grammar study. From learning the parts
of speech, we begin to understand the use or function of words and how words are joined together to
make meaningful communication.
The man surreptitiously entered the room. (You probably don't know the meaning of the
word ‘surreptitiously’, but if you know about parts of speech, you will recognize that it is an adverb.)
The 9 parts of speech that are used to describe English words are: Nouns - Verbs Adjectives - Adverbs - Pronouns - Prepositions - Conjunctions – Articles- Interjections
183
NOUNS
A noun is often defined as a word which names a person, place or thing. (boy, river, friend, Mexico,
school, truth, university, idea, John F. Kennedy, movie, vacation, eye, dream, flag)
Nouns are divided into 2 groups –
1. proper nouns: name of a specific or particular person, place or thing (e.g. Mexico, Atlantic
Ocean, February, Monday, Susan, Maple Street, Burger King.)
2. common nouns: (e.g. school, grammar, boyfriend, puzzle)
ACTIVITY 7. Underline the nouns used in the sentences below:
1. The bus inspector is looking at all the passengers' passes.
2. The beetles invade all the gardens in the neighborhood in the summer.
3. When they take the dog to the beach, it always plays with the waves.
4. The committee meets every Wednesday afternoon.
184
VERBS
A verb is often defined as a word which shows action or state of being. Every sentence must have
a verb. Unlike most of the other parts of speech, verbs change their form.
‘The man sat on a chair’ (past tense)
‘She is a smart girl’ (be-present tense)
‘She will call me tomorrow’ (auxiliary+main verb)
‘We should solve the problem as soon as possible.’ (modal+ main verb)
ACTIVITY 8. Underline the verbs in the sentences below:
1. Ricky showed her the painting.
2. Mark read the letter and smiled to himself.
3. She could swim across the river and everybody was surprised.
4. Eton College was founded by Henry VI in 1440.
ADJECTIVES
An adjective is often defined as a word which describes or gives more information about a noun or
pronoun. Adjectives describe nouns in terms of qualities such as size, color, number, and kind.
‘The lazy dog sat on the rug’,
‘The lazy, old, brown dog sat on the rug’.
‘The lazy, old, brown dog sat on the beautiful, expensive, new rug.’
An adjective can also come after a form of the verb to ‘be’.
‘The man is tall, dark and handsome.’
Note: It’s also possible to use adjectives after linking verbs in English. Linking verbs are verbs that
express a state of being.Some of the linking verbs are; become, get, seem, look, smell, remain, grow,
stay, taste etc.
She gets bored easily.
Bill becomes angry after meetings.
This sweater feels itchy.
The sculpture looks strange.
The dinner smells wonderful.
That idea sounds great.
This soup tastes delicious.
ACTIVITY 9. Underline the adjectives in the sentences below:
1. She bought a trendy blue jacket.
2. The coal mines are dark and scary.
3. Many stores have already begun to play irritating Christmas music.
4. The back room was filled with large, yellow rain boots.
ADVERBS
An adverb is usually defined as a word that gives more information about a verb, an adjective or
another adverb. Adverbs describe verbs, adjectives and adverbs in terms of qualities such as time,
frequency and manner.
Examples:
She married the prince, and they lived happily ever after.
Sue runs fast (manner)
Sue runs very fast (how fast)
185
Many times an adjective can be made into an adverb by adding -ly as in nicely, quickly, completely,
sincerely. However, there are also some irregular adverbs (fast not fastly, hard not hardly, well not
goodly etc.).
Adverbs of time tell when something happens and adverbs of frequency tell how often something
happens.
Below are some examples of adverbs of time, frequency and manner.
Adverbs of Time
Adverbs of Frequency
Adverbs of Manner
Do it now.
I always do my homework
He swims well.
I will see you then.
I never went skiing.
She ran quickly.
They will be here soon.
She rarely eats a big breakfast.
They spoke softly.
I can't meet you today.
He was once on TV.
My sister drives carefully.
Have you traveled recently?
He saw the movie twice.
They solved the problem easily.
ACTIVITY 10. Underline the adverbs in the sentences below:
1. The women waited patiently for the doctor.
2. We forced him to finish the job more quickly.
3. Unfortunately, the bank closed at three today.
PRONOUNS
A pronoun is often defined as a word which can be used instead of a noun.
‘John is a student’ (He is a student)
He= subject pronoun
‘Yesterday Susan called her father’ (Yesterday she called him)
She= subject pronoun, him= object pronoun
‘That is my father's book’ (That book is his.
possessive pronoun
That is his book).
possessive adjective
I saw myself in the mirror.
reflexive pronoun
SINGULAR
Perso
n
Subject
Pronouns
Object
Pronouns
Possessive
Adjectives
Possessive
Pronouns
Reflexive
Pronouns
1st
I
me
my
mine
myself
2nd
you
you
your
yours
yourself
3rd
he/she/it
him/her/it
his/her/its
his/hers
himself/herself/itself
186
PLURAL
Person
Subject
Pronoun
s
Object
Pronouns
Possessive
Adjectives
Possessive
Pronouns
Reflexive
Pronouns
1st
We
us
our
ours
ourselves
2nd
You
you
your
yours
yourselves
3rd
They
them
their
theirs
themselves
ACTIVITY 11. Read the following passage. Write the missing subject and object pronouns in
the blank spaces.
My name is Charlie. 1.__________ have two brothers. 2.__________ are both older than
3.__________. Sometimes they take me to the park and 4.__________ play football together. I like
playing football with 5.__________ because they are very good. We are going to the park today.
Would you like to come with 6.__________? 7.__________ can all play together. Afterwards,
8.__________ can come to my house if 9.__________ want to. I think 10.__________ will like my
dad. He is very funny and 11.__________ makes great pizzas. Do 12.__________ like pizza?
ACTIVITY 12. Fill in the gaps in activity A1 and A2, using Subject Pronouns/ Object Pronouns/
Possessive Pronouns or Possessive Adjectives.
A1.
1. Is this Jane’s bicycle? No, _________ hasn’t got one. ________ doesn’t belong to ________. It’s
_________ husband’s bicycle. _________ bought ________ last week. _________ is new and
expensive.
2. Is Lisa coming to your party? Yes, but Paul will not come with ________. ________ will come alone.
Her children have school exams. _________ are very busy this week. ________ hope that ________
do well at school.
3. Tim and Sal are my best friends and _________ can’t do anything without taking their opinion and
their advice. __________ are really helpful and kind.
4. Jane is a doctor, she likes _________ job and family. She has got two children, they are pupils in a
primary school. __________ school is far from __________ house. _________ go there by bus or
parents drive ___________. Jane’s husband, Tom, is a company manager, he goes to __________
job by car. Tom’s car is a convertible while __________ is a Ford.
A2.
Dear Pauline,
Thank you for 1. ___________ letter. It was good to hear from you and to know news about
2. __________ and your family.
Let me tell 3. _________ my news. In June, 4. _________ brother, Peter, is getting married to
Laura. I met 5. ________ three years ago. 6. _________is an old friend of mine. They are getting
married in the afternoon and my parents are having a big party for 7. __________ in the evening. I am
really happy both for 8. __________ and for Laura.
I've just started my new school year: this year I'm attending High School...and I am so excited
about it! 9. __________ Maths teacher is very strict but I like her! She always smiles, she's thin and
10. __________ hair is red. 11. ___________ is red too! Last summer I changed style: you wouldn't
recognise me!
Love,
Camilla
187
ACTIVITY 13. Some of the reflexive pronouns in the following sentences are used correctly,
but some are not. Write ‘C’ if the reflexive pronoun is correct. If it is not correct, write the
correct reflexive pronoun in the given space.
1. Sometimes I wash the dishes all by myself.
2. Dad had an accident. He cut herself with a knife.
3. Sally washes the car by herself.
4. Do you think the doctor can cure itself when he is ill?
5. The cat stays clean by licking itself.
6. Anna and May made the dinner all by herself.
7. Mom lets me walk to school by myself.
8. David can swim all by himself now.
9. This light is automatic. It switches itself on at night.
___C______________
_________________
_________________
_________________
_________________
________________
________________
_________________
________________
PREPOSITIONS
A preposition is a word which shows relationships among other words in the sentence. The
relationships include direction, place, time, cause, manner and amount. (at, in, on, of, by, under,
through, without, for, inside, across, near, next to, between, over, to, in front of, during, along, with,
opposite, etc)
‘She went to the store’ (direction)
‘They will be here at three o'clock’ (time)
Prepositions of time:
at two o'clock
in an hour, in January; in 1992
‘He came by bus’ (manner)
‘It is under the table’ (place)
on Wednesday
for a day
Prepositions of place:
at my house
in New York
on the table
near the library
in my hand
across the street
between the books
under the bed
REMEMBER! "After" and "Before" are also prepositions.
ACTIVITY 14. Underline the prepositions in the sentences below and write why it is used.
Example; He was walking towards the car. (movement)
1. The screenwriter searched for the manuscript. He was certain it was somewhere in his office.
2. She read the book during class.
3. The children climbed the mountain without fear.
4. The spider crawled slowly along the wall.
6. The dog is hiding under the porch.
ARTICLES
An article is a kind of adjective which is always used with and gives some information about a noun.
There are only two articles: ‘a/an’ and ‘the’.
She pointed at the young man in the group’
There was a man who was dressed black in the group.
Take a look at the sentences below;
Joe: I had a sandwich and an apple. The sandwich wasn’t very good, but the apple was nice.
Joe says ‘a sandwich’, ‘an apple’ because this is the first time he talks about them. In the second
sentence he says ‘the sandwich’ and ‘the apple’ because it is already obvious which apple and
sandwich he talks about.
188
IDENTIFICATION OF PARTS OF SPEECH
Have a look at the sentences below.
verb
Stop!
noun
verb
Karen
works
pronoun
verb
noun
She
hates
animals.
noun
verb
noun
adverb
Fatima
speaks
English
well.
pronoun
verb
preposition
article
noun
adverb
She
ran
to
the
station
quickly.
pronoun
verb
adjective
noun
conjunction
pronoun
verb
pronoun
She
likes
big
snakes
but
I
hate
them.
However, a word can have more than one part of speech and you have to look at how the word works
in a particular sentence to know what part of speech it is.
Books are important in our lives.. (noun as it is the subject of the sentence)
Deborah waits patiently while Bridget books the tickets. (verb as it comes after the subject
’Bridget’)
We walk down the street. (verb as it comes after the subject)
The mail carrier stood on the walk. (noun as it is the object of the sentence)
Adjective : That is a fast boat. (it comes before a noun)
Adverb : The snow is melting fast. ( it defines the verb, adverbs of manner)
Noun : Hear the wash of the tide.
Verb : Wash those windows.
Noun : The rich have a huge responsibility.
Adjective : A rich doctor lives here.
Adverb : We went below.
Preposition : Below us lay the valley.
Noun : The calm lasted for three days.
Adjective : Calm words show quiet minds.
Verb : Calm your angry friend.
189
Noun: The outside of the castle is gloomy.
Adjective: We have an outside stateroom.
Adverb: The messenger is waiting outside.
Preposition: I will ride outside the coach.
You can find some more examples of it in the chart below:
Word
Sentence
Part of Speech
can
I think I can do it.
verb
can
Don't open that can of beans.
noun
only
This is my only pen.
adjective
only
He was only joking.
adverb
his
That book is his.
pronoun
his
That is his book.
adjective
English
Can you speak English?
noun
English
I am reading an English novel.
adjective
ACTIVITY 15. Identify the part of speech of the highlighted word in each of the following sentences:
1. The dog chased her around the ring.
________________
2. Mr. Brown angrily shut the door.
_______________
3. Everywhere she went, she talked about her new crash..
______________
4. She confidently made her presentation to the directors.
______________
5. Frankenstein is the name of the scientist, not the monster.
_______________
6. That old dictionary is hers.
______________
7. Some children often insist that they can do everything all by themselves. _____________
8. Dust covered every surface in the locked bedroom.
_______________
9. She got stuck between two cars.
_______________
10. Exciting new products and effective marketing strategies will guarantee the company's success.
_________
11. You have taken the wrong road.
_______________
12..Edward often spells words wrong.
_______________
ACTIVITY 16. Fill in the blanks with ONE WORD ONLY. (a pronoun, an adjective, an adverb, two
verbs, an article, a pronoun, a conjunction)
Tony Gets Married
Tony graduated from college 1.___________ 2013. He met a 2.____________ woman. Her name
3._______________ Angela and Tony fell in love 4.___________. After three years of dating, Tony
and Angela married in 5.____________________ beautiful church on the coast of Oregon.
6.____________ have been married for two years and now 7.________________ three lovely
children. All in all, life has been very good to Tony. He’s a happy man 8._______________ I’m happy
for him.
190
ANSWER KEY
ACTIVITY 1
2. We come from seven different countries.
S V
3. The class starts every day at 9.00 a.m.
S
V
4. Our teacher is Mr. Robinson.
S
V
5. He is young and friendly.
SV
6. He speaks slowly.
S V
7. I am a beginner.
SV
8. I understand him most of the time but not always.
S
V
ACTIVITY 2
2. There are only four people.
3. I have two sisters.
4. I love my family a lot.
5. My mother’s name is Karen.
6. I go out with my family once a week.
ACTIVITY 3 Students’ own answers.
ACTIVITY 4
2. I make calls to my friends everyday.
A
3. My friends call me, too.
A
4. Sometimes my friends send me a text message.
A
5. My phone has a camera.
N
6. My phone is very important to me.
N
7. Most of my friends are students.
N
ACTIVITY 5
1. Tuna salad is easy to make.
2. The ingredients are simple and cheap.
3. Two ingredients are tuna fish and mayonnaise.
4. I also use onion, salt, and pepper.
5. First, I cut up the onion.
6. Then I add the tuna fish and the mayonnaise.
7. Finally, I add some salt and a lot of pepper.
8. Without a doubt, tuna salad is my favorite food
191
ACTIVITY 6
3. F 4. S 5. F 6. F 7. S 8. F 9. S 10. S
ACTIVITY 7
1. The bus inspector is looking at all the passengers' passes.
2. The beetles invade all the gardens in the neighborhood in the summer.
3. When they take the dog to the beach, it always plays with the waves.
4. The committee meets every Wednesday afternoon.
ACTIVITY 8
1. Ricky showed her the painting.
2. Mark read the letter and smiled to himself.
3. She could swim across the river and everybody was surprised.
4. Eton College was founded by Henry VI in 1440.
ACTIVITY 9
1. She bought a trendy blue jacket.
2. The coal mines are dark and scary.
3. Many stores have already begun to play irritating Christmas music.
4. The back room was filled with large, yellow rain boots.
ACTIVITY 10
1. The women waited patiently for the doctor.
2. We forced him to finish the job more quickly.
3. Unfortunately, the bank closed at three today.
ACTIVITY 11
1. I
he
2. They
12. you
3. me
4.we
5. them
6. us
7. We
8. we/you
9. you
10. you 11.
ACTIVITY 12
A1.
1. Is this Jane’s bicycle? No, she hasn’t got one. It doesn’t belong to her. It’s her husband’s bicycle.
He bought it last week. It is new and expensive.
2. Is Lisa coming to your party? Yes, but Paul will not come with her. She will come alone. His
children have school exams. They are very busy this week. I hope that they do well at school.
3. Tim and Sal are my best friends and I can’t do anything without taking their opinion and their
advice. They are really helpful and kind.
4. Jane is a doctor, she likes her job and family. She has got two children, they are pupils in a
primary school. Their school is far from their house. They go there by bus or parents drive them.
Jane’s husband, Tom, is a company manager, he goes to his job by car. Tom’s car is a convertible
while hers is a Ford.
A2.
1. your 2. you 3. you 4. my
5. her
6. She 7. them 8. him 9. My/our
10. her
11. Mine
192
ACTIVITY 13
2.himself
3. C
4. himself
5. C
6. themselves
7. C
8. C
9.C
ACTIVITY 14
1. for: cause in: place
2. during: time
3. without: manner
4. along: movement
5. under: place
ACTIVITY 15
1.noun
2. verb
3. (subject) pronoun
4. adverb (of manner)
5. verb (non action)
6. adjective
7. (reflexive) pronoun
8. noun
9. preposition
10. conjunction
11. adjective
12. adverb (of manner)
ACTIVITY 16
1.in
2. smart/clever/ trustworthy/reliable/beautiful etc.
3. is
4. immediately/soon etc.
5. a/the
6. They
7.have
8. and
References
Longman Academic Writing Series 1: Sentences to Paragraphs, Second Edition. Great
Writing 1: Great Sentences for Great Paragraphs, 2010 Heinle Cengage Learning
https://layers-of-learning.com/parts-of-speech/
http://www.english-for-students.com/the-same-word-as-different-parts-of-speech.html
193
Writ. Supp. 2
Sentence Structure 2
BASIC ENGLISH PUNCTUATION RULES
PERIOD (.)
Rule : Use a period at the end of a complete sentence that is a statement.
Examples:
I know that you would never break my heart intentionally.
He went to Detroit last week.
COMMAS (,)
Rule 1: Use commas to separate a list of items.
Example:
She likes reading, listening to music, taking long walks and visiting her friends.
Rule 2: Use a comma to separate two adjectives when the word and can be used between them.
Examples:
He is a strong, healthy man.
We stayed at an expensive summer resort. (NOTE: You would not say an expensive and summer
resort, so no comma.)
Rule 3: Use commas to separate phrases.
Examples:
In order to get this certificate, you will need to take the TOEFL exam.
If you are not sure about this, you should let me know it now.
Rule 4: Use commas to separate two clauses that are connected by a conjunction such as ‘but’, ‘and’, ‘so’ etc.
Examples:
They want to buy a new car, but their financial situation will not allow it.
I’d really enjoy seeing a film this evening, and I’d like to go out for a drink.
Rule 5: Use commas to introduce a direct quote.
Examples:
He actually said, "I do not care."
The doctor replied, ‘If you don’t stop smoking, you run the risk of a heart attack’.
Rule 6: Use commas to separate expressions that interrupt sentence flow.
Examples:
I am, as you have noticed, very nervous about this.
She is, as everyone knows, a dishonest person.
Rule 7: Put a comma after a dependent clause (a clause that begins with a subordinating conjunction) when that
clause begins a sentence.
Examples:
Because it was raining outside, Alex used his umbrella.
Rule 8: Put a comma before or after the name of a person spoken to.
Examples:
“Harry, do you want to play soccer?” Anna asked.
“Do you want to play soccer, Harry?” Anna asked.
Rule 9: Commas separate parts of dates and places. Put a comma between the day and the date. Put a comma
between the date and the year. Put a comma between a city and a state or a country.
Examples:
I was born on Tuesday, June 27, 1989.
The concert was in Pusan, Korea.
The headquarters of that company is located in Osaka, Japan.
Rule 10: Use a comma to separate an introductory word or phrase from the rest of the sentence.
Examples:
Finally, they decided to ask the police for help.
Every afternoon after school, I go to the library.
Rule 11: Put a comma after salutation in personal letters and after the conclusion in personal and business letters.
Examples:
Dear Roberta,
Dear Mr. Gomez,
Dear Ms. Kennedy,
With love,
Sincerely,
Yours truly,
Grandma
Jonathan
Alicia
Rule 12: Put a comma before and, but, for, or, nor, so, and yet when they connect two independent clauses.
Examples:
Richard bought Julie a croissant, but he ate it himself.
194
QUESTION MARKS (?)
Rule 1: Use a question mark only after a direct question.
Examples:
Will you go with me?
How long have they been working here?
Rule 2: Use a question mark when a sentence is half statement and half question.
Examples:
You need care, don't you?
There is too much noise here, isn’t there?
EXCLAMATION POINT (!)
Rule: Use the exclamation point to show emphasis or surprise. Do not use the exclamation point in formal business
writing.
Example:
I can’t believe he is going to marry her!
I'm truly shocked by your behavior!
SEMICOLONS (;)
Rule 1: Use a semicolon in place of a period to separate two sentences where the conjunction has been left out.
Examples:
Call me tomorrow; I will give you my answer then.
What an incredible situation; it must make you nervous.
Rule 2: Use a semicolon before introductory words such as namely, however, therefore, that is, i.e., for example,
e.g., or for instance.
Examples:
You should bring many backpacking items; for example, sleeping bags, pans, and warm clothing will
make the trip better.
We planned to spend the weekend outdoors; however, it rained heavily.
Rule 3: Use the semicolon to separate units of a series when one or more of the units contain commas.
Examples:
This conference has people who have come from Boise, Idaho; Los Angeles, California; and
Nashville, Tennessee.
They plan to study German, for their travels; chemistry, for their work; and literature, for their own
enjoyment.
COLONS (:)
Rule 1: Use colons to introduce a list.
Examples:
The professor has given me three options: to retake the exam, to accept the extra credit assignment,
or to fail the class.
She had many reasons to join the club: to get in shape, to make new friends, and to get out of the
house.
Rule 2: Use colons to introduce a direct quote (a comma can also be used in this situation)
Examples:
He announced to his friends: ‘I’m getting married!’
She cried out: ‘I never want to see you again!’
ACTIVITY 1. Put in semicolons, colons, periods, and commas wherever they are needed in the following sentences.
1. You must catalogue all these books according to their contents geology natural history philosophy and scientific
method
2. When daylight came we thought we were safe however this was not true
3. The car left the road rolled down hit a tree and then burst into flames
4. Four countries participated in the competition Italy Belgium France and Luxembourg
5. The following are the primary colors red blue and yellow
6. Though Phil said he would arrive on the 9:19 flight he came instead on the 10:36 flight
195
CAPITALIZATION RULES
● Capitalize the first word of a sentence.
There is something wrong with this cheese.
Robert and I are going to discuss the political situation.
● Capitalize the pronoun "I" .
He asked me where I had bought my jacket.
If I see her, I will give her your message.
● Capitalize proper nouns.
I visited California on my vacation.
She gave Peter a present for his birthday.
●
Capitalize North, South, East, and West when contained in the name of a place (state, country, etc.)
but not when used for giving directions.
My friend lives in South Carolina.
We are planning a vacation in South Africa.
She lives in southern Europe. (NOT Southern)
I will visit my friends in eastern Oregon.(NOT Eastern)
BUT The West offers lots of job opportunities.
●
Proper names of places, specific buildings, rivers, mountains, and other geographic locations are
capitalized.
That is the Nile River, which runs through Africa.
● Capitalize company trademarks (product names).
My niece loves Converse shoes.
● Capitalize common names of periods of time in history.
The Victorian Era lasted far shorter than many people expected.
● Capitalize specific events.
I went to the Tomato Growers Conference in Portland last weekend.
Have you ever attended the Rock‘n Coke Festival?
● Capitalize acronyms which refer to specific names.
I prefer to watch BBC whenever possible.
● Capitalize days of the week, holidays, and months of the year. Do not capitalize seasons.
Valentine’s Day is on Monday, February 14th.
I love skiing in winter.
● Capitalize countries, languages, and nationalities (adjective form of a specific country)
I lived in Italy for over 10 years.
Have you ever had any really expensive French wine?
Do you speak Russian?
● Capitalize family relationships when used in place of a name.
Have you given Mom her present yet?
I think Dad needs some time off work.
● Capitalize titles that come before names. Do not capitalize titles that follow names.
The soldier wrote to General Smith and asked for advice.
Have you spoken to President Smithers yet?
BUT
●
George Washington was the first president of the United States.
Peter Smith was elected mayor in 1995.
That is the president of the United States. (BUT “That is President Bush.”)
Capitalize letter openings and closings: Dear Mr. Smith, Best regards,
● Capitalize the first word in a quote.
The last time I talked to Peter he said, "Study hard and get to bed early!"
Thomas Patterman was a simple man who said, "Give me life, liberty and a bottle of rum!"
196
● Capitalize content words in titles.
Remember that content words include nouns, pronouns, principal verbs, adjectives, and adverbs.
Rainy Days and Mondays
How to Win Friends and Influence your Neighbors
● Capitalize specific course names.
Are you taking History 101 at 10.00 A.M.?
Are you taking history this semester? (general subject – no capital letter)
ACTIVITY 2. Correct the capitalization errors in the sentences.
1. the mississippi river is the longest river in the united states.
2. did you know that katie was born on november 14th, 2011?
3. bob said, "let's play tennis tomorrow."
4. the president of the united states lives in the white house.
5. mary smith is a member of the republican party.
6. can we go to kfc on wednesday?
7. have You ever seen “the simpsons ”?
8. the young man became a citizen of the u.s.a.
9. can you see the washington monument from the potomac river?
10. ms fernandez will travel to mexico in september to buy fabric for her company, textiles international.
11. they asked officer moore to meet them at 212 fifth avenue.
12. i like history and science, but I don’t like algebra II or english.
13. during world war ii, a lot of canadian and american soldiers lost their lives.
14. this summer we are going fishing in the pacific ocean to try and catch a shark.
ACTIVITY 3. Editing: Grammar and Sentence Review
Read this paragraph. There are 10 errors: 2 errors with verbs, 1 punctuation error, 2 capitalization errors, 2 adjective
errors, 2 possessive adjective errors, and 1 subject pronoun error. Find and correct the errors. The first one has been
done for you.
Not an Average Teenager
wants
Steven Mills is not a typical teenager. Steven is a gymnast, and he want to compete in Tokyo olympics. In
order to practice before school he wakes up at five o’clock in the morning every day. First, he has a breakfast
healthy. Then she jogs to National Gymnasium on Cypress street. He practices gymnastics for two hours. Then he
gets ready for school. Steven goes to school from eight-thirty in the morning until three o’clock in the afternoon.
After school, he returns to the gymnasium for classes special with him coach. When practice finish at six o’clock,
Steven returns home. He eats dinner, does his homework, and talks with their family. Steven is in bed by ten
o’clock so that he will be ready for work the next day.
197
Writ. Supp. 2_Sentence Structure 2 ANSWER KEY
ACTIVITY 1
1. You must catalogue all these books according to their contents: geology, natural history, philosophy and scientific
method.
2. When daylight came, we thought we were safe; however, this was not true. 3. The car left
the road, rolled down, hit a tree and then burst into flames.
4. Four countries participated in the competition: Italy, Belgium, France and Luxembourg. 5. The
following are the primary colors: red, blue, and yellow.
6. Though Phil said he would arrive on the 9:19 flight, he came instead on the 10:36 flight.
ACTIVITY 2
1. The Mississippi River is the longest river in the United States.
2. Did you know that Katie was born on November 14th, 2011?
3. Bob said, "Let's play tennis tomorrow."
4. The president of the United States lives in the White House.
5. Mary Smith is a member of the Republican Party.
6. Can we go to KFC on Wednesday?
7. Have you ever seen “the Simpsons ” ?
8. The young man became a citizen of the USA.
9. Can you see the Washington Monument from the Potomac River?
10. Ms Fernandez will travel to Mexico in September to buy fabric for her company, Textiles International.
11. They asked Officer Moore to meet them at 212 Fifth Avenue.
12. I like history and science, but I don’t like Algebra II or English.
13. During World War II, a lot of Canadian and American soldiers lost their lives.
14. This summer we are going fishing in the Pacific Ocean to try and catch a shark.
ACTIVITY 3
Not an Average Teenager
wants
Steven Mills is not a typical teenager. Steven is a gymnast, and he want to compete in Tokyo Olympics. In order to
practice before school”,” he wakes up at five o’clock in the morning every day. First, he has a healthy breakfast.
Then he jogs to National Gymnasium on Cypress Street. He practices gymnastics for two hours. Then he gets ready
for school. Steven goes to school from eight-thirty in the morning until three o’clock in the afternoon. After school, he
returns to the gymnasium for special classes with his coach. When practice finishes at six o’clock, Steven returns
home. He eats dinner, does his homework, and talks with his family. Steven is in bed by ten o’clock so that he will be
ready for work the next day.
198
INTRODUCTION TO THE
PARAGRAPH
WORDS
SENTENCES
PARAGRAPHS
1. PARAGRAPH STRUCTURE
A PARAGRAPH
• presents a single idea
• is strategically organized & has a structure
- begins with a topic sentence (TS)
* TS includes a main idea.
- contains supporting sentences (SS)
* SSs explain or exemplify the main idea given in the TS.
- ends with a concluding sentence (CS)
* It restates the main idea or summarizes the paragraph.
CONCLUDING
SENTENCE
199
PARAGRAPH STRUCTURE
• Topic sentence (TS)
>>
• Supporting sentence 1 (SS1)
● Minor detail(s) (MD)
• Supporting sentence 2 (SS2)
•
Topic sentence - Main idea
• topic + controlling idea
(what the paragraph is about)
• Supporting sentence - details
>>
• supporting idea (explain/support the TS)
• minor detail(s):
• Examples
• Explanations
• Statistics
? Minor detail(s) (MD)
●
Supporting sentence 3 (SS3)
• Concluding sentence - summary
? Minor detail(s) (MD)
• Concluding sentence (CS)
>>
• summary of the paragraph / repetition of
topic sentence
A sample paragraph - OUTLINE
* Topic/writing task : Advantages of Learning English
TS: Learning English offers a range of valuable advantages for individuals.
SS1: Firstly, more job opportunities
MD1: primary language for communication.
SS2: Secondly, access to a lot of information on the internet
MD1: websites, books, and articles in English
SD3: Lastly, boost your confidence
MD1: feel more self-assured while communicating in English
CS: In conclusion, learning English can enhance your career prospects, expand
your knowledge, and increase your confidence in various situations.
A sample paragraph
Advantages of Learning English
Learning English offers a range of valuable advantages for individuals. Firstly, it
opens up more job opportunities. Many international companies use English as
their primary language for communication. So, if you know English, you can apply
for jobs in various countries and work with people from different cultures. Secondly,
English gives you access to a lot of information on the internet. Many websites,
books, and articles are in English, so knowing the language helps you learn and
understand more about different topics. Lastly, learning English can boost your
confidence. When you can communicate in English, you feel more self-assured in
situations where English is used. In conclusion, learning English can enhance your
career prospects, expand your knowledge, and increase your confidence in
various situations.
200
!!!! POINTS TO REMEMBER
TITLE
(*Centered & *Capitalized)
INDENT the 1st line of
the paragraph
MARGINS
on every side
Steps for Writing an Academic Paragraph
Writing an academic paragraph involves several important steps to ensure clear and organized
communication of ideas. The first step is to choose a main idea or topic for the paragraph. This is often
stated in a sentence called the topic sentence and it acts as the paragraph's central point. The next step is
to provide supporting details or evidence to explain and develop the main idea. These details can include
examples, facts, or explanations that help the reader understand the topic sentence better. After
presenting the supporting details, it is essential to analyze or explain how these details relate to the main
idea. This helps to deepen the reader's understanding and demonstrates the writer's critical thinking. Finally,
the paragraph can be concluded by summarizing the main point and showing how the supporting details
support it. In brief, this structure helps to create a well-organized and coherent academic paragraph that
effectively communicates the writer's ideas.
MARGINS
on every side
Narrowing down Your Topic
• Narrowing a topic
making it more specific and easier to manage
• To narrow the topic, look for a specific aspect of (or a perspective on) the topic.
1. First, start out with a general topic.
2. Take the topic and break it down into categories.
SAMPLES:
• Broad topic: education
• Narrower topic: online education
• Narrower topic: the quality of online instruction
• Writing task: the advantages / disadvantages of online instruction
(advantage & disadvantage paragraph)
HOW TO NARROW YOUR TOPIC
?
1. Start by writing down your broad topic to identify the main ideas or terms.
?
?
Example: the use of social media
2. Using your list of ideas, try to describe Who, What, Where, When, How, and Why about
your topic to determine specifics.
Example:
?
?
Who: Juvenile, pre-adolescent, adolescent, teenage
?
What: Twitter, Instagram, Facebook
?
Where: Online, in daily life, at school
?
When: Early life, childhood, puberty, young adulthood
?
How: Social, emotional, physical, behavioral
?
Why: Causes, effects
3. Once you have determined which words you’d like to use from the list, combine
aspects of your list to create a narrowed down topic.
?
Adolescent --- Instagram --- social ---- effects
? the effects of using Instagram on the behavior of adolescents
201
2. DEVELOPING IDEAS FOR WRITING A PARAGRAPH
• Brainstorming -- a storm in your brain – a storm of ideas!
• quickly writing down all the thoughts that come into your mind
• simply writing your ideas on paper
• in lists
• in a diagram (mind map, etc.)
• DON’T think about
• your idea(s)
good? OR bad?
• your spelling
correct ? OR incorrect?
• !!REMEMBER: 1st step in writing a paragraph is not writing - it is thinking!!
ORGANIZING THE IDEAS
? BRAINSTORMING: places to live
The USA
Italy
Europe
Korea
cultural diversity
Eskişehir
city
village
quiet
Sydney
location
modern
climate
countryside
history
seaside
London
traditions
population
Pacific
Asia
? CLUSTERING: Organizing and/or grouping
the ideas brainstormed
?
?
?
?
Continents to live: Europe, Asia
Countries to live: the USA, Italy, Korea
Cities to live: Eskişehir, London, Sydney
Reasons why people choose a place to live in: location, climate, cultural diversity
? Cultural Diversity: cuisine, festivals, history and traditions
? Location: village, city, countryside, seaside
? Other features: modern, quiet, population
Here are some techniques you can use
while brainstorming & clustering:
202
OUTLINE
?
WHY you should make an outline before starting to writing the paragraph:
? To let you know if you haven’t included anything necessary or have included
anything unnecessary
? To help you write an organized, focused, and well-developed paragraph.
? ANY MORE IDEAS?
?
!! Stay flexible - change your outline when it is necessary if you have come up
with better ideas to support your main idea while drafting and revising.
SAMPLE: Brainstorming -- “holiday”
• PS: While writing the paragraph,
• you don’t have to use all the ideas written while brainstorming.
• The more you can discard, the stronger will be what you keep. ☺
• you can include additional ideas.
203
BRAINSTORMING >> OUTLINING
BRAINSTORMING
>>>>
OUTLINE
TS: Camping holidays offer several advantages.
SS1: campsites --- connect with nature.
MD: experience the beauty of nature
SS2: not need to book -- greater flexibility
MD: unexpected & exciting adventures
SS3: staying in a tent -- costs less
MD: an affordable option
CS: In summary, camping holidays enable people to
experience nature intimately, offer flexibility in travel
plans, and is a cost-effective way to enjoy a holiday in
no
the great outdoors.
BRAINSTORMING >>
OUTLINING >>
A PARAGRAPH
Camping holidays offer several advantages. Firstly, the campsites
provide a unique opportunity for individuals and families to connect with
nature. Being in the great outdoors allows campers to experience the
beauty of natural landscapes, breathe fresh air, and enjoy the tranquillity
of the wilderness. Additionally, when you go camping, you do not need
to book a place in advance. It allows for greater flexibility in travel plans.
Campers can choose their own destinations, stay as long as they like,
and change locations whenever they want. This spontaneity can lead to
unexpected and exciting adventures. Finally, staying in a tent often costs
less than staying at hotels, so holidaymakers on a low budget may have
an affordable option. In summary, camping holidays enable people to
experience nature intimately, offer flexibility in travel plans, and is a
cost-effective way to enjoy a holiday in the great outdoors.
ACTIVITY: Follow these steps for each topic
given below.
? STEPS:
• 1. Read the topic.
• 2. Brainstorm about the topic. Use any technique you like while brainstorming.
• 3.Circle the ideas that you think are the best ones to include in a paragraph.
• 4. Explain why you want to keep some ideas and why you want to take out others.
? TOPICS:
? Music
? Transport
? Technology
? Health
204
Paragraph Organization
and Topic Sentence
Remember !!!!
►
To start writing an academic paragraph,
Step 1: Identify the topic
►
Think of a topic or look at the topic given.
Step 2: Brainstorm
►
Quickly write down all the thoughts that come into your head.
Step 3: Cluster
►
►
Group the similar ideas you’ve come up with while brainstorming.
Step 4: Make an outline
►
Determine the main idea of the paragraph – What should the paragraph be about?
►
Look at the ideas grouped and arrange your main points in a logical order.
►
Create sub-points for each major idea.
Remember !!!!
205
The Topic Sentence
►
is an introduction to the paragraph.
►
reveals the overall topic of the paragraph and tells the reader what to expect next.
contains only ONE main idea!!!
Things to pay attention to while writing a topic sentence:
►
1. Determine the TOPIC (what to discuss) and CONTROLLING IDEA (how to limit and control the topic)
Topic: smoking
Controlling ideas: harmful for human health in many ways
2. Write a sentence which brings together the topic and the controlling ideas you have chosen.
Example: Smoking (the topic) is harmful for human health in many ways (controlling idea).
3. Check that your topic sentence is a complete sentence. It CANNOT be a question.
Topic
: The importance of being honest
NOT a topic sentence
: Why is it important to be honest?
Topic Sentence
: Being honest is important for two main reasons.
4. Check that your topic sentence expresses an opinion or idea; it does NOT simply announce the topic.
Topic
: Effects of radiation
NOT a topic sentence
: I am going to discuss the effects of radiation.
Topic Sentence
: There are several unpredictable effects of radiation.
Things to pay attention to while writing a topic sentence:
5. Check that your topic sentence is neither too general nor too narrow.
Topic
: Effects of smoking
NOT a topic sentence
: Smoking is a habit. (too general)
NOT a topic sentence
: Smoking can be harmful for a person’s health and it is also
unpleasant to watch someone smoke. (too narrow)
Topic Sentence
: Smoking is harmful for a person’s health in numerous ways.
6. Check that your topic sentence expresses an opinion, NOT a fact.
Topic
: Istanbul
NOT a topic sentence
: Istanbul is the most densely populated city in Turkey. (a fact)
Topic Sentence
: Being the most densely populated city in Turkey, Istanbul has
many problems.
206
Sample Topic Sentences
Smoking is harmful for human health in numerous ways.
►
Being honest is important for three main reasons.
►
There are several unpredictable effects of radiation.
►
Fixing a flat tire on a bicycle is easy if you follow these steps.
►
I strongly agree that using mobile phones in schools should be banned.
Eskişehir and my hometown are similar in several ways.
Topic Sentence
Topic + controlling idea(s)
Cooking requires a number of different skills.
►
It is important to be ready before buying a house.
Having a first child is difficult because of the significant adjustments in your life.
Crime in poverty-stricken areas occurs because of several reasons.
►
There are numerous reasons why pollution in ABC Town is the worst in the world.
ACTIVITY 1: Underline the controlling idea(s) in each
topic sentence below.
►
1. A blind date can be disastrous for several reasons.
►
2. Violence in football destroys the quality of the game.
►
3. Steam can be used in two ways to improve oil production.
►
4. Making a birthday cake is easy if you follow these steps.
►
5. The creativity of pre-school children can be developed with special activities.
207
ACTIVITY 2: Read the following topic sentences and
decide whether they are well-written or not. Rewrite the
ineffective ones.
►
1. People get divorced for a wide variety of reasons.
►
__________________________________________________________
►
2. Colors have a great influence.
►
__________________________________________________________
►
3. Garbage is collected at 7 p.m. every day in Eskişehir.
►
__________________________________________________________
ACTIVITY 3: Choose the best topic sentence for the
following paragraph.
1. __________________________________________ To begin with, good
teachers are patient. They never rush their students. Also, they explain things
without getting bored. In addition, they are organized. For example, they plan what
happens in every class. Good teachers are also encouraging. They help students
understand the subject. Finally, good teachers are fair. They treat all students the
same and approach them equally. In brief, these are some of the most important
qualities of good teachers.
►
a. All good teachers are patient.
►
b. Good teachers have special qualities.
►
c. What qualities do a good teacher have?
►
d. Some teachers are good, but some teachers are not so good.
ACTIVITY 3: Choose the best topic sentence for the following
paragraph.
CONT’
►
2. __________________________________________ First, it could help
improve public services. This means the city could have better schools,
hospitals, and roads. Second, higher taxes might be used to take care of the
environment. For example, the city could invest in cleaner transportation
options and can also use taxes to make the city more beautiful with parks and
gardens. Lastly, raising taxes could also help people who are in need. The city
could use the extra money to provide affordable housing or support those who
have difficulties. In conclusion, raising city taxes has its benefits, like better
services, a cleaner environment, and support for those in need.
►
a. I will write about the reasons for raising taxes.
►
b. City taxes are too high because of several factors.
►
c. City taxes should pay for new roads for many reasons.
►
d. We should raise city taxes for three reasons.
208
ACTIVITY 3: Choose the best topic sentence for the
following paragraph.
CONT’
3. ______________________________________ One important change is that
they have made travel much faster and more accessible. People can now
easily visit different countries for business or leisure. Additionally, airplanes
have helped in transporting goods quickly, so they support global trade. They
have also brought people from different cultures and backgrounds closer,
promoting cultural exchange and understanding. In conclusion, airplanes have
altered the way we travel and connect with the world.
►
a. Most airplanes can fly for a surprisingly long distance with no engine at
all.
►
b. Airplanes can have several negative effects on the environment.
►
►
c. Airplanes have made significant changes to our lives in various ways.
d. Airplanes make efficient and rapid movement across the globe possible.
ACTIVITY 4: Each item in this exercise contains one main idea and a list of major supports.
Write the topic sentences yourself.
►
1. TS: ___________________________________________________________________
Main Idea: reasons why people divorce
Major supports: …. too much conflict
►
…. financial problems ….
domestic violence
2. TS: __________________________________________________________________
Main Idea: study habits
Major supports: …work in a quiet place …underline when reading … look up unknown words
►
3. TS: __________________________________________________________________
Main Idea: unhealthy fast-food: hamburgers
Major supports: …full of fat
…chemicals added
…frozen vegetables used
ACTIVITY 5. Write a topic sentence for each paragraph.
EXAMPLE:
Miami is a great choice for a vacation for several reasons. Firstly, the city has
beautiful beaches where you can relax and have fun. The weather is usually warm,
which is perfect for enjoying the sun and the sea. Secondly, Miami is known for its
exciting activities and attractions. You can visit museums, go shopping, or enjoy
delicious food in different restaurants. There are also many parks and gardens to
explore. Additionally, Miami has a diverse culture, so you can experience new
things and meet people from all over the world. In conclusion, Miami offers a mix of
relaxation, entertainment, and cultural experiences, making it a wonderful place for
a vacation.
209
ACTIVITY 5. Write a topic sentence for the paragraph below.
1.
CONT’
___________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________
One obvious cause is stress.
People have hectic lives and frequently have multiple
stressors everyday, like work, family and money. Another reason for headaches in some
people has to do with diet. Some get headaches because they are dependent on caffeine.
Other people may be allergic to salt, or they may have low blood sugar. The environment
can also cause this uncomfortable condition.
Allergens such as household chemicals
including polishes, waxes, bug killers, and paint can lead to headaches. Lowering stress,
controlling your diet and avoiding allergens can help avoid headaches.
ACTIVITY 5. Write a topic sentence for the paragraph below.
2.
CONT’
___________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
Firstly, a good roommate is respectful and considerate. They should respect each other's
privacy, keep noise levels reasonable, and clean up after themselves in shared spaces.
Being respectful and understanding while communicating with each other is also
important. A good roommate is willing to talk openly about any issues that come up and
work together to find solutions not to disturb each other. Secondly, an ideal roommate is
reliable. They should pay their share of the bills on time and fulfill their responsibilities in
the household. Lastly, having some shared interests can make living together more
enjoyable. For example, if both roommates like similar hobbies or have similar schedules,
it can create a positive living environment. In conclusion, an ideal roommate is respectful,
communicative, reliable, friendly, and shares some common interests, which helps create
a harmonious and pleasant living situation.
ACTIVITY 5. Write a topic sentence for the paragraph below.
3.
CONT’
______________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Initially, insert your ATM card into the machine. Next, punch in your personal
identification number. The third step is to push the button for "withdraw". After you
have entered the amount of cash you want, push the button for the account you
want to use. Take your card and your receipt when you collect the cash. Finally,
count the money to make sure the amount is correct. All in all, when you follow the
steps mentioned above, you can withdraw money from an ATM machine.
210
ACTIVITY 5: Write a topic sentence for the paragraph below.
4.
CONT’
___________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Firstly, both places have a community feel. In my hometown, I know many people
from living there for a long time, and in my college town, I've made new friends and
I see them regularly. This creates a sense of belonging in both places. Additionally,
both towns have parks and recreational areas where people can relax and enjoy
nature. This provides a peaceful environment for spending free time. Furthermore,
not only my hometown but also my college town have stores and restaurants that
offer a variety of goods and cuisines, and this gives me options for shopping and
dining. Overall, the similarities between my hometown and my college town help
me feel comfortable and connected in my new environment.
ACTIVITY 6: Write topic sentences by adding controlling
ideas to the given topics as in the example.
►
Example: Travelling > There are a lot of benefits of travelling comfortably.
►
The internet >>
►
Moving into another city >>
►
Games >>
►
Living in a foreign country >>
ACTIVITY 7: Write the supporting ideas for the given topic
sentence.
►
EXAMPLE:
►
Topic Sentence: Paul has a lot of hobbies.
►
SS 1: playing chess
►
SS 2: drawing
►
SS 3: photography
211
ACTIVITY 7 : Write the supporting ideas for given topic
sentence. CONT’
►
1. TS: I experienced a lot of misfortunes during my vacation.
►
SS 1: ____________________________
►
SS 2: ____________________________
►
SS 3: ____________________________
ACTIVITY 7: Write the supporting ideas for the given topic
sentence. CONT’
►
2. TS: Working part-time while studying at university can have some
disadvantages.
►
SS 1: ____________________________
►
SS 2: ____________________________
►
SS 3: ____________________________
KEY
ACTIVITY 1:
►
1. A blind date can be disastrous for several reasons.
►
2. Violence in football destroys the quality of the game.
►
3. Steam can be used in two ways to improve oil production.
►
4. Making a birthday cake is easy if you follow these steps.
►
5. The creativity of pre-school children can be developed with special activities.
ACTIVITY 2: Possible answers.
►
1. OK
►
2. Colors have a great positive influence on people’s psychology.
►
3. Collecting garbage in Eskişehir makes people’s lives difficult in various ways.
ACTIVITY 3:
1. b
2. d
3. c
212
Supporting Sentence
WRITING SUPPLEMENT 5
Supporting Sentences
support the topic sentence / main idea of the paragraph.
►
● explain:
The reason why people fail is lack of determination and motivation.
● describe:
She lived in a lovely, three-storey house surrounded by a forest.
● give reasons:
Larry finally quit his job because of the stressful working conditions.
● give facts:
More than ten percent of the university’s student population is international.
● give examples: Oranges and grapefruits grow in California.
● define:
My grandmother has a samovar, which is a large copper tea pot.
Supporting Sentences
►
Example: Read the topic sentence below. Then study the types of supporting sentences that
might follow it.
Topic sentence: Young people are too dependent on computers.
Topic
controlling idea
DEFINITION:
►
Dependency on computers means that young people cannot perform the normal tasks and
functions of daily life without them.
EXPLANATION:
►
In the old days, people memorized important information, but today's youth rely on their computers
too much to do assignments, record numbers, and save important information. As a result, they
can find themselves unprepared in an emergency, such as an electrical blackout. Once their
batteries die, these people will not be able to communicate.
EXAMPLE:
►
For example, the students do all their schoolwork on their computers. When their computers crash,
they may fail to complete the assignments or lose the files they have prepared. As a result, they
get a bad grade.
213
Sample Paragraph
New Orleans is a great place to visit for various reasons. First of all, the city is famous for its many good
restaurants. You can eat very well there, especially if you like seafood. New Orleans is also famous for music. Every
spring, there is a great jazz festival, but you can hear good music of many kinds all year around. The last reason
why New Orleans is a great destination to visit is the parades and parties. For example, Mardi Gras takes place in
late winter or early spring when the weather is usually very nice. That is a popular time of the year for a visit to this
wonderful city. If you are looking for a place to visit this spring, you should consider travelling to New Orleans.
►
TS: New Orleans is a great place to visit for various reasons.
►
Topic
3 reasons to support the topic sentence:
►
good restaurants
►
music
►
parades and parties
Controlling idea
supporting
sentences
Some Transitional Words to Use for Supporting Sentences:
One of the most important/significant
advantages is ………..
Firstly / Initially /First of all,
Also,
To begin with / To start with,
Moreover,
Secondly,
Furthermore,
Thirdly,
Besides,
Finally / Lastly / Eventually,
In addition,
The final/ultimate reason for animal
testing is that ………..
Last but not least,
What’s more,
Another striking similarity is ……
Next,
Additionally,
Then
On top of that,
An additional solution to this problem
would be………
After that,
More importantly,
The second step is ………………..
The next drawback of …….. is ……
Afterwards,
ACTIVITY 1: Look at the paragraph below and fill in the blanks with
the correct transitional words from the list below.
in addition
first of all
thirdly
finally
also
A Career in the Sky
If you are searching for an interesting career, becoming a flight attendant may be a good
choice for you for several reasons. _________________, flight attendants receive a large
amount of money for their job. They _________________learn about interpersonal skills,
customer service, and safety. That is why they may have no difficulty dealing with people.
_________________, every time flight attendants go to work, their scenery changes. For
example, they could be in Korea one day and New York the next. Sometimes, they even get
to stay in a city one or two days before flying home. _________________, flight attendants
get bargain prices on airline tickets for vacations. By doing this, they may spend no more than
a few dollars for a flight anywhere in the world. _________________, flight attendants get to
meet a wide variety of people from all over the world. To sum up, for a truly exciting career,
consider becoming a flight attendant because benefits are worth it.
214
ACTIVITY 2: Matching Supporting Sentences with the Correct Topic Sentences.
Topic Sentences:
►
TS 1: Low-fat diets are an excellent way to stay healthy and trim.
►
TS 2: High-protein diets are favored by athletes and competitors.
Supporting Sentences:
►
a. __2__ These foods help build muscles and increase stamina. (fact)
►
b. __1__ They are preferred by the general public because they help with weight reduction. (reason)
►
c. _____ Low-fat diets are recommended by most physicians. (fact)
►
d. _____ Many athletes eat high-protein foods, such as meat, beans, and nuts. (example)
►
e. _____ Low-fat foods include fruits, vegetables, and pasta. (example)
►
f. _____ Because they are easy to find in stores, low-fat foods are convenient. (explanation)
►
g. _____ Athletes generally eat high-protein diets to give them more energy. (reason)
►
h. _____ Crispy steamed vegetables and grilled fish and chicken are all tasty parts of a low-fat, heart friendly
diet. (description)
ACTIVITY 3: Answer the following questions after reading the model paragraph about cycling.
Cycling is a great sport which is growing in popularity
for a variety of reasons. First of all, cycling is an
inexpensive hobby. All you need to buy is a bicycle and a
helmet, and then you are free to go anywhere you like.
For example, you can buy a bicycle for less than $100.
Furthermore, you do not have to pay for membership of a
club or for special equipment, nor do you have to use a
special area when you want to cycle. Therefore, this is
one of the cheapest sports you can do. In addition, cycling
is an activity that is suitable for people of all types and
ages. For instance, even small children can ride a bike, so
it is a sport that the whole family can enjoy together. Also,
this sport can be done anywhere, so people who live in
cities can go cycling too. Moreover, cycling is a very easy
sport. Because it is very easy to learn, you do not need to
have lessons. Also, you do not have to be very fit to start
cycling. Finally, unlike other sports, you do not have to
spend a lot of time learning how to do it before you can
start enjoying yourself. To conclude, if you want a sport
which is cheap, suitable for anyone and easy, then you
should choose cycling.
►
1. What exactly is the topic of this
paragraph? Which sentence tells
you this?
►
2. Underline the controlling idea in
►
3. How many supporting ideas does
►
4. What are these supporting ideas?
►
5. What transition signals does the
the Topic Sentence.
the writer have?
writer use to introduce supporting
ideas?
►
6. What facts or examples are used
to prove the ideas?
ACTIVITY 4: Read the topic sentences below. Then, ask a question about the
topic. Finally, add one or more supporting sentences to each list.
Topic Sentence : İstanbul is the most crowded city in Turkey for some reasons.
Question
: Why is İstanbul the most crowded city in Turkey?
Supporting Sentences : a. People migrate from other parts of Turkey.
b. Students from all over the country come to study at the
universities in the city.
c. It is visited by lots of tourists all the time.
Topic Sentence: Watching television is a good way of improving English.
Question.
: __________________________________________
Supporting Sentences: a. It helps to learn new words.
b. ______________________________
c. _____________________________
Topic Sentence: Prep school students have difficulty writing paragraphs.
Question
: __________________________________________
Supporting Sentences: a. They find it difficult to organize the paragraph.
b. ______________________________
c. ______________________________
215
ACTIVITY 5: For each set of sentences, write TS next for the topic sentence. Write SS
next for the supporting sentences
1. _SS_
a. Mosquitoes are attracted to heat.
_____
b. Mosquitoes will fly several miles to find food.
_____
c. Only the female mosquitoes bite.
_____
d. Mosquitoes are interesting insects.
2._____
a. One of my hobbies is listening to international music.
_____
b. I have a large collection of world music recordings.
_____
c. My friends and I like to introduce each other to new international artists we discover.
_____
d. I enjoy going to concerts by musicians from different countries.
3. _____
a. I take great pleasure from doing winter sports such as skiing and skateboarding.
_____
b. I enjoy going shopping in cold weather.
_____
c. I enjoy the parties and celebrations of the winter holiday.
_____
d. I really like the winter holidays.
ACTIVITY 6: Look at the scrambled sentences given below. Reorder them by choosing one
of them as the topic sentence (TS) and list the others as the supporting sentences (SS).
(Concluding sentence is already given: CS)
I. a. _____ Also, I can stop along the road.
b. _____ Lastly, I can carry as much luggage as I want and not worry about missing flights.
c. _____ When I travel by car, I can look at the scenery.
d. _____ Sometimes I meet interesting people from the area I’m travelling through.
e. _____ Although travelling by plane is easy, I prefer travelling by car for some reasons.
f. __CS_ To conclude, for me, travelling by car has various advantages over other forms of transport.
II. a. _____ As for women, the mother in the traditional family took care of the children’s needs just as the
modern mother does.
b. _____ Similarly, the father in the modern family is expected to do so, too.
c. _____ The traditional family of yesterday and the modern family today have several similarities.
d. _____ For example, the role of the father in the traditional family was to provide for his family.
e. _____ Also, the traditional was a nuclear family and the modern family is, too.
f. _____ Initially, the role of the men and women in both families are alike.
g. _____ In the past, the parents used to live with their children and so do the parents of the modern family.
h. __CS_ In brief, the traditional family and the modern family have some features in common.
KEY
ACTIVITY 1:
1.
First of all 2. also 3. Thirdly
4. In addition
5. Finally
ACTIVITY 2:
c. 1
d.2
e.1
f. 1
g. 2
h. 1
ACTIVITY 4: Answers may vary.
Question: In what ways does watching TV help people improve their English.
Supporting Sentences: b. It provides exposure to the language.
c. It improves learners’ pronunciation.
Question: What factors cause prep students have problems while writing paragraphs?
Supporting Sentences: b. They cannot find relevant reasons and examples to support
the topic sentence
c. Their English is not well enough to express themselves in English.
216
KEY
CONT’
ACTIVITY 3:
1. Topic: Cycling. First sentence/ Topic sentence
2. a great sport which is growing in popularity for a variety of reasons
3. 5
4.
1.inexpensive hobby
2. suitable for people of all types and ages
3. done anywhere
4. a very easy sport
5. Little time spent to learn
5. 1. First of all 2. 3. 4. 5.
6. What facts or examples are used to prove the ideas?
SS1.inexpensive hobby
Only a bicycle and a helmet needed
For example, a bicycle for less than $100
no payment for membership and no special area required. SS2. suitable for people of all types and ages
For instance, - even small children & whole family
SS3. done anywhere
people in cities
SS4. a very easy sport
no need to have lessons to learn
no need to be fit to start
SS5. Little time spent to learn
KEY
CONT’
ACTIVITY 5:
1. a. SS b. SS c. SS d. TS
2. a. TS b. SS c. SS d. SS
3. a. SS b. SS c. SS d. TS
ACTIVITY 6:
I. a. SS -3
II. c. TS - 1
b. SS - 5
f. SS -2
c. SS - 2
d. SS -3
d. SS - 4
b. SS - 4
e. TS - 1
a. SS - 5
f. CS - 6
e. SS - 5
g. SS – 6. h. CS - 7
Concluding Sentence
WRITING SUPPLEMENT 6
217
Concluding Sentence
CONCLUDING SENTENCE
restates the main idea given in the topic sentence
summarizes the paragraph
►
is usually the last sentence of the paragraph.
CONCLUDING COMMENT
●
Suggestion
Opinion:
●
Prediction:
●
●
●
may present the writer’s opinion in the form of a final evaluation of the points discussed.
make a prediction about the future or give a warning about the topic at hand.
Example:
Topic Sentence
Concluding Sentence
Concluding Comment
: Smoking is the cause of several serious diseases.
: Smoking can harm your lungs and heart.
: Everyone should be aware of the dangers of heavy smoking.
ACTIVITY 1: Find the topic sentence (TS), the concluding sentence (CS) and
the concluding comment (CC) in each of the following groups of sentences.
1. _____ A working couple should divide responsibilities.
_____ By sharing the work, they will have more time for leisure activities.
_____ A husband should be willing to help his wife with the children, housework, and shopping.
2. ______ Consumers should be aware of the dangers of such false advertising.
______ These advertisements carry the message that young people can smoke and still be
good-looking, healthy and athletic.
______ Cigarette advertisements try to attract young people in several ways.
The most commonly used transition word to conclude a paragraph:
In short,
To summarize
In conclusion,
All things considered, To sum up,
It can be concluded In summary,
that ….
To conclude, All in all,
Overall,
In short,
In brief,
218
Read the sample paragraphs to see how a paragraph is organized.
Sample Paragraph 1
People in the USA celebrate New Year’s Eve in many ways. The most common
way may be going to a big party with lots of people who they do not know, music and
dancing. At the stroke of midnight, people at these parties celebrate each other’s New
Year’s Eve wholeheartedly. Another way to spend New Year’s Eve is with people they
love. The New Year is greeted by raising their champagne glasses and making new
year resolutions. Sometimes, families with children like to spend the evening together,
letting the kids stay up until midnight. After a big meal, they open each other’s presents
and play games. Finally, some people like to spend the evening by themselves. They
use this time to evaluate the past year and to make new decisions and plans for the
coming year. In short, New Year’s Eve is a special time that can be spent with
friends, with family or even alone.
Sample Paragraph 2
I would prefer to live in the university dormitory for the following
reasons. First, I will be new at the university and meeting people will be easier
in a dormitory setting. They will also be coming from other parts of the country,
and it will be easier to connect there in the dormitory. Second, I will not have to
worry about purchasing and cooking food or cleaning up afterwards. Since
there are people doing my cleaning and preparing food, I do not have to do
them by myself if I were living in an apartment. Consequently, I will have more
time for my studies. Finally, I will be within walking distance of my classes and
the university library. Most dormitories are in or around the campus, so going to
classes and coming back to my room will not take much time. In brief, living
on campus has a lot of advantages.
Sample Paragraph 3
Travelers in the South and West Pacific should always be very careful
of their health by considering the following steps. To begin with, in the
more remote areas one must take special precautions with food and water.
For example, all uncooked food must be washed before eating, and drinking
water must be boiled. Secondly, medication may be taken to prevent some
diseases. For example, bites from disease-carrying mosquitoes can cause
malaria and dengue fever which can be prevented by using repellant,
sleeping in screened rooms, and wearing long-sleeved shirts and pants. In
short, taking these steps will help travelers to avoid some of the health
problems of the area.
219
ACTIVITY 2: Read each paragraph. Then choose the best concluding sentence.
Paragraph 1
The Gift
Last year, for my spring break, my parents surprised me with a wonderful gift—a trip. They
purchased a plane ticket for me to visit my brother in Chicago. He and his wife had recently
welcomed a new baby boy into their family, and I was eager to meet my nephew. I spent a
memorable five days in Chicago, where I had the chance to assist in looking after the baby. I
also pitched in with some household chores, including laundry and cooking. One highlight of
my visit was preparing a delicious stew that my brother absolutely adores. It was a
heartwarming experience to spend quality time with my family, contribute to daily tasks, and
create lasting memories during my trip.__________.
a.
In short, now it is a year later, and my little nephew is learning to walk.
b.
All in all, I tried to help my brother and sister-in-law as much as possible.
c.
To sum up, that trip was a gift from my parents to me and from me to my brother.
ACTIVITY 2: Read each paragraph. Then choose the best concluding sentence.
Paragraph 2
A Wonderful City
I love Florence, Italy, for three reasons. Firstly, Florence is a city which is rich in history and culture.
Everywhere you go, you can see stunning architecture, beautiful art, and historical landmarks that
transport you to another time. Secondly, the food in Florence is amazing. From delicious pasta dishes to
mouthwatering gelato, the culinary experience in Florence is a delight for the taste buds. Lastly, the
people of Florence are incredibly warm and welcoming. During my visits, I've always felt like a part of
the local community, and the friendly atmosphere adds to the charm of this wonderful city. _________
a.
In conclusion, millions of people visit Florence because it is a historic city.
b.
In brief, rich history, tasty cuisine, and friendly residents make Florence one of my favourite places.
c.
To conclude, it is also interesting to learn about the art and architecture of this beautiful city.
ACTIVITY 2: Read each paragraph. Then choose the best concluding sentence.
Paragraph 3
The Power of Television
Television holds a significant place in our lives for several reasons. Firstly, it serves as a powerful source
of information and entertainment. It brings us news from around the world as it keeps us informed about
current events and global issues. Additionally, television offers a wide range of programs, from educational
shows to fascinating dramas, catering to diverse tastes and interests. Secondly, television has the ability to
shape public opinion and influence society. It can throw light on important social and political topics,
provoking discussions and promoting change. Moreover, television serves as a means of escape since it
allows us to relax after a long day. Whether it's a gripping movie or a favorite TV series, television has the
power to transport us to different worlds and provide a welcome break from our daily routines. ___________.
a.
To summarize, personally, I worry about the influence of television people.
b.
In conclusion, television has an important role in our lives as it informs, entertains, and influences us.
c.
In brief, the Internet also has a very big influence on many children today.
220
ACTIVITY 3: Write a concluding sentence for the topic sentences given below.
E.g.: TS: There are different factors which cause air pollution in big cities.
CS: In conclusion, air pollution in big cities may result from fumes from cars,
gases from factories and some chemicals.
1. Drug addiction results from a variety of factors.
_____________________________________________________________________
2. When you plant a tree, you are helping your environment in several ways.
_____________________________________________________________________
3. Studying in another country is advantageous in numerous ways.
_____________________________________________________________________
ACTIVITY 4: Write a topic and concluding sentence for the paragraphs below.
►
1. ____________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________.
First, fast food restaurants are good for people who must have a quick bite
because of their busy schedule. Second, the food is inexpensive, yet tasty. So,
people can have an enjoyable meal out and stay within a limited budget. Finally,
the food is usually consistent. For example, a cheeseburger from a well-known
fast-food restaurant looks and tastes about the same no matter where in the
world it is purchased. ______________________________________________
______________________________________________________________.
ACTIVITY 5: Write a topic and concluding sentence for the
paragraphs below.
2.______________________________________________________________________
_______________. First, you must know the subject area well. For example, to do well on
the TOEFL test, you must be fairly fluent in English. That is, you cannot learn English just
to succeed on the test. Second, you should learn the format and test-taking strategies
used in the TOEFL test. The goal of the test is to weed out non-fluent speakers, so some
of the questions are tricky. If you learn the tricks, you can do better on these types of
questions. Finally, it is a good idea to be rested and alert when you take the test. This
means that studying a lot all night before the test usually does not help.
_______________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________.
221
KEY
ACTIVITY 1:
1. TS, CS, CC
2. CC, CS. TS
ACTIVITY 2:
1. c
2. b 3. b
ACTIVITY 3:
1. To sum up, biological, psychological, and social factors results in drug addiction.
2. In brief, planting trees is a simple yet effective way to contribute positively to the
environment, benefiting both nature and society.
3. In summary, studying in another country offers numerous advantages like language skills,
personal development, career opportunities, and lifelong experiences.
ACTIVITY 4: Answers may vary.
1. Topic Sentence: Fast food restaurants offer several advantages that make them a popular
choice for many people.
Concluding Sentence: In summary, the convenience, affordability, and consistency of fast
food establishments make them a convenient option for individuals with busy schedules and
limited budgets.
2. Topic Sentence: Achieving a high TOEFL score involves meeting various requirements..
Concluding Sentence: Achieving success on the TOEFL test requires a combination of
language proficiency, knowledge of the test format, and the right test-taking mindset.
222
TOPIC SENTENCE
&
CONCLUDING SENTENCE
PRACTICE
WRITING SUPPLEMENT 7
TOPIC SENTENCE
• A topic sentence:
–states the main idea and introduces the reader the topic.
–has two parts: the topic and the controlling idea.
•The topic >> the subject of the paragraph / what the paragraph is about.
•The controlling idea limits the topic telling what you are going to say about the subject.
• Features of a good topic sentence:
– ● controls or guides the whole paragraph
– ● not a general fact that everyone accepts as true
– ● is specific -- not too specific or not too general
– ● has controlling ideas.
Read the following topic sentences. They all contain a topic (in bold) and a
controlling idea (underlined).
• Graduating from high school is important for many different reasons.
• There are many possible contributing factors to global warming.
• To be an effective CEO requires certain characteristics.
• People can avoid burglaries by taking certain precautions.
• There are several advantages to growing up in a small town.
223
ACTIVITY 1: Study the sample paragraph below and answer the
questions.
1. Growing up in a small town offers many advantages. One of the most significant benefits is a strong
sense of community. In small towns, people often know each other well, and this fosters a close-knit
environment where neighbours look out for one another. This sense of belonging can provide comfort
and support during difficult times and make individuals feel more connected to their surroundings.
Additionally, small towns tend to be safer than larger cities, which can be comforting for parents raising
children. Furthermore, small towns often have a slower pace of life and this allows for a more relaxed
and peaceful upbringing. In brief, growing up in a small town can offer a sense of security, a close
community, and a calmer way of life that many find advantageous.
a. Underline the topic sentence.
b. Underline the concluding sentence.
c.Write an alternative topic sentence for the paragraph.
ACTIVITY 1: Study the sample paragraph below and answer the
questions.
2. In today's era, mobile phones have evolved far beyond their original purpose of making calls. Most modern
smartphones are equipped with multifunctional capabilities that greatly enhance their usefulness.They come
equipped with high-quality cameras which enable users to capture vibrant, full-colour photographs and even
record videos of real-life events. Additionally, these devices serve as powerful tools for productivity and
convenience as users can access and manage their emails, browse the Internet, and set alarms to remind
them of important appointments or tasks. Many mobile phones also have built-in calculators to deal with
math problems and offer numerous entertaining games to combat boredom.To sum up, mobile phones have
become an integral part of our daily lives due to the features and functions mentioned above.
• a. Underline the topic sentence.
• b. Underline the concluding sentence.
• c.Write an alternative topic sentence for the paragraph.
ACTIVITY 1: Study the sample paragraph below and answer the
questions.
3. For a long time, garlic has been used for various purposes. The Romans gave garlic to their
slaves to make them strong and to their soldiers to boost their courage. In the Middle Ages,
some folks believed that garlic could ward off witches. In the 18th century, it was thought to have
healing powers for diseases. Even today, some people think that eating garlic can help prevent
colds. To sum up, garlic has a rich history and has been used in many different ways over the
years.
• a. Underline the topic sentence.
• b. Underline the concluding sentence.
• c.Write an alternative topic sentence for the paragraph.
224
ACTIVITY 2: Look at the topics below and write a topic sentence by adding a
controlling idea.
1. Good drivers _________________________________________________________.
2. Public transportation ____________________________________________________.
3.Television ____________________________________________________________.
4. My parents ___________________________________________________________.
5. My first day of school ___________________________________________________.
ACTIVITY 3: Write a topic sentence for the paragraph below.
1.
____________________________________________________________________. To
begin with, English dictionary tells you how to spell and pronounce each word correctly. It also
tells you the meaning of each word. Since many words in English have more than one meaning, a
dictionary gives all of the meanings. In addition, a dictionary identifies the part of speech of each
word. Some English dictionaries also include information about the etymology (origin and
history) of the words. Finally, many dictionaries give synonyms and antonyms of the word you are
looking up. In summary, an English dictionary is of many uses.
ACTIVITY 3: Write a topic sentence for the paragraph below.
2.
_____________________________________________________________________________. First
and foremost, its beautiful beaches, like South Beach, are renowned worldwide for their golden sands and
crystal-clear waters, providing visitors with the perfect setting for relaxation and water activities. Moreover, Miami
boasts a vibrant cultural scene with diverse neighbourhoods like Little Havana, where tourists can immerse
themselves in the rich heritage of the city, sample delicious Cuban cuisine, and enjoy lively music and dance
performances. Additionally, the city's warm climate, especially during the winter months, makes it an attractive
destination for those seeking respite from colder weather.The range of entertainment options, from art galleries
and museums to shopping districts and a bustling nightlife, ensures that there is something for everyone to enjoy
during their holiday in Miami. Overall, Miami's unique blend of natural beauty, cultural richness, and year-round
pleasant weather makes it an appealing choice for a holiday getaway.
225
ACTIVITY 3: Write a topic sentence for the paragraph below.
3.
____________________________________________________________________________.
Firstly, my job is well-suited to my interests and skills, which makes it enjoyable and fulfilling.This sense of fulfilment
contributes to my overall job satisfaction. Secondly, my profession offers a stable income, which is crucial for
supporting my family and achieving financial security.This financial stability provides a sense of comfort and peace
of mind. Additionally, I have the opportunity to continuously learn and grow in my field through training and
development programs that are provided by my organization. This ongoing learning keeps my job interesting and
helps me stay competitive in the ever-changing job market. Finally, the positive relationships I have built with my
colleagues and superiors create a pleasant work environment and this makes me look forward to each day at the
office. In conclusion, my job satisfaction is a result of the alignment between my interests and skills, financial
stability, opportunities for growth, and positive workplace relationships.
ACTIVITY 3: Write a topic sentence for the paragraph below.
4.
____________________________________________________________________________. One
primary function of feathers is to help birds maintain their body temperature. Feathers act as insulation as they
trap warm air close to the bird's body in cold weather and prevent excess heat from escaping in hot weather. This
thermal regulation is essential for a bird's survival. Feathers also play a crucial role in flight.They create the lift and
force necessary for birds to take off, rise, and navigate through the air. Different types of feathers, such as contour
feathers and wing feathers, have specific functions that contribute to a bird's aerodynamic capabilities.
Furthermore, feathers aid in communication and camouflage. Some birds use their colourful feathers to attract
mates or establish territory, while others use patterns and colours to blend into their surroundings and avoid
predators. In summary, feathers are not just decorative; they are essential adaptations that enable birds to grow in
their diverse environments.
ACTIVITY 3: Write a topic sentence for the paragraph below.
5.
____________________________________________________________________________.
Firstly, it allowed me to stay connected with my friends and family back home. I could share updates, photos, and
stories in real-time, making them feel like they were a part of my journey.Additionally,Twitter provided me with a
platform to follow travel influencers and experts who offered valuable tips and recommendations for the places I
visited. This helped me make informed decisions about where to go, what to see, and where to eat. Moreover, I
could keep track of breaking news and updates about my travel destinations, ensuring I stayed informed and safe
throughout my trip. In brief, Twitter enhanced my travel experience by keeping me connected, informed, and
inspired, making it an essential companion during my adventures.
226
ACTIVITY 3: Write a topic sentence for the paragraph below.
6.
_______________________________________________________________. One type of
reality television show is the competition-based program. In these shows, contestants go through a series
of challenges, and whoever wins the most challenges at the end of the seasons gets a big prize. Another
type of popular reality show is the documentary based-type. In these shows, viewers watch people going
about their daily lives and facing everyday challenges. Finally, there are instructional reality shows. For
example, there are shows that can teach you how to cook a delicious meal in thirty minutes or
redecorate your living room without spending too much money. In conclusion, there are a wide variety
of TV shows one can choose from.
ACTIVITY 3: Write a topic sentence for the paragraph below.
7.
__________________________________________________________________________________. One
significant way in which climate affects us is through its influence on our clothing choices. In regions with cold climates, people
often wear heavy and insulated clothing to stay warm, while in hot climates, lightweight and breathable fabrics are preferred
to help stay cool and comfortable. Furthermore, climate plays a crucial role in agriculture and food production.Various types
of crops flourish in particular climates, and alterations in weather patterns can have an impact on the production of crops and
the availability of food Climate also impacts our daily activities and outdoor recreation choices. For instance, people are more
likely to engage in outdoor sports and activities during pleasant weather, while extreme weather conditions can limit such
opportunities.Additionally, climate can have health implications, as extreme heat or cold can pose risks to our well-being. In
summary, the climate is a significant factor in our daily lives as it has far-reaching effects on what we wear, what we eat, how
we spend our time, and even our overall health and safety.
ACTIVITY 3: Write a topic sentence for the paragraph below.
8.
_____________________________________________________________________________. One
of the most important advantages is that it helps to maintain a healthy weight.When we engage in physical activity
regularly, our bodies burn calories, and it can prevent weight gain. Moreover, exercise is essential for maintaining
strong muscles and bones. This is especially crucial as we age, as it can reduce the risk of conditions like
osteoporosis. Regular exercise also plays a role in improving cardiovascular health by strengthening the heart and
lowering the risk of heart diseases. Additionally, it can help control blood sugar levels, which is particularly
important for individuals with diabetes. Beyond the physical benefits, exercise has a positive impact on mental
health. It can reduce stress, anxiety, and symptoms of depression, while also improving mood through the release
of endorphins. In conclusion, regular exercise is a fundamental component of a healthy lifestyle since it offers a
wide range of health benefits that contribute to overall well-being.
227
CONCLUDING SENTENCE
• Concluding sentence
– restates the main idea of the paragraph
– summarizes the main points.
ACTIVITY 4: Write a concluding sentence for the paragraph below.
1.
There are several reasons why I appreciate wearing a uniform to school. Firstly, it simplifies my
morning routine. I do not have to spend precious time selecting an outfit each day. It allows me to
get ready more quickly, so I am punctual for school. Secondly, wearing a uniform promotes a sense
of equality among students. When everyone wears the same clothing, it is easier to focus on
learning and building friendships since nobody is distracted by clothing choices. Additionally,
uniforms can help reduce social pressure and bullying related to fashion and appearance, as
everyone looks the same. Lastly, it inspires a sense of pride and identity in my school.When I wear
my uniform, I feel like a part of a larger school community, and it promotes a sense of belonging
and unity. _________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________
ACTIVITY 4: Write a concluding sentence for the paragraph below.
2.
There are several reasons why I am against wearing a school uniform. Firstly, I believe that
clothing is a way for individuals to express their uniqueness and personality. Wearing a uniform
takes away this freedom of expression since it makes everyone look the same. Secondly, uniforms
can be uncomfortable and impractical, especially during extreme weather conditions. They may
not be suitable for hot summer days or very cold winters due to its negative effect on students'
comfort and focus. Additionally, school uniforms can be costly for parents, as they need to
purchase specific dress for school in addition to regular clothing. Moreover, demanding a strict
dress code can lead to disciplinary issues and unnecessary stress for students. Lastly, I think that
teaching students about individuality and self-expression is important, and uniforms may hinder
this lesson. ______________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________
228
ACTIVITY 4: Write a concluding sentence for the paragraph below.
3.
Credit cards have a lot of advantages. One significant benefit is their convenience.They allow individuals to
make purchases without carrying large amounts of cash and this makes shopping and transactions safer and
more manageable. Credit cards also provide a record of spending, which can help people keep track of their
expenses and budget more effectively. Moreover, credit cards offer a sense of security, as they come with
fraud protection measures, and if a card is lost or stolen, it can be easily cancelled to prevent unauthorized
use. Additionally, credit cards often come with rewards programs, such as cashback or airline miles, which
can provide financial benefits to cardholders. Lastly, using credit cards responsibly can help build a positive
credit history, which is essential for obtaining loans, mortgages, or other financial services in the future.
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
ACTIVITY 4: Write a concluding sentence for the paragraph below.
4.
There are various reasons for global warming. One major contributor is the increased emission of
greenhouse gases into the atmosphere. Human activities, such as the burning of fossil fuels like coal, oil,
and natural gas for energy and transportation, release carbon dioxide and other greenhouse gases into
the air.These gases trap heat from the sun, leading to a rise in the Earth's temperature. Deforestation is
another significant factor as trees absorb carbon dioxide, and when they are cut down or burned, this
stored carbon is released into the atmosphere.Additionally, industrial processes and agricultural practices
also release methane, another potent greenhouse gas, into the air. Finally, changes in land use, such as
urbanization and the expansion of agriculture, contribute to global warming by altering the Earth's
surface and affecting the balance of energy in the climate system. ______________________
____________________________________________________________________________
ACTIVITY 4: Write a concluding sentence for the paragraph below.
5.
Global warming has several negative effects. One of the most noticeable impacts is the rise in
global temperatures. This increase in temperature can lead to more frequent and severe
heatwaves and this may cause discomfort and health risks for people, particularly the elderly.
Additionally, global warming contributes to the melting of polar ice caps and glaciers and it leads
to rising sea levels.This, in turn, can result in coastal flooding, so communities living in low-lying
areas may be forced to move other places. Furthermore, changes in temperature patterns can
disrupt ecosystems and affect wildlife, and this leads to shifts in migration patterns and the
endangerment of certain species. Finally, global warming can also have economic consequences,
such as damage to agriculture due to changing weather patterns and the increased frequency of
extreme
weather
events
like
hurricanes
and
droughts.
_______________________________________________________________________
_______________________________
229
ACTIVITY 4: Write a concluding sentence for the paragraph below.
6.
Cleaning your room is not difficult if you follow some simple guidelines. First and foremost, it is
essential to start with a plan. Decide where to begin and create a checklist of tasks to
accomplish. This can help you stay organized and focused. Secondly, gather all the necessary
cleaning supplies before you start. Having everything you need within reach will save you time
and prevent interruptions during the cleaning process. Thirdly, tidy your space by putting away
items that are out of place.This will make it easier to clean surfaces and floors. Next, clean from
top to bottom by dusting and wiping down surfaces before vacuuming or sweeping the floor.
Finally, do not forget to get rid of waste and recyclable items. __________________________
_______________________________________________________________________
ACTIVITY 5: Write a concluding sentence for each topic sentence given.
1. Stress causes a variety of problems in an individual’s life.
______________________________________________________________________
2. Living with an older person can be a rewarding experience.
_______________________________________________________________________
3.There are many ways to economize on a trip abroad.
_______________________________________________________________________
KEY
ACTIVITY 1:
1. a. Growing up in a small town offers many advantages.
b. Overall, growing up in a small town can offer a sense of security, a close community, and a
calmer way of life that many find advantageous.
c. There are several advantages to growing up in a small town.
2. a. In today's era, mobile phones have evolved far beyond their original purpose of making calls.
b. To sum up, mobile phones have become an integral part of our daily lives due to the features and
functions mentioned above.
c.Today, phones can do a lot more than just make and receive calls.
3. a. For a long time, garlic has been used for various purposes.
b. To sum up, garlic has a rich history and has been used in many different ways over the years.
c. For thousands of years, garlic has had many uses.
230
KEY
CONT’
• ACTIVITY 2: The answers may vary. Possible answers are:
• 1. Good drivers show many features in traffic.
• 2. Public transportation is the best way of travelling for many reasons.
• 3.Television can be advantageous for children.
• 4. My parents are the people I have ever seen in my life.
• 5. My first day of school was not the greatest day of my life.
KEY
CONT’
ACTIVITY 3: The answers may vary. Possible answers are:
1.An English dictionary serves various valuable functions.
2. Miami is often considered one of the top holiday destinations for various reasons.
3. I am quite satisfied with my profession and job for several reasons.
4. Feathers serve multiple vital purposes in a bird's life.
5.Twitter served as a valuable tool during my travels for several reasons.
6. Reality television offers diverse genres.
7. Climate has a profound impact on various aspects of our daily lives.
8. Regular exercise offers numerous health benefits.
KEY
CONT’
ACTIVITY 4: The answers may vary. Possible answers are:
1. In summary, I like wearing wearing a school uniform as it simplifies my daily routine, promotes equality,
reduces social pressures, and strengthens my connection to my school.
2. In conclusion, I believe that there are valid reasons to be against them, including limitations on
self-expression, discomfort, financial burden, potential disciplinary issues, and the hindrance of teaching
individuality.
3. In summary, credit cards offer numerous advantages, including convenience, security, expense tracking,
rewards, and the opportunity to build a strong credit history.
4. In conclusion, global warming is driven by a combination of human activities that release greenhouse
gases and change the Earth's landscape, leading to rising temperatures and climate change.
5. In conclusion, global warming's impacts include temperature rise, sea-level rise, ecological disruption,
and economic challenges.
6. By following these straightforward guidelines, you can make the task of cleaning your room more
manageable and efficient.
231
KEY
CONT’
ACTIVITY 5: The answers may vary. Possible answers are:
1. In conclusion, stress can lead to a range of difficulties in a person's life.
2.To sum up, living with an older person can bring generations closer together as it promotes
mutual understanding, support, and a sense of belonging within the family unit.
3. In summary, there are numerous practical ways to economize on a trip abroad, which
allows travellers to enjoy their experience without overspending.
232
Before we can talk about paragraph unity….
What does ‘Main Idea’ mean?
Quick Review! What does ‘Main Idea’ mean?
The main idea is the author’s idea/ point they are trying to make
about the topic.
● Sometimes the main idea is stated in the topic sentence
○ This is what we do :)
● Sometimes the main idea is implied throughout the paragraph
233
Let’s Practice!
Every morning when Clara arrives at the gym, she is greeted with a lot of warm hellos. She
starts her workout in the weight room, where her exercise program is always brightened up
with lively chats with those around her. She then moves on to the pool, where she stops
and converses with other friends and acquaintances before diving in and swimming. As she
swims, her only focus is the calming sound of her body moving smoothly through the
water — a rare moment in her always very social days.
What does this paragraph talk about consistently?
What is it trying to convey?
Let’s Practice!
Every morning when Clara arrives at the gym, she is greeted with a lot of warm hellos. She
starts her workout in the weight room, where her exercise program is always brightened up
with lively chats with those around her. She then moves on to the pool, where she stops
and converses with other friends and acquaintances before diving in and swimming. As she
swims, her only focus is the calming sound of her body moving smoothly through the
water — a rare moment in her always very social days.
What does this paragraph consistently talk about?
her chats there with friends
What is it trying to convey?
That's the main idea!
Clara’s daily gym visits and
Clara is very sociable and loved by many in her gym.
So back to Paragraph Unity
234
Paragraph Unity means:
● Each paragraph has only ONE main idea.
●
EVERY sentence in the paragraph must connect back to the
main idea.
So what happens if you want to discuss a new
idea?
You start a new paragraph
235
ACTIVITY 1 : Cross out the sentence that does not
support the topic sentence
1. It is interesting to visit foreign countries.
a. You can meet new people.
b. You can eat different kinds of food.
C. You can spend a lot of money.
d. You can see the way other people live.
2. People prefer small cars for a number of reasons.
a. They are cheaper to buy.
b. They use less gas than bigger cars.
c. They are easier to park.
d. They sometimes do not have enough legroom.
3. Different people spend their free time in different ways.
a. A lot of people spend their free time going to movies.
b. Many people enjoy sports.
c. The price of movies has increased recently.
d. Some people prefer to listen to music.
ACTIVITY 2 : Choose two paragraphs that lack
unity. Discuss your reasons.
236
1. The students in my class come from many different parts of the world. Some are from European countries, such as
France, Spain, and Italy. The Italians bring spaghetti to the class. Others are from the Middle East countries like Saudi
Arabia and Israel. Also, other students were born in Asian countries, including Japan and Korea. The largest number of
students is from Latin American countries like Mexico, Venezuela and Peru. Our class is an interesting mix of people
from many different countries.
2. The Japanese automobile industry uses robots in many phases of its production process. In fact, one large
Japanese auto factory uses robots in all of its production stages. Another automobile factory in Japan uses robots to
paint cars as they come off the assembly line. Furthermore, most Japanese factories use robots to weld the parts of
the finished cars together.
3. There are many examples to show that failure in school does not always predict failure in life. Albert Einstein, one of
the world’s geniuses, failed his university entrance examinations on his first attempt. Sir Winston Churchill, who is
considered one of the masters of the English language, had to have special tutoring in English during elementary
school. William Faulkner, one of America’s noted writers, never finished college because he could not pass his English
courses.
4. A curriculum vitae, or CV in short, is a necessary document for anyone in search of employment. It includes
essential information such as the person’s qualifications, work experience and other relevant details. For many jobs,
employers wish to see that candidates have at least one leisure time activity which can be incorporated into their work.
As it is so important, it is best to make sure that it is properly laid-out and presented.
ACTIVITY 3 : Read the paragraphs below and cross
out the irrelevant sentence in each group.
1.(I) I love the location of my new house for many reasons. (II) First, it is a very safe
neighbourhood, and there is almost no crime, and most people do not even lock their
doors. (III) Second, there are many stores, schools, restaurants, a library, a health and
fitness centre and a movie theatre nearby. (IV) Third, I really dislike the people in the
neighbourhood because they are unfriendly and have different lifestyles. (V) Some people
say location is very important when you are looking for an apartment and I agree.
237
2.(I) Africa is a very interesting and natural continent. (II) My favourite animal is the
cheetah. (III) It is truly an amazing creature, and it can run at a top speed of 60 mph! (IV)
I have always wanted to go to Africa to see them in action. (V) I think it will be a
wonderful experience looking at those cheetahs when they are running.
3.(I) Picasso was a very talented painter. (II) He was born in Malaga in 1881 as
the son of a painter. (III) The name of his opera is still unknown. (IV) When he was
thirteen years old, his teachers said that he was very good at drawing. (V) At the
age of thirty, he was a great artist but not a modern painter yet.
4.(I) I think speaking languages is important nowadays. (II) There are more than two
thousand languages in the world. (III) When you speak more languages, it is better,
especially for your career. (IV) If you know a foreign language, it puts you in touch with
other lifestyles and cultures. (V) Therefore, it could change your life in some positive
ways.
238
KEY
Activity 1: 1. c
2. d 3. c
Activity 2:
1. The Italians bring spaghetti to the class.
4. For many jobs, employers wish to see that candidates have at least one leisure time activity which can be incorporated
into their work.
Activity 3:
1. (IV) Third, I really dislike the people in the neighbourhood because they are unfriendly
and have different lifestyles.
2. (I) Africa is a very interesting and natural continent.
3. (III) The name of his opera is still unknown.
4. (II) There are more than two thousand languages in the world.
239
Paragraph Cohesion & Coherence
In writing, cohesion and coherence make the the
paragraph easy to follow and understand.
Paragraph cohesion refers to the linkers (both grammatical and
lexical) that gives the text meaning and help it flow.
There are THREE ways to do this:
● Repeat key nouns
● Use consistent pronouns
● Use transition words/ transition signals to connect ideas together
240
REPEAT KEY NOUNS
It is important to keep using the nouns and phrases that are
connected to the topic throughout the paragraph.
● You can do this by using the same word, synonyms, and
pronouns
○ Variety is also important
Example : It is not so easy to understand the reason why cats suddenly attack any object
around them. Cats can suddenly hit a mug with their paws while laying down. This can
even happen when you think they are sleeping.
What is the key noun in the example below? Which words refer
to that noun?
Music is universal and it can awaken anyone’s feelings or
emotions regardless of the time or place. The sound and melody
can connect a person to a memory in an instant, transporting
them to the past. Music is not only an amazing way to express
feelings, but it can also create amazing experiences.
What is the key noun in the example below? Which words refer
to that noun?
Music is universal and it can awaken anyone’s feelings or
emotions regardless of the time or place. The sound and melody
can connect a person to a memory in an instant, transporting
them to the past. Songs are not only an amazing way to express
feelings, but they can also help us remember special experiences.
241
REMEMBER THIS:
● Variety is also important. If you repeat the same words over and over
again, then the paragraph becomes boring and less coherent.
● To avoid this make sure you are using synonyms, determiners, and
pronouns.
USE CONSISTENT PRONOUNS it, they, these, those, this, etc…
It is important to make sure that the pronouns clearly refer back to the key
noun.
● You can do this by using the same person and number throughout the
paragraph
○ Change of person : changing from ‘it’ to ‘he’
○ Change of number : changing from ‘it’ to ‘they’
● Make sure that each sentences starts with a reference back to the key
noun
Example : When scientific experiments do not work as expected, it does not mean that
they are failures. Some other scientists also try them again and they can get different
results.
EXAMPLE PARAGRAPH: These paragraphs are an example of how to
make a paragraph more coherent by replacing the key word with
a pronoun / determiner / synonym when necessary.
242
Identify the main noun and the pronouns, determiners, and synonyms used.
The Importance of English Language
English has become an international language. Except for Chinese, more people
speak it than any other language. Spanish is the official language of more countries in the
world, but more countries have this language as their official or unofficial second
language. More than seventy per cent of the world’s mail is written in English. In
international business, the language is used more than any other language, and it is the
language of airline pilots and air traffic controllers all over the world. Moreover, although
French used to be the language of diplomacy, English has replaced it. Therefore, unless
you plan to spend your life alone on a desert island in the middle of the Pacific Ocean, you
should learn English because it is a useful language to know.
Identify the main noun and the pronouns, determiners, and synonyms used.
The Importance of English Language
English has become an international language. Except for Chinese, more people
speak it than any other language. Spanish is the official language of more countries in the
world, but more countries have this language as their official or unofficial second
language. More than seventy per cent of the world’s mail is written in English. In
international business, the language is used more than any other language, and it is the
language of airline pilots and air traffic controllers all over the world. Moreover, although
French used to be the language of diplomacy, English has replaced it. Therefore, unless
you plan to spend your life alone on a desert island in the middle of the Pacific Ocean, you
should learn English because it is a useful language to know.
Identify the main noun and the pronouns, determiners, and synonyms used.
Many people think that global warming is the biggest danger today. They argue
that it is a threat not just for us, but also for the next generations. It means it is a
danger for our future. One effect of global warming is there will not be enough
food to feed the world in the near future.
243
Identify the main noun and the pronouns, determiners, and synonyms used.
Many people think that global warming is the biggest danger today. They argue
that it is a threat not just for us, but also for the next generations. It means it is a
danger for our future. One effect of global warming is there will not be enough
food to feed the world in the near future.
USE TRANSITION WORDS / SIGNALS TO LINK IDEAS
It is important to make sure it is clear IF the idea of a new sentence
is connected to or referencing a previous sentence or idea.
● You can do this by using transition words / signals
○ Words like : however, therefore, in addition, also, but,
moreover, etc
● Some transitions show a continuing connection and some
show a contrasting connection.
○ Make sure you are using the right connection
● REMEMBER : Not every sentence needs to start with a
transition word
Example : Can you find the transitions?
I like autumn, but autumn is also a sad time of the year. The colour of the
leaves change into red and the weather is mild, but I cannot stop thinking
about the winter and ice storms waiting for us. In addition, we will all
have dry skins, wear too many layers of clothes, and clean all the snow
from the top of our cars and the entrance of our houses.
244
Example : Can you find the transitions?
I like autumn, but autumn is also a sad time of the year. The colour of the
leaves change into red and the weather is mild, but I cannot stop thinking
about the winter and ice storms waiting for us. In addition, we will all
have dry skins, wear too many layers of clothes, and clean all the snow
from the top of our cars and the entrance of our houses.
ACTIVITY 1 : The paragraph lacks coherence. Try to
make the paragraph more coherent by replacing the key
word with a pronoun / determiner / synonym when
necessary.
Monticello- a famous site
One of the most famous houses in the United States is Monticello.
Monticello was the home of Thomas Jefferson, the third president of the United
States. Located on a hill in Virginia, Monticello has a beautiful view of the
surrounding countryside. Monticello is famous, first of all, because Monticello
belonged to a president. Monticello is also a fine example of early
nineteenth-century American architecture. Jefferson designed Monticello himself
in a style he had liked in Italy. Perhaps, these two reasons make Monticello a very
much appreciated house.
245
Monticello- a famous site
One of the most famous houses in the United States is Monticello.
Monticello was the home of Thomas Jefferson, the third president of the United
States. Located on a hill in Virginia, Monticello has a beautiful view of the
surrounding countryside. Monticello is famous, first of all, because Monticello
belonged to a president. Monticello is also a fine example of early
nineteenth-century American architecture. Jefferson designed Monticello himself
in a style he had liked in Italy. Perhaps, these two reasons make Monticello a
very much appreciated house.
ACTIVITY 2 : This paragraph also lacks
coherence because there are too many vague
pronouns. Try to fix the pronoun problem
The Benefits of Running
Running has many positive effects on the body. First of all, it increases the
efficiency of the heart and lungs. For example, it helps lower blood pressure and
prevents heart attacks. As another example, thanks to it, lungs deliver more
oxygen to the cells and breathing is easier. Secondly, it helps people lose fat and
become fit. To illustrate, it allows a person to burn 100 calories each mile he or
she runs. Finally, it helps the body become more mechanically efficient. For
example, it helps to develop and tone muscles in the arms, legs, back, neck and
shoulders. In summary, it results in people being healthy.
246
The Benefits of Running
Running has many positive effects on the body. First of all, it increases the
efficiency of the heart and lungs. For example, it helps lower blood pressure and
prevents heart attacks. As another example, thanks to it, lungs deliver more
oxygen to the cells and breathing is easier. Secondly, it helps people lose fat and
become fit. To illustrate, it allows a person to burn 100 calories each mile he or
she runs. Finally, it helps the body become more mechanically efficient. For
example, it helps to develop and tone muscles in the arms, legs, back, neck and
shoulders. In summary, it results in people being healthy.
ACTIVITY 3 : In this paragraph the pronouns
are not consistent. Correct them and pay attention
to subject - verb agreement.
Many students feel that learning to write is a useless, time-consuming
tasks that have little to do with “real life”- that is, with their future
occupations. These may be true if he/she plans to become car mechanics or
waiters or waitresses, but it is certainly not true if you plan to have a
white-collar job. No matter what profession you choose- business,
engineering, government- they will have to write.
247
Many students feel that learning to write is a useless, time-consuming
tasks that have little to do with “real life”- that is, with their future
occupations. These may be true if he/she plans to become car mechanics or
waiters or waitresses, but it is certainly not true if you plan to have a
white-collar job. No matter what profession you choose- business,
engineering, government- they will have to write.
Paragraph coherence means that the sentences hold the paragraph
together. To do this, the paragraph needs:
● Logical Sequence
○ No jumps from one sentence to the next
● Clear Organization
○ The order of the sentences makes sense and is easy to
understand
■ first, second, third …
■ most important – least important
ACTIVITY 4 : Read the first draft and discuss
the questions and how to fix the coherence.
248
First Draft
Learning styles change from student to student. As a result, learning a new thing
changes from person to person. Some students learn better when they read. These students
read stories, texts, problems, formulas or rules of a specific lesson. They do not forget this
audio input easily. For example, when they go home and revise the lessons, they rewrite
the things they learned at school. They do not have to write by hand. Then, they learn it
quicker than others because their reading style makes their learning permanent. Some
others learn by listening. These students remember the songs, the news they hear on the
TV or radio, the conversations or listening texts better. Writing is also effective when they
work on the computer and type the notes. Also, they are more successful in exams when
they remember the knowledge they listened to. Some students learn by writing. They
prefer to write and copy the things they study.
1. What is the topic of the paragraph?
2. Are all the details related to the topic?
3. Does it have necessary linkers? Give examples.
4. Are there any synonyms and pronouns?
examples.
Give
5. Is there a logical flow of ideas?
Learning styles change from student to student. As a result, learning a new thing changes from
person to person. Some students learn better when they read. These students read stories, texts,
problems, formulas or rules of a specific lesson. They do not forget this audio input easily. For
example, when they go home and revise the lessons, they rewrite the things they learned at school.
They do not have to write by hand. Then, they learn it quicker than others because their reading style
makes their learning permanent. Some others learn by listening. These students remember the songs,
the news they hear on the TV or radio, the conversations or listening texts better. Writing is also
effective when they work on the computer and type the notes. Also, they are more successful in exams
when they remember the knowledge they listened to. Some students learn by writing. They prefer to
write and copy the things they study.
Now look at the second draft and discuss the same
questions.
249
1. What is the topic of the paragraph?
2. Are all the details related to the topic?
3. Does it have necessary linkers? Give examples.
4. Are there any synonyms and pronouns?
examples.
Give
5. Is there a logical flow of ideas?
SECOND DRAFT: Learning styles change from student to student. Some students learn better
when they read. These students read stories, texts, problems, formulas or rules of a specific
lesson. Then, they learn it quicker than others because their reading style makes their learning
permanent. Some others learn by listening. These students remember the songs, the news they
hear on the TV or radio, the conversations or listening texts better. They do not forget this audio
input easily. Also, they are more successful in exams when they remember the knowledge they
listened to. Some students learn by writing. They prefer to write and copy the things they study.
For example, when they go home to revise the lessons, they rewrite the things they learned at
school. They do not have to write by hand. Writing is also effective when they work on the
computer and type the notes. As a result, learning a new thing changes from person to person.
ACTIVITY 5 : Read the first draft and discuss the
questions. With a partner write the second draft.
1. What is the topic of the paragraph?
2. Are all the details related to the topic?
3. Does it have necessary linkers? Give examples.
4. Are there any synonyms and pronouns?
examples.
Give
5. Is there a logical flow of ideas?
Having a dog is harder than it looks. The owner must take responsibility for the safety of the dog
because the dog cannot protect itself from every unfortunate situation. Playing with the dog, chilling
together or slowly petting the dog’s head will make the dog feel calm and comfortable. It will also
contribute to the dog’s health and safety positively. It is very important to create a safe environment for
the dog’s life and health.That is why somebody has to provide the dog with the opportunities in order
to keep it healthy. Owning a dog is not as easy as it seems. The dog owner must take care of the daily
needs of the dog such as food and regular exercise every day. The owner must also pay attention to the
happiness of the dog. The dog cannot meet all of the needs all while living at a house or in a garden. As
well as meeting the basic needs of the dog, the owner must also show love to the dog.
250
PROCESS PARAGRAPH
WRITING SUPPLEMENT 11
Process Analysis Paragraph
● A process paragraph
gives instructions for how to do something
e.g. how to make a cake, plan a party, study for an exam,
change a flat tire, etc.
explains how something works or happens
e.g. how a hurricane happens, etc.
●
Every step must be included and presented in the correct order.
Your paper should keep moving forward through the process to get to the end.
Each step must be distinct and different from the previous step.
To have a more impersonal approach
●Use imperatives, modals and passive voice to explain the steps, tips, or stages:
●a. Imperative use: You can use imperatives especially when you give instructions for how to do something
●Example: How to Cook an Egg
○
First, get a pot big enough to hold one egg. Second, fill the pot 4/5 full with water. Then put in the egg. After that, put the pot on
the stove. Then turn the heat to high, and wait until the water boils. Next, boil the egg in the water for three minutes. Finally, take
the egg out of the pot and put it in an egg cup and eat it.
●b. Passive voice use: You can use the passive voice to show how an action is done. By using the passive voice, one
avoids saying who or what does the action.
○
Example: How to Cook an Egg
■
First, a small pot is filled 4/5 full with water. Second, the egg is placed in the water. Then the pot of water is put on the stove
and the heat is turned to high. When the water is boiling, the egg is boiled for three minutes. Finally, the egg is taken out of the
pot and put into an egg cup, and eaten.
●c. Modal verb use: You can use modals to give suggestions, emphasize certain steps, and give instructions.
■
If one likes hard-boiled eggs better than soft-boiled eggs, the egg should be boiled for five minutes. You can let the egg stand
in hot water for two more minutes to be sure it is hard enough. You must cook the egg for more than four minutes.
251
Process Paragraph Organization
TITLE
● TOPIC SENTENCE
○ STEP 1
○ STEP 2
○ STEP 3
○ …
● CONCLUDING SENTENCE
How to Cook an Egg
Topic sentence
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
You can cook a perfectly boiled egg for breakfast if you follow these easy six
steps. First, get a pot big enough to hold one egg. Then fill the pot 4/5 full with
water and place the egg in the water. Next, put the pot of water on the cooker and
turn the heat to high. When the water is boiling, boil the egg for three minutes.
Finally, take out the egg of the pot and put it into an egg cup. By following the
Step 5
steps above, you can enjoy a delicious egg for breakfast.
Step 4
Concluding sentence
MODEL PROCESS PARAGRAPH 1
Making a Bed
Making your bed is quick and easy. First, pull everything off your bed. Next, put the
sheet with the curved corners over the mattress and tuck the edges down under the mattress so
the mattress is completely covered and the sheet is smooth. Then put the top sheet over the
mattress sheet so that it covers it completely and hangs down evenly on all sides except the
head. After that, lay your blanket or quilt evenly over the top sheet. Finally, fold back the
blanket or quilt and the top sheet at the head and put your pillow or pillows on top of the
mattress sheet. By following these steps, you can have a tidy bed in less than two
minutes and with very little effort.
252
MODEL PROCESS PARAGRAPH 2
Breaking up with a boyfriend or girlfriend can be easier said than done, but here are
five steps that may help the breaking up process. First, try to distance yourself by
suddenly becoming busier than usual. Whenever s/he calls, tell him/her that you are busy and
you cannot talk. The next step is to calmly tell the other person how you are feeling and
gently let him or her know that you do not want to be together anymore. Another step might
be to make sure to be sensitive of his or her feelings and answer any questions that he or
she may have. For example, if the person starts to cry, use kind words to help comfort him or
her. After everything is said and done, take some alone time for yourself because everyone
has feelings to sort out after a break up. Finally, go out with friends and meet new people.
This may help you not to overthink about the breaking up experience and help you carry on.
By following these five steps, both parties can have a smoother breaking up process.
MODEL PROCESS PARAGRAPH 3
There are some important steps that you must do to keep a healthy lifestyle. Firstly, you
should make sure that you eat and drink healthy food. For example, you should stay away from
fatty foods like fast food, and you shouldn’t drink acidic drinks. Secondly, you should drink
enough water every day to meet your body’s needs. About 2,5-3 liters of water will be enough,
but it may vary from person to person. Then you should get enough and regular sleep each
day. So, you have to be careful not to change your sleeping hours. After that, you should be
physically active and work out your muscles every day. For instance, you can go for a walk
regularly. Finally, you should stay away from bad habits like smoking, alcohol abuse, technology
addiction and so on. By following these steps mentioned above, you will keep a healthy lifestyle
and
lead
a
happy
life.
ACTIVITY 1. Please look at the Model Paragraph 3 on the previous
slide and make an outline.
TOPIC SENTENCE:
? STEP 1: Firstly, -- eat and drink healthy food
? STEP 2: __________, -- _______________________________________________________
? STEP 3: __________, -- _______________________________________________________
? STEP 4: __________, -- _______________________________________________________
? STEP 5: __________, -- _______________________________________________________
CONCLUDING SENTENCE:
253
TRANSITIONS
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
Third,
Finally,
Next,
At last,
Then,
The last step is…..
Second,
At first/First,
Afterward,
To begin with,
Next,
Initially,
Then
To start with,
The second step is….
The first step is….
Subsequently,
Afterwards,
The third step is….
Later,
Following that,
When this stage is
finished,
Pay attention to sequential / chronological order using transitions
ACTIVITY 2. Fill in the blanks with correct transitions from the list. There are some extras.
The next step is
Initially
At last
Afterwards
Secondly
Then
It is easy to wash the dishes if you follow certain steps. First, scrape or pour all leftover
food from each pot, pan, knife, fork, spoon, chopstick, plate, dish, bowl, glass or cup.
_______________1, run each item under water to remove any food still sticking to it.
_______________2 to pour a little dishwashing liquid into a cup or bowl and add enough water
to give each item enough soap and water to cover each surface. _______________3, dip a dish
brush, sponge or dishcloth in the soapy water and scrub an item until it is completely free of
food and oil, then repeat this step for all the items you need to wash. _______________ 4, rinse
each item under running water until it is completely free of soap suds. _______________ 5,
place each item in a drying rack to dry. Carefully following each stop of this easy process will
guarantee spotless dishes every time.
ACTIVITY 3. Fill in the blanks with correct transitions from the list. There are some extras.
The third step
Next
After
Finally
Initially
When
How to Use an ATM Machine
In order to withdraw money from an ATM machine, one should follow some certain steps.
_______________1, insert your ATM card into the machine. _______________2, punch in
your personal identification number. _______________3 is to push the button for "withdraw".
_______________4 you have entered the amount of cash you want, push the button for the
account you want to use. Take your card and your receipt _______________5 you collect
the cash. _______________6 , count the money to make sure the amount is correct. By
following the steps above, you can easily withdraw money from an ATM machine.
254
Writing Topic Sentences for Process Paragraphs
● The topic sentence of a process paragraph must identify the process and often
tells something about it. Study the examples:
○ There are certain steps to follow if you want to quit smoking in a short time.
○ It is fairly easy to prepare a well-organized wedding party by taking some
tips into consideration.
○ There are several stages to follow in the process of sending a message by
email.
○ Making a good cup of Turkish coffee is very simple if a series of steps are
followed.
○ Decorating a birthday cake is fun and easy if you follow these steps.
ACTIVITY 4. Write a topic sentence for the following paragraphs.
●Paragraph 1
______________________________________________________________________________
________________. First, put three or four tablespoons of oil in a large heavy pot. Next, heat the
oil on a high flame until one kernel of popcorn pops when you drop it into the hot oil. When the oil
is hot enough, pour one-quarter cup of popcorn into the pot and cover it with a lid. Following that,
reduce the flame to medium and begin to shake the pot gently. Continue shaking the pot until all
the corn has popped. The last step is to empty the popcorn into a large bowl and add melted
butter and salt. By following these steps, you can enjoy delicious pop corn.
●Paragraph 2
_____________________________________________________________________________
______________. First, fill a clean vase with water. Second, cut most of the flowers and greens
so they are approximately two times the height of your vase. Then, cut a couple of the flowers two
inches longer. After you finish cutting the flowers, you can begin to put the greens in the vase. Put
the longest flowers in the center of your arrangement. Then take a few steps back and admire
your bouquet.
ACTIVITY 5. Write a concluding sentence for the following paragraph.
There are some specific steps involved in writing a good paragraph. The first step is brainstorming.
Writers can use some techniques like free-writing, mind-mapping and outlining to help them brainstorm.
In this first stage, it’s important for a writer not to edit but to let ideas flow and to simply get them down
on paper. Subsequently, the first draft is written. This is the step where the writer’s ideas start to come
together and take shape. There may be some grammatical errors or other small mistakes in the first
draft since many writers just try to put their ideas on paper before editing their mistakes. The first draft is
also where writers should develop a topic sentence or thesis to guide the structure of their essay. Finally,
there is the last step called the final draft. This is when writers edit their work. Writers should take care at
this stage that all sentence structures and punctuations are correct, and that their work is formatted
correctly. __________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________.
255
ACTIVITY 6: Paragraph Editing
Please study the paragraph below. Then find and correct the
mistakes.
How To Quit A Bad Habit
Quitting a bad habit can be challenging, but it is definitely possible if you follow certain
steps. First of all, Start by identifying the habit you want to quit and understanding why it's
harmful or undesirable. The second step, set a specific and achievable goal for quitting your
bad habit as having a clear target will give you direction, motivation. Pay attention to
situations, emotions, or people that trigger your bad habit, so you can develop strategies to
avoid or cope with them. Then replace with a positive habit. It is often easier to quit a bad
habit when you replace them with a healthier one. Finally, create a detailed plan with
actionable steps and track your progress by keeping journals. You shouldn’t give up until you
achieve your goal. To conclude, you can easily quit your bad habits by applying this steps
above.
PRACTICE 1: Read the provided information in the outline about the
STEPS of making tea and write a well-developed process paragraph
by adding necessary details.
Topic sentence
Step 1
● gather the necessary ingredients and equipment
Step 2
● fill the kettle with fresh, cold water to boil the water
Step 3
● add the desired amount of tea leaves or tea bags
Step 4
● carefully pour the water over the tea leaves or tea bags in
the teapot when it boils
Step 5
● allow the tea to steep for the appropriate time
- black tea - 3-5 minutes while green tea - 2-3 minutes.
Step 6
● pour the brewed tea into cups and, if desired, add milk,
sugar, honey, or lemon to taste
Concluding sentence
In your paragraph, make sure to include:
• topic sentence
• concluding sentence
• steps in the process
• correct order of the steps
Pay attention to:
• the content
• the organization
• the accuracy of the language
• mechanics use of transitions
PRACTICE 2:
● Write a well-developed process paragraph about ONE of the given topics below.
○ How to
■ * learn foreign languages effectively
* prepare for an exam
■ * open a bank account
* make a cake
■ * download an app
* style your hair at home
● Please remember to brainstorm, cluster the ideas you get and make an outline
for the topic you have chosen before starting to write the paragraph.
● Please pay attention to the followings
In your paragraph, make sure to include:
• topic sentence
• concluding sentence
• steps in the process
• correct order of the steps
Pay attention to:
• the content
• the organization
• the accuracy of the language
• mechanics use of transitions
256
PRACTICE - STEPS:
1. Choose a topic from the list and brainstorm the ideas.
2. Cluster the ideas from the brainstorming.
3. Make an outline
TOPIC SENTENCE:
______________________________________________________________________________________________
STEP 1: __________, --_________________________________________________________
STEP 2: __________, --_________________________________________________________
STEP 3: __________, --_________________________________________________________
STEP 4: __________, --_________________________________________________________
STEP 5: __________, --_________________________________________________________
STEP … : __________, --_________________________________________________________
CONCLUDING SENTENCE:
_______________________________________________________________________________________
4. Now, you can start writing the paragraph about the topic you have chosen.
KEY
ACTIVITY 1
●
●
TOPIC SENTENCE: There are some important steps that you must do to keep a healthy lifestyle.
○
STEP 1: Firstly, -- eat and drink healthy food
○
STEP 2: Secondly, -- drink enough water
○
STEP 3: Then -- enough and regular sleep
○
STEP 4: After that, -- be physically active
○
STEP 5: Finally, -- stay away from bad habits
CONCLUDING SENTENCE: By following these steps mentioned above, you will keep a healthy lifestyle and lead a happy life.
ACTIVITY 2.
1. Secondly
2. The next step is
3. Afterwards
4. Then
5. At last
ACTIVITY 3.
1. Initially
2. Next
3. The third step
4. When/After
5. Afte/Whenr
6. Finally
ACTIVITY 4.
Paragraph 1: It is very easy to make popcorn by following these steps.
Paragraph 2: Making a beautiful flower arrangement is fairly simple if certain steps are followed.
KEY
ACTIVITY 5:
Concluding Sentence:
ACTIVITY 6:
It should be 1 paragraph, not 3 paragraphs.
How To Quit A Bad Habit
Quitting a bad habit can be challenging, but it is definitely possible if you follow
certain steps. First of all, start by identifying the habit you want to quit and
understanding why it’s it is harmful or undesirable. The second step, is to set a
specific and achievable goal for quitting your bad habit as having a clear target will
give you direction and motivation. Afterwards, pay attention to situations, emotions,
or people that trigger your bad habit, so you can develop strategies to avoid or cope
with them. Then replace with a positive habit. It is often easier to quit a bad habit when
you replace it with a healthier one. Finally, create a detailed plan with actionable steps
and track your progress by keeping journals. You should not give up until you achieve
your goal. To conclude, you can easily quit your bad habits by applying this these
steps above.
257
MODEL ANSWER FOR PRACTICE 1
Making tea is a simple and enjoyable process. Firstly, gather the necessary ingredients
and equipment, including tea leaves or tea bags, water, a teapot, and a kettle. Secondly, fill
the kettle with fresh, cold water and place it on the stove or turn on the electric kettle to boil.
Next, add the desired amount of tea leaves or tea bags to the warmed teapot. Once the
water reaches a rolling boil, carefully pour it over the tea leaves or tea bags in the teapot.
Allow the tea to steep for the appropriate time, depending on the type of tea and personal
preference. Typically, black tea requires 3-5 minutes of steeping, while green tea may need
2-3 minutes. Finally, pour the brewed tea into cups and, if desired, add milk, sugar, honey,
or lemon to taste. Now, sit back, relax, and enjoy your freshly brewed cup of tea.
Remember to be cautious with hot water and teapot handles to prevent accidents while
making your tea.
258
ADVANTAGE & DISADVANTAGE
PARAGRAPHS
WRITING SUPPLEMENTS 12-13
ADVANTAGE
PARAGRAPH
●
Aim of writing an advantage paragraph:
○
●
To persuade or inform someone about a topic & make a decision
Advantage Paragraph Structure
○
Topic sentence
■ Supporting sentence 1 – advantage 1
● Minor detail(s) – examples / explanations / statistics, etc.
■ Supporting sentence 2 – advantage 2
● Minor detail(s) – examples / explanations / statistics, etc.
■ Supporting sentence 3 – advantage 3
● Minor detail(s) – examples / explanations / statistics, etc.
○
Concluding sentence
■ (In summary/To summarize/In brief/In conclusion/To conclude…)
259
ACTIVITY 1: Which words/phrases in the box below are alternative ways of
referring to advantages (+) and disadvantages (-)?
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
a drawback (of)
the downside (of)
a good point
a limitation
a benefit (of)
a negative aspect (of)
a positive aspect (of)
the harm (of)
Writing Topic Sentences for Advantage Paragraphs
●
The topic sentence of an advantage paragraph
○ tell your readers
●
it is an advantage paragraph
The phrases you can use while writing a topic sentence
○ advantage/advantageous, benefit/beneficial, a positive aspect, etc.
●
Examples:
○ There are three main advantages of living on a university campus.
○ Living on a university campus offers three main advantages to students.
○ Living on a university campus offers three main benefits to students.
○ Living on a university campus is advantageous for students.
Sample topic sentences:
● The implementation of renewable energy sources offers several
environmental and economic benefits.
● Globalization has brought about a variety of advantages for businesses.
● The advent of online shopping has brought numerous advantages.
● Innovations in agriculture have led to significant advantages.
● Social media platforms provide numerous positive points to youngsters.
260
Writing Supporting Sentences for Advantage Paragraphs
________ advantage of…
●
The first
●
The second
●
The main
●
The most important
●
One major
●
Another
●
A further
Topic sentence
● First, / Firstly, / First of all, / In the
first place, /Initially, / To begin
with, / To start with,
● Second, / Secondly,
● Besides, / In addition (to this),
● Furthermore, / What’s more/
Moreover,
● Finally,
Model Paragraph 1
Supporting
sentence 1
Having a part-time job while studying can offer numerous advantages. Firstly, it provides students with a
valuable opportunity to gain practical work experience and develop essential skills that can enhance their
Supporting
sentence 2
future career prospects. By working in a real-world setting, students can learn to apply the knowledge acquired
in their studies to practical situations and it makes their education more relevant and meaningful. Secondly, a
part-time job allows students to earn some income. This financial support help them cover educational
expenses and can help them reduce financial burdens, such as tuition fees, student loans and living expenses.
Supporting
sentence 3
Supporting
sentence 4
Concluding
sentence
Moreover, working part-time can improve time management abilities as students must learn to balance their
work commitments with their academic responsibilities. This skill is essential for succeeding in both the
academic and professional areas. Lastly, the social interactions in the workplace can provide valuable
networking opportunities and help students expand their social circles. In conclusion, having a part-time job
while studying can be a rewarding experience since it contributes to personal growth and prepares students
for a successful future career.
Model Paragraph 2
There are numerous advantages of using smart phones. The most important
advantage of the phones is that you can use them almost everywhere without cables or
electricity. So, you can communicate with everyone whenever you want and wherever
you are. In addition to this, you can access the internet by using a smartphone. You do
not need to carry your laptop with you all the time. Smart phones include applications
which enable you to do research on the internet, do your homework, organize it, and
send it. Finally, cell phones are not only used for communication and doing your
business, but they can also be used as a means of entertainment. For example, you can
take pictures, listen to music and play games. You can easily entertain yourself and
relieve stress thanks to your cell phone. To sum up, having a cell phone is very
advantageous for people.
261
Model Paragraph 2 - OUTLINE
TS: There are numerous advantages of using smart phones.
SS1: The most important advantage of phones- use them almost everywhere without cables or
electricity
MD1: communicate with everyone whenever you want and wherever you are
SS2: In addition to this, - access the internet
MD1: no need to carry your laptop all the time
MD2: include applications to do research on the internet, do your homework,
organize it, and send it
SS3: Finally, a means of entertainment
MD1: take pictures, listen to music and play games - easily get relaxed
CS: To sum up, having a cell phone is very advantageous for people.
Model Paragraph 3
Advantages of Nuclear Power
The advantages of nuclear power are numerous. First of all, it is cost-effective. It is cheaper and
richer than fossil fuels like coal and natural gas. A small amount of nuclear fuel can produce a
significant amount of energy, making it highly efficient. For instance, one metric ton of uranium fuel
which is used in nuclear reactors can produce as much energy as several million metric tons of coal.
Also, nuclear reactors need little fuel, and they only need refueling approximately once every three
years. The second advantage is that nuclear power is environmentally a lot friendlier than other
alternative types of energy. It produces hardly any air pollution, and it releases less radiation into the
atmosphere than coal-burning power plants. Furthermore, it is a lot safer than most people think.
There are numerous safety features which make nuclear power one of the safest electricity sources.
Taking everything into account, it is often recommended to have nuclear power plants in order to
produce electricity in a cheaper, greener, and safer way.
Model Paragraph 3 -OUTLINE
Advantages of Nuclear Power
TS: The advantages of nuclear power are numerous.
SS1: First of all, cost effective
MD1: cheaper and richer than fossil fuels
MD2: Also, nuclear reactors needing little fuel
SS2: The second advantage, environmentally a lot friendlier
MD1: produces hardly any air pollution, & releases less radiation
MD2: Moreover, extremely small risk of a meltdown or a radiation leak
SS3: Furthermore, safer
MD1: numerous safety features
CS: Taking everything into account, it is often recommended to have nuclear power plants
in order to produce electricity in a cheaper, greener, and safer way.
262
ACTIVITY 2: Read the following paragraph and identify the parts:
Topic Sentence, Supporting Ideas, Minor Details & Concluding Sentence.
Living in a dormitory on a university campus offers three main advantages to students. First of
all, dormitory life is cheap since there are no extra costs apart from the accommodation fee. Once
students have paid this fee at the beginning of the term, they do not have to be concerned about
making any other big payments. They will only have their daily and school expenses. Secondly,
transportation to the departments is easier when students live in a dormitory on campus. They can
walk or cycle to their departments. Alternatively, they can take the ring service, which runs all day
long, to get to classes, libraries, computer labs, or cafeterias. As a result, they don't waste time
getting around the campus. There is also the option of hitch-hiking on many campuses; that is, a
member of the university with a car gives students a lift in it. The third advantage is that making
friends is easy when you live in the campus. As there are a lot of new students from different parts
of the country, you can meet new people easily and get to know them better in a short time. In
brief, living in a dormitory on campus is very advantageous for university students.
ACTIVITY 3: Read the sample advantage paragraph below and
choose the correct linker.
There are many advantages of having children in your early twenties. (1) To begin with/
Besides, when you are young, you have a lot of energy. This means you can cope quite easily with
the children’s demands. You can constantly care for them and give them your attention. (2) However /
Furthermore, young parents can relate to their children and (3) therefore / nevertheless, understand
them better. (4) Yet / Finally, when you become a parent at an early age, you are still young enough
to enjoy life when your child becomes independent. All in all, if you are not sure whether to have
children at an early age, you should take all the advantages into account.
ACTIVITY 4: Write a topic sentence for the following advantage
paragraph.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________. Firstly, it provides
easy access to higher education without the need for moving to another place. Students can continue living with their
families or in familiar surroundings, which creates a sense of comfort and security. This can foster a supportive
environment, as students can rely on their existing social networks and family support during their academic journey.
Secondly, studying in the local university may offer cost benefits, as students can save on expensive accommodation
and transportation expenses you have while studying in a distant city. This can make higher education more
affordable and accessible to a wider range of students. Finally, attending a university in their own town can help
students develop a stronger bond with their local community and this leads to a sense of belonging and potentially
contributing to the local economy and social development. In conclusion, attending a university in one's town offers
financial savings, a strong support system, and a sense of familiarity that can enhance the overall college
263
experience.
ACTIVITY 5: Write a concluding sentence for the following
advantage paragraph.
Having a girlfriend or boyfriend from another culture can offer various advantages. Firstly, it
provides an opportunity to learn about and appreciate different customs and traditions. Engaging
with someone from another cultural background allows individuals to learn about new ways of life
because it fosters cultural awareness and respect. Secondly, such relationships can lead to
valuable experiences and personal growth. Interacting with a partner from a different culture can
challenge one's thoughts and broaden their horizons, so they can understand the world better.
Moreover, it opens doors to diverse cuisines, languages, and celebrations, and it makes life more
vibrant and exciting. Additionally, having a partner from another culture can enhance
communication skills and empathy. Couples may need to deal with language barriers and
differences in communication styles and learn to be patient and understanding. This can lead to
stronger
bonds
and
more
compassionate
relationships.
______________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________
ACTIVITY 6: Come up with supporting ideas and minor details
after reading the topic and concluding sentences for the
following advantage paragraph.
○
TOPIC SENTENCE: Working in groups presents several benefits for the team members.
■ Supporting idea (advantage) 1: Firstly,
--_________________________________________________________
● Minor detail(s) _________________________________________________________
■ Supporting idea (advantage) 2: __________,
--____________________________________________________
● Minor detail(s) _________________________________________________________
■ Supporting idea (advantage) 3: __________,
--____________________________________________________
● Minor detail(s) _________________________________________________________
○
CONCLUDING SENTENCE: In conclusion, working in groups is advantageous for group members.
PRACTICE 1: Read the provided information in the outline about the
advantages of using the internet and write a well-developed paragraph.
Topic sentence:
Supporting Idea 1 & minor
details
● Connection/ Communication
○ reaching loved ones easily, anytime and
anywhere
Supporting Idea 2 & minor
details
● Easy access for information
○ reliable journals, websites, etc.
Supporting Idea 3 & minor
details
● Entertainment
○ stream TV series or movies, videos, games
Concluding sentence:
In your paragraph, make sure to include:
• topic sentence
• at least 3 supporting ideas (advantages) &
their minor details (examples/explanations, etc.)
• concluding sentence
• appropriate connectors
Pay attention to:
• the content
• the organization
• the accuracy of the language
• mechanics use of transitions
264
PRACTICE 2:
● Write a well-developed advantage paragraph about ONE of the given topics below.
○ The advantages of
■ * living in the countryside
* public schools
■ * online shopping
* social media
■ * online education
* learning a foreign language
● Please remember to brainstorm, cluster the ideas you get and make an outline
for the topic you have chosen before starting to write the paragraph.
● Please pay attention to the followings
In your paragraph, make sure to include:
• topic sentence
• at least 3 supporting ideas (advantages) &
their minor details (examples/explanations, etc.)
• concluding sentence
• appropriate connectors
Pay attention to:
• the content
• the organization
• the accuracy of the language
• mechanics use of transitions
PRACTICE 2: STEPS
●
1. Choose a topic from the list and brainstorm the ideas.
●
2. Cluster the ideas from the brainstorming.
●
3. Make an outline
○
TOPIC SENTENCE: ______________________________________________________________________________________________
■
Supporting idea (advantage) 1: __________, --_________________________________________________________
■
Supporting idea (advantage) 2: __________, --_________________________________________________________
■
Supporting idea (advantage) 3: __________, --_________________________________________________________
●
●
●
○
●
Minor detail(s) _________________________________________________________
Minor detail(s) _________________________________________________________
Minor detail(s) _________________________________________________________
CONCLUDING SENTENCE: _______________________________________________________________________________________
4. Now, you can start writing the paragraph about the topic you have chosen.
KEY
ACTIVITY 1. Which words/phrases in the box below are alternative ways
of referring to advantages (+) and disadvantages (-)?
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
a drawback (of) the downside (of) a good point +
a limitation a benefit (of) +
a negative aspect (of) a positive aspect (of) +
the harm (of) -
265
ACTIVITY 2:
TOPIC SENTENCE: Living in a dormitory on a university campus offers three main
advantages to students.
SUPPORTING SENTENCE 1: First of all, cheap
SUPPORTING DETAIL1: no extra costs apart from the accommodation
fee & only their daily and school expenses.
SUPPORTING SENTENCE 2: Secondly, transportation > easier
SUPPORTING DETAIL 1: walk or cycle
SUPPORTING DETAIL 2: take the ring service
SUPPORTING DETAIL 3: hitch-hiking
SUPPORTING SENTENCE 3: The third advantage is that making friends > easy
SUPPORTING DETAIL1: new students from different parts of the country
CONLUDING SENTENCE: In brief, living in a dormitory on campus is very
advantageous for university students.
KEY
●
ACTIVITY 3:
●
ACTIVITY 4:
○
●
●
1. to begin with
CONT’
2. Furthermore 3. therefore. 4. Finally
○
TS: Answers may vary. Possible answers:
○
Attending a university in one's town can offer various/numerous advantages for students.
○
Attending a university in one's town can offer several advantageous opportunities for students.
○
Attending a university in one's town can offer several significant advantages for students.
ACTIVITY 5:
○
CS: Answers may vary. Possible answers:
○
In brief, having a girlfriend or boyfriend from another culture offers the advantages of cultural exchange, personal growth, improved
communication
○
In conclusion, having a girlfriend or boyfriend from another culture can be a rewarding experience, offering opportunities for personal growth,
cultural exchange, and the creation of more compassionate and tolerant relationships.
ACTIVITY 6: Students' own answers
PRACTICE 2: Sample Paragraph (Answers may vary)
Living in the countryside offers people three main advantages. The first advantage is getting rid of
the difficulties of city life. If you live there, you will not need a car and there will not be any traffic jams, so you
will not be stressed out due to the traffic problems. Also, you do not need a job, so you can get away from
hectic business life which can make you sick. Secondly, it is healthy to live in the countryside. If you live in the
countryside, you will have fresh air and you can always do sports in fresh air, so you keep fit. Also, you can
grow your own vegetables in the countryside, so you can eat healthy food and live for a long time. One major
advantage is that countryside life is cheaper than city life, and if you live there, you will not need to pay for
transportation or rent. Even if you pay rent, it is much cheaper than for a house in a city. To sum up, country
life can be more advantageous as it helps you get rid of difficulties of city life, provides a healthy
lifestyle, and saves money.
266
DISADVANTAGE
PARAGRAPH
●
Aim of writing disadvantage paragraph:
○
●
To persuade or inform someone about a topic & make a decision
Disadvantage Paragraph Structure
○
Topic sentence
■ Supporting sentence 1 – disadvantage 1
● Minor detail(s) – examples / explanations / statistics, etc.
■ Supporting sentence 2 – disadvantage 2
● Minor detail(s) – examples / explanations / statistics, etc.
■ Supporting sentence 3 – disadvantage 3
● Minor detail(s) – examples / explanations / statistics, etc.
○
Concluding sentence
■ (In summary/To summarize/In brief/In conclusion/To conclude…)
Writing Topic Sentences for Disadvantage Paragraphs
●
The topic sentence of a disadvantage paragraph
○ tell your readers
●
it is a disadvantage paragraph
Examples:
○ ● There are three main disadvantages of living on a university campus.
○ ● Living on a university campus causes three main drawbacks to students.
○ ● Living on a university campus has three main disadvantages for students.
○ ● Living on a university campus poses three main drawbacks for students.
267
Writing Supporting Sentences for Disadvantage Paragraphs
_______ disadvantage of…
●
The first
● First, / Firstly, / First of all, / In the
first place, /Initially, / To begin
with, / To start with,
●
The second
● Second, / Secondly,
●
The main
●
The most important
●
One major
●
Another
●
A further
● Besides, /In addition (to this),
● Furthermore, / What’s more, /
Moreover,
● Finally,
Model Paragraph 1
There are certain disadvantages of having your own car. Firstly, you have to maintain and repair
your car regularly. Therefore, you need to spend a considerable amount of money to keep the car in
good condition. Also, you need plenty of time to take your car to the mechanic. In addition, be ready to
leave your car there for a minimum one day. Secondly, driving can sometimes be extremely stressful.
For example, being caught in a traffic jam is not only irritating but also time-consuming. In cities,
especially, you waste your valuable time in traffic and have to deal with rude and angry drivers. When
you are out of traffic, you are most likely exhausted, stressed and late for your appointment. Finally,
when you have a car, you may have to give people around a lift all the time and it may annoy you
seriously. Because of this, you may waste your free time, be unable to attend activities you want or
worry about the financial burden it causes. All in all, if you want to have a car, you should consider all
the drawbacks mentioned above.
Model Paragraph 1 - OUTLINE
TS: There are certain disadvantages of having your own car.
SS1: Firstly, maintain and repair your car regularly.
MD1: spend a considerable amount of money & time
MD2: need to leave the car there
SS2: Secondly, driving - extremely stressful.
SD1: traffic jam - irritating & time-consuming
SS3: Finally, give people around a lift all the time - annoying
SD1:waste time, be unable to attend activities or worry about financial burden
CS: All in all, if you want to have a car, you should consider all the drawbacks mentioned
above before buying one.
268
ACTIVITY 1: Read the following paragraph and identify the parts:
Topic sentence, supporting ideas, and concluding sentence.
Living in a dormitory on a university campus may have three main disadvantages for students. Firstly, when
students live in a dormitory, they have to sacrifice their privacy to some extent. Accommodation is usually limited to
staying in a room together with three or four other students, so students find it difficult to make phone calls in their
rooms when they discuss very personal issues with the families or friends. They may long for more personal space
which is nearly impossible to have in the dormitories. In addition, living with roommates may sometimes be
problematic because some students prefer studying at night, whereas others study early in the morning. While some
students are studying, others might make some noise, and it may be difficult for the ones who are studying to
tolerate this noise or concentrate on what they are doing. The last disadvantage is that students who live in
on-campus dormitories have to obey many rules, and this can sometimes be irritating. There are restrictions on the
items that students can bring into the dormitories, the noise level, activities and visitors. Moreover, the students have
to be in their dormitories by a certain hour at night. In other words, they cannot enter their dorms after closing time.
This is a stressful limitation on them. To conclude, living in a dormitory on campus may not be the right choice for
students who cannot tolerate restrictions on their privacy, studying conditions and many rules to obey.
ACTIVITY 2: Please, write a topic sentence for the following
disadvantage paragraph.
________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________. One significant drawback
is the potential negative impact on academic performance. When students divide their time between
work and study, they may find it challenging to manage their schedules effectively and it leads to
inadequate time for studying and completing assignments. Consequently, this could result in lower
grades and academic underachievement. Additionally, the combination of work and study can lead to
feelings of fatigue and stress, and this affects students' overall well-being negatively. The demands
of the job might interfere with students' ability to participate in extracurricular activities or maintain a
healthy work-life balance. Moreover, having a job might limit students' participation in extracurricular
activities or social events; therefore, students may not have enough opportunities for personal
growth and social interactions. That’s why, they may fail to expand their social circles. To summarize,
it is essential for students to be mindful of these disadvantages and strike a balance between work
commitments and their academic progress.
ACTIVITY 3: Please, write a concluding sentence for the
following advantage paragraph.
Attending a university in one's town may have certain disadvantages for students. Firstly,
remaining close to home can limit students' opportunities for personal growth and independence.
They may miss out on the chance to experience life in a different city or cultural setting, which can
broaden their horizons and develop valuable life skills. Secondly, familiarity with the local area might
not challenge students to adapt to new environments, potentially hindering their ability to deal with
unfamiliar situations in the future. Additionally, studying in one's town may lead to distractions from
family and friends, which makes it harder for students to focus on their studies and academic
responsibilities. The presence of a familiar social circle might deter them from fully immersing
themselves in the university experience and exploring new relationships. Furthermore, studying in
one's town could limit networking opportunities, as students may be less likely to interact with a
diverse range of individuals from different backgrounds. Lastly, the comfort of staying in one's
hometown might discourage some students from exploring other educational institutions that could
offer unique programs and opportunities. _______________________________________________
269
________________________________________________________________________________
ACTIVITY 4: Please, come up with supporting ideas and minor details after reading
the topic and concluding sentences for the following disadvantage paragraph.
○
TOPIC SENTENCE: Working in groups presents several disadvantages for the team members.
■ Supporting idea (advantage) 1: Firstly,
_________________________________________________________
● Minor detail(s) _________________________________________________________
■ Supporting idea (advantage) 2: __________,
____________________________________________________
● Minor detail(s) _________________________________________________________
■ Supporting idea (advantage) 3: __________,
____________________________________________________
● Minor detail(s) _________________________________________________________
○
CONCLUDING SENTENCE: In conclusion, working in groups is disadvantageous for the group members in the
ways mentioned above.
PRACTICE 1: Read the provided information in the outline about the disadvantages
of using the internet and write a well-developed paragraph.
Topic sentence:
Supporting Idea 1 &
minor details
● Physical problems
○ backache, poor eyesight
Supporting Idea 2 &
minor details
● Social problems
○ stay in touch online, isolation
Supporting Idea 3 &
minor details
● Safety issues
○ unreliable or illegal materials,
untrustworthy people
Concluding sentence:
In your paragraph, make sure to include:
• topic sentence
• at least 3 supporting ideas (advantages) &
their minor details (examples/explanations, etc.)
• concluding sentence
• appropriate connectors
Pay attention to:
• the content
• the organization
• the accuracy of the language
• mechanics use of transitions
PRACTICE 2:
● Write a well-developed disadvantage paragraph about ONE of the given topics below.
○ The disadvantages of
■ * living in the countryside
* public schools
■ * online shopping
* social media
■ * online education
* learning a foreign language
● Please remember to brainstorm, cluster the ideas you get and make an outline for the
topic you have chosen before starting to write the paragraph.
● Please pay attention to the followings
In your paragraph, make sure to include:
• topic sentence
• at least 3 supporting ideas (advantages) &
their minor details (examples/explanations, etc.)
• concluding sentence
• appropriate connectors
Pay attention to:
• the content
• the organization
• the accuracy of the language
• mechanics use of transitions
270
PRACTICE 2: STEPS
●
1. Choose a topic from the list and brainstorm the ideas.
●
2. Cluster the ideas from the brainstorming.
●
3. Make an outline
○
TOPIC SENTENCE: ______________________________________________________________________________________________
■
Supporting idea (disadvantage) 1: __________, --_________________________________________________________
■
Supporting idea (disadvantage) 2: __________, --_________________________________________________________
■
Supporting idea (disadvantage) 3: __________, --_________________________________________________________
●
●
●
○
●
Minor detail(s) _________________________________________________________
Minor detail(s) _________________________________________________________
Minor detail(s) _________________________________________________________
CONCLUDING SENTENCE: _______________________________________________________________________________________
4. Now, you can start writing the paragraph about the topic you have chosen.
ACTIVITY 1:
KEY
TS: Living in a dormitory on a university campus may have three main disadvantages for students.
SS1: Firstly, -sacrifice their privacy.
SD1: difficult to make phone calls in their rooms & long for more personal space
SS2: In addition, living with roommates -problematic
SD1: different studying periods
SS3: The last disadvantage is that obey many rules - irritating.
SD1: restrictions on the items, the noise level, activities and visitors - stressful
SD2: no entering their dorms after closing time
CS: To conclude, living in a dormitory on campus may not be the right choice for students who cannot
tolerate restrictions on their privacy, studying conditions and many rules to obey.
KEY
CONT’
● ACTIVITY 3: Answers may vary. Possible answer:
○ Topic Sentence: Having a part-time job while studying can bring about
several/numerous/various disadvantages for students.
● ACTIVITY 4: Answers may vary. Possible answer:
○ Concluding Sentence: In conclusion, while attending a university in one's town has its
conveniences, it may hinder personal growth, limit networking prospects, and reduce exposure
to new experiences.
● ACTIVITY 5: Answers may vary.
271
Listening
Supplementary
Materials
272
List. Supp. 1
Identifying Specific Information
Objective: Can identify specific information in a simple presentation or lecture aimed at a general audience.
To listen for specific information, focus on keywords. The answer to a question is often just before or after a
keyword from the question.
Question: What is Saul Griffith’s career?
The key word: career
You hear: Saul Griffith prepared for his career as an inventor at the Massachusetts Institute of Technology in
Cambridge, Massachusetts.
The answer: inventor
EXERCISE 1
A. Read the questions. Then listen to the statements from Listening 1. Focus on the keywords in bold and
answer the questions.
1. What can Saul Griffith’s kite produce?
____________________________________________________________________________
2. Where can kids find Howtoons?
____________________________________________________________________________
3. What can kids do with Howtoons?
____________________________________________________________________________
EXERCISE 2
Listen to the statements about a computer program called Scratch. Focus on the keywords in bold and
answer the questions.
1.What ages is Scratch designed for?
____________________________________________________________________________
2. What is one thing you can create with Scratch?
____________________________________________________________________________
3. How long does it take to create a simple animation in Scratch?
____________________________________________________________________________
4. What do you choose to make the sprite move?
____________________________________________________________________________
5. How do colleges use Scratch?
____________________________________________________________________________
273
EXERCISE 3
Listen to a speech of a board game developer and answer the questions.
1. When did Bradley start the Milton Bradley Company?
____________________________________________
2. How many copies did The Checkered Game of Life sell in the first year?
____________________________________________
3. What colours were the squares on the board for The Checkered Game of Life?
____________________________________________
4. On what square did players begin The Checkered Game of Life?
____________________________________________
5. In what year did the company create a new version of the game?
____________________________________________
6. Where do players end the modern version of The Game of Life?
_____________________________________________
7.How do players buy things in the most recent versions of The Game of Life?
_____________________________________________
8. What is the name of Alex Vargas’ new game?
_____________________________________________
EXERCISE 4
A. Listen to part of a lecture about food in cities. Are these statements true (T) or false (F)?
1. A lot of people grow fruit and vegetables in cities.
2. People in cities have more money than people in the country.
3. Food becomes expensive when people eat more meat.
4. Modern cities are bigger than before.
5. Today, more people live in the country than in cities.
T
T
T
T
T
F
F
F
F
F
B. Listen again. Write the number you hear next to the phrases.
1. _____________ = important facts about cities
2. more than __________ % = money that poor people spend on food
3. __________ = number of cities with 10 million people (today)
4. more than __________ = number of cities with 20 million people (in 2045)
5. __________ = fraction of people who live in cities (today)
6. __________ % = people who live in cities (in 2045)
274
EXERCISE 5
You are going to listen to a talk about the lost city of Alexandria. Listen to the talk and complete the notes
below.
Archaeologist Frack Goddio
●
Goddio’s Team
found cities that disappeared almost
1
______________ ago
Goddio’s new discoveries tell us a lot about
2
______________
●
uncovered statues, 6______________, musical
instruments, 7______________, and many other
objects
●
In 3______________,
went to Egypt to look for a sunken ship
●
made maps of 8______________ Alexandria
and two other cities
●
found the 4______________ of whole cities in
the sand deep underwater
●
explored Cleopatra’s 9______________
started The European Institute of
______________ Archaeology
●
●
●
5
found statues of 10______________ and
______________that were once in temples
11
EXERCISE 6
Listen to the talk and complete the gaps about each family.
The Chuma Family
The Nelson Family
The Panchal Family
wash 1_____________ by hand,
hang them in the sun to dry
wash and dry their clothes in
1
______________
have a 1_____________ for their
clothes
children 2______________ to school
or use a 3_____________ to cross
the river
parents 2_______________ the
children to school
use ____________ for electric
lights and radio
4
they have 5_____________ impact
on the environment
sometimes they don’t have
_______________ because of the
dry climate
6
use 3______________ of gasoline
every day
to save energy, they bought
_____________ appliances
want to build another
_____________ in their house
2
Lalita goes to work by
_____________
3
hopes the family will
_______________
4
4
put 5____________carbon into the
atmosphere
more than 300 5_____________
middle-class people in India
275
List. Supp. 2
Identifying the Topic
Objective: Can generally identify the topic of discussion around them when conducted slowly and clearly.
IDENTIFYING THE TOPIC
The topic is the general subject of the conversation. It answers the question “Who or What is the conversation about?”
or “What are the speakers talking about?”
Identifying the topic is the key to getting the full meaning of the text. Speakers who give formal talks or lectures usually
begin by introducing themselves and then introducing their topic, so listen carefully to the introduction of the topic.
To identify the topic,
● Focus on keywords and phrases. Listen for words and phrases that are stressed or repeated by the speakers.
● Listen for specific phrases.
Specific Phrases
Today, we’ll discuss/I’m going to talk about…
In the first half, you’ll hear about…
This afternoon, we’ll look at…
I’d like to begin with the first category…
Today’s lecture will be divided into two parts… etc.
EXERCISE 1
Listen to a lecture about sport. What is the main topic of it? Choose the correct answer.
a. tae kwon do and yoga
b. men, women and sport
c. the bones in your back
EXERCISE 2
Listen to the conversation between Karin and Adam. What is the main topic of their conversation?
__________________________________
EXERCISE 3
Listen to a program and write the main topic of it.
__________________________________
EXERCISE 4
Listen to the conversation between Lin and Jack. What are they talking about?
__________________________________
EXERCISE 5
Listen to the conversation between Raymond and Elena. What are they talking about?
__________________________________
276
List. Supp. 3
Listening for the Gist
Objective: Can get the gist of short, simple texts if told slowly and clearly.
LISTEN FOR THE GIST (MAIN IDEA)
The most important reason people communicate is to share ideas. It is possible to share ideas without
understanding all of the details. When you are listening to speech in your native language, you can’t always hear or
understand every word. However, you usually have no problem getting the main idea(s).
Main idea is the general message of the conversation. While you are listening to a text in English, it is important to
concentrate on getting the main idea(s).
To find the gist (main idea),
●
Try to answer these questions
●
●
●
Focus on keywords, facts, intonation and stress of the speakers.
Do not worry about the words or phrases you might miss. Keep listening.
Notice ideas that are repeated or rephrased.
Repetition/Rephrasing
I’ll say this again…
What you need to know is…
Let me say it in another way…
So again, let me repeat…
The most important point is…
✔ Sometimes finding the gist can be easy because this is found at the beginning. Main ideas are mentioned
first and then they are followed by explanations or examples that support the main idea(s). Sometimes it is
not too easy and it is necessary to listen to the whole conversation to understand its general meaning.
277
EXERCISE 1
Listen to the conversation to find the main idea. Write down the main idea and any words that help you.
Main idea: _____________________________________________________________________________.
Key words:
______________
______________
______________
______________
EXERCISE 2
Listen to the conversation and answer the questions.
1. Who is talking? _______________________________________________
2. How does the man feel? ________________________________________
3. Why does he feel this way? ______________________________________
EXERCISE 3
Listen to the conversation and choose the main idea of it.
_____ Becca was not in class on Thursday because she was sick.
_____ The presentation was very good.
_____ Dr. Earle has a very successful career.
_____ There are a lot of people living on Earth
_____ Dr. Earle says the world’s people are having a bad effect on the oceans.
_____ According to Dr. Earle, everybody should stop eating tuna and other large fish.
_____ Dr. Earle is very healthy.
EXERCISE 4
Listen to the conversation and choose the best answer.
1. The seminar is about __________.
a. a different way of communicating
b. communication problems
2. Lana can __________.
a. speak but she can’t hear
b. understand but she can’t speak
3. Lana is from __________.
a. America
b. Jordan
4. Home language is a type of sign language
__________.
a. found in each country
b. found in a family
5. Most children born deaf will __________.
a. pick up sign language at home
b. have lessons in sign language
6. Lana demonstrates the sign for __________.
a. happy
b. tired
278
EXERCISE 5
Listen to the business class discussion and write the main ideas below.
Tip: Write only single words or short phrases to help you remember ideas. Then complete your notes with more
information.
Main idea(s)
___________________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________________
____
EXERCISE 6
You are going to listen to a conversation between two journalists, Vicky and John. Listen to the conversation
and choose the two statements that express main ideas of the conversation.
______ 1. Vicky went to a fall fashion show.
______ 2. People sometimes follow fashion trends because they’re afraid to say they don’t like them.
______ 3. Journalists and other people should be critical of fashions.
______ 4. Vicky has to write an article for tomorrow’s newspaper.
EXERCISE 7
Read the statements. Then listen to the program. Choose T (True) or F (False).
1. Professor Forni says people are more polite now than in the past.
T
F
2. Professor Forni says rudeness can cause social problems.
T
F
3. Professor Forni says there is no connection between rudeness and stress.
T
F
4. The best idea is to be polite when people are rude to you.
T
F
5. It’s OK to say that you don’t like someone’s behavior.
T
F
EXERCISE 8
Listen to the documentary and choose the main ideas.
_____ Your brain is a very important and complex organ.
_____ Your brain tells your muscles what to do.
_____ Your brain is very powerful.
_____ Your brain can send messages very quickly.
_____ Your brain helps you protect your pets.
_____ Learning changes your brain.
_____ Exercise helps you learn.
279
List. Supp. 4
Key Factual Information (Note-Taking 1)
Objective: Can extract key factual information from a phone conversation on a familiar topic.
While listening to a phone conversation, focus on names, numbers, dates, places, reasons or explanations.
EXERCISE 1
Jane Powell calls customer services about her order. Listen to the conversation and complete the
sentences.
1. You need to press_________________ for problems with your order.
2. Jane has to wait ___________________ more days for the product to be in stock.
3. Her order number is ___________________________.
4. Apple Ipod clock costs _________________________.
5. Jane has decided to ___________________ her order.
6. They will refund the amount of ___________________ to her credit card.
EXERCISE 2
A. You will hear Alan talking to his grandmother. Listen to the Part 1 of the phone call. Choose True or
False.
1. Alan phoned his gran because his friend has got a problem.
T
F
2. Alan forgot to record something for Tom.
T
F
3. Alan’s parents are at home.
T
F
4. His gran knows how to record a video.
T
F
B. Alan told his gran how to record the programme. Listen to the Part 2 of the phone call and take notes.
Tech. Prog. Click 1__________
Starts at 2__________ on Channel 3__________
What to do:
●
4
●
Press the 6___________ button to start recording
●
Turn it off at 7____________ o’clock
__________ the video and put in the 5___________
280
EXERCISE 3
A student is calling the college to ask about language courses. Listen to their conversation and take notes.
Date
Time
Level
Add.
EXERCISE 4
Listen to the phone conversation between two friends Pedro and Sara and complete the gaps.
S: Hi, Pedro- it’s Sara.
P: Oh, hi. I was just thinking about you, Sara. We’re meeting for 1___________ with Estelle tomorrow, aren’t we?
S: Actually, that’s why I’m phoning. There’s been a change of plan. I’m afraid I’ve got something else on
______________________ - I’ve got a work meeting 3______________________ that I can’t change- so how
about getting together after work instead? Say 4____________________? We could go for an 5_______________.
2
P: Let me just have a look at my diary… Hmm, I’m really sorry, but I can’t make it then. I’m meeting someone in
______________ at 6.30. Are you free on 7______________ after work?
6
S: Well, I’m supposed to be 8____________________ with my sister, but we can probably change it to another day.
I’ll speak to her, then I’ll get back to you. OK? And will you 9___________ if Thursday is OK with Estelle?
P: No problem. I’ll speak to you later, then.
S: Bye.
EXERCISE 5
Listen to a man talking to a real estate agent on the phone about a house he would like to rent and
complete the sentences.
Steve is moving to the city at the 1__________________. He wants to live in a 2_________________ area.
The real estate agent has a few 3__________________, lofts and apartments to offer. Steve does not want
anything on 4__________________. The rent must be between 5__________________ dollars per month. He
wants a 6__________________ apartment. The apartment must have a 7__________________ and central
heating.
281
EXERCISE 6
A. Listen to the telephone conversation. Write short answers to the questions.
1. What happened when Todd’s plane landed?
_______________________________________________________________________________
2. What did Todd see on the plane before the movie?
________________________________________________________________________________
3. Why is the comedy network making a TV commercial like that?
_________________________________________________________________________________
4. What are the advantages of giving old devices back?
_________________________________________________________________________________
B. Listen again. Choose the correct word or phrase to complete each sentence.
1. Todd’s plane landed in___________.
a. Cincinnati
b. Chicago
c. Cleveland
2. On the plane, Todd saw a commercial from a _________.
a. computer company
b. comedy network
c. cell phone service
3. Todd says the ________ in old electronics can be worth a lot of money.
a. chemicals
b. metal
c. glass
4. Some companies allow people to ________ their old electronic devices.
a. return
b. keep
c. buy
282
List. Supp. 5
Basic Inferences
MAKING AN INFERENCE
Sometimes speakers don’t give their opinions directly. To understand what a speaker thinks or feels about a topic,
you need to “read between the lines”, or use the context to decide what the speaker is really saying. We call this
making an inference. In other words, to infer or make an inference means to draw conclusions or guess
something based on the information or ideas you hear or read. An inference is an idea that is NOT stated in the
text. Making inferences while listening can help deepen your understanding of what you hear.
Example 1
There’s a man leaving his house. He comes slowly downstairs and goes to the wardrobe. Slowly he gets his hat
and coat from the wardrobe, puts them on, and walks toward the front door. He looks back once toward the kitchen,
but it’s dark. There’s no sound. So he opens the door and walks ever so slowly toward his car.
Direct statements: These are stated in the story. You don’t have to infer them.
●
He comes slowly downstairs.
●
Slowly he gets his hat and coat from the wardrobe.
Inferences: These are things we can infer from the story. The author does not actually tell us.
●
In the beginning, the man is upstairs. (The story states that he comes downstairs.)
●
It is cold outside. (The man “gets his hat and coat from the wardrobe.”)
Example 2
If the speaker says he or she grew up in Spain, you might infer that he or she speaks Spanish. When you make
inferences, you may be very sure about your conclusions, or you may be less sure. It’s important to use information
the speaker states directly to support your inferences.
Strategies:
●
Note information that provides support for your inference. For example, you might note that the speaker
lived in Spain.
●
Note information that does not support your inference. For example, the speaker says she was born in
Spain (maybe she speaks Spanish) but moved away when she was two (maybe she doesn’t speak Spanish).
Which evidence is stronger-the evidence for or against your inference?
●
If you’re less than certain about your inference, use words to soften your language such as modals (may /
might / could), adverbs (sometimes / rarely / partly / quite), and quantifiers (some / a few / a bit).
●
You can also make inferences about people’s attitudes or feelings by listening for tone of voice.
283
EXERCISE 1
Listen to a student talk about first impression. Take notes in your notebook as you listen. Then answer the
questions.
1. Do you think it was a positive or negative first impression? Why? What information from your notes helped you
answer?
____________________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________
2. Do you think the speaker likes Lee? What information from your notes helped you answer?
____________________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________
EXERCISE 2
Read the statements and circle T for true or F for false.
1. Dr. Carter is presenting to children for the first time.
T
F
2. On the International Space Station, Dr. Carter learns how to stay
T
F
3. Astronauts must wear spacesuits inside the space station.
T
F
4. Dr. Carter doesn’t like the food in the space station very much.
T
F
5. One hour of exercise each day is enough to stay healthy in zero gravity.
T
F
healthy in space.
EXERCISE 3
Read the statements and circle T for true or F for false.
1. Laura would probably not enjoy the documentary.
T
F
2. Laura is good at note-taking.
T
F
3. Laura thinks newspaper reporters are good at note-taking.
T
F
4. Silvio feels unhappy at the end of the conversation.
T
F
284
EXERCISE 4
Read the statements and circle T for true or F for false.
1. The UN says that countries should limit people’s use of the Internet.
T
F
2. Ken Banks invented software because he saw a need for it.
T
F
3. Everyone uses Banks’ software in the same way.
T
F
4. Banks’ software can be used in poor countries.
T
F
EXERCISE 5
Listen to each conversation and write how the woman feels.
Conversation 1: The woman feels __________________.
Conversation 2: The woman feels __________________.
Conversation 3: The woman feels __________________.
EXERCISE 6
Listen to the excerpts from the listening text and circle the correct answer.
1. Based on these statements, what can you infer?
a. Brown thinks it’s better for children to read than watch TV.
b. Brown prefers playing video games to reading.
2. Based on this statement, what can you infer?
a. Bookstores believe they can sell a lot of manga.
b. Bookstores want to support manga even if manga doesn’t sell well.
3. Based on these statements, what can you infer?
a. Shorter stories are usually about heroes.
b. Manga attracts younger readers with different interests.
285
List. Supp. 6
Presentation _ Lecture Structure 1
Objective: Can follow the linear structure of a short formal talk.
PRESENTATION & LECTURE STRUCTURE 1
Making a presentation is a way of communicating speaker’s ideas to an audience. A presentation is divided into three
sections.
●
Opening / Introduction
●
Body
●
Conclusion
Introduction
Speaker greets the audience.
Chooses a way to get the audience’s attention by
●
Asking a question to stimulate thinking:
How many of you…?
What do you think about…?
●
Telling an interesting fact or story:
Did you know that…?
The other day…
●
Showing an interesting picture about the topic:
Look at this…
●
Using a quotation from a famous person
Introduces the topic: Today I’d like to talk about…
Gives outline of the presentation: I want to focus first on…
Then I plan to discuss…
Body
Speaker presents his/her ideas in the body of the presentation.
He/She illustrates and supports the ideas by
●
Presenting data and facts
●
Giving relevant examples to illustrate key ideas
●
Providing vivid descriptions
Conclusion
Speaker concludes the presentation by
●
Giving a summary of the main points
●
Making a statement about the most important point
●
Reinforcing the main message
So, just remember…
Next time you… think about…
I’d like to end by saying…
To sum up, I’d like to say…
286
After the speaker concludes the presentation, there is often time to invite and answer questions from the audience.
Here are some ways to invite questions.
●
Do you have any questions?
●
I have time for a few questions etc.
Lecture Topic and Organization
At the beginning of a lecture, the speaker introduces the lecture topic. The speaker also often gives a plan for the
lecture: the main ideas and how the lecture will be organized. This will help you focus and organize your notes.
Common ways to introduce a lecture and the main points of a lecture:
Today…
I’d like to…
get started with…
In today’s lecture, …
I want to
start with…
First…
I’m going to…
talk about…
Then…
We’ll…
look at…
After that, …
Finally, …
Signal Phrases
A signal phrase is a group of words that tell listeners what will come next in a lecture or presentation.
Speakers can use signal phrases to introduce a new point, to give an example, or to emphasize an important point.
Paying attention to these signal phrases will help you follow the speaker’s ideas. Look at the examples in the charts
below.
Phrases that introduce a new point
Now…
Next,…
Let’s start with…
In addition…
First,…
Finally,…
Phrases that give an example
For example,…
For instance,…
…such as…
Phrases that emphasize a point
In fact, …
It’s clear that…
I want to emphasize / stress that…
It’s important to understand…
What I’m saying is…
The fundamental point is…
Phrases that introduce research or evidence
Studies show… / research shows…
The study / survey found that…
According to this study / survey…
It is estimated that…
287
Lists
Speakers often list items during a lecture. For example, a speaker may list the steps in a process. Listen for lists so
you can number and write steps or items in your notes. A speaker often tells you how many ideas will be covered in a
lecture, so you know how many factors to listen for and take notes on.
Phrases That Introduce A List Or Items In A List
There are (four) steps…
There are (three) things/types…
First,… Second,… Third,…
The first (thing/type)is…
Next,
The second (thing/type) is…
After that,… After + clause
Finally,…
If lecturers want to check in to see if you are following along, they may cue you with questions.
Checking in
Is everyone clear on this?
Is this clear?
Are there any questions?
Are you with me?
288
EXERCISE 1
Listen to the introductions to some lectures and fill in the outline with the topic and main points for each.
Introduction 1: Topic: ___________________
1. ________________
2. ________________
3. ________________
Introduction 2: Topic: ___________________
1. ________________
2. ________________
3. ________________
4. ________________
Introduction 3: Topic: ___________________
1. ________________
2. ________________
3. ________________
4. ________________
EXERCISE 2
Listen to a student who compares two kinds of sport or exercise. Write the adjectives you hear in the gaps.
1. Today, many young people have an ____________ lifestyle.
2. They can be ____________.
3. How can we make young people _____________________?
4. Pilates and Zumba are _______________ with women than men
5. Pilates is ____________ than Zumba.
6. It’s ____________ for older people.
7. It can make you ____________.
289
EXERCISE 3
Listen to the talk about a festival and put the sentences in the correct order.
______ a. A government official makes a speech.
______ b. The girls put on traditional dresses called kimonos.
______ c. Coming of age means a child becomes an adult.
______ d. He gives each boy and girl a small present.
______ e. I’m going to talk to you today about a festival in Japan.
______ f. The new adults go to special parties.
______ g. The festival is called Seijin no hi.
______ h. They attend the ceremony.
______ i. The festival takes place on the second Monday of January each year.
EXERCISE
A student is giving a talk. Listen to him and write the topic and main points using an outline.
Topic: ______________________________
1) _________________________________
●
making notes of lectures
●
2) _________________________________
●
3) Using colour for notes
●
4) _________________________________
●
290
EXERCISE 5
A. Listen to the first part of the lecture and write the topic and main points the speaker is going to explain.
Topic: _________________
1) ____________________
2) ____________________
3) ____________________
B. Listen to the rest of the lecture and create a mind map while listening to classify the sports.
C. Listen again and answer the questions about the sports.
1. What do racing sports teach children?
_________________________________________________
2. What do opponent sports teach children?
_________________________________________________
3. What do achievement sports teach children? _________________________________________________
291
LISTENING SUPPLEMENTARY MATERIALS ANSWER KEY
List. Supp. 1_Identifying Specific Information ANSWER KEY
EXERCISE 1
1. electricity 2. Online
3. They can make rockets,waterscopes, their own pens, paper and ink.
EXERCISE 2
1. from eight to sixteen
2. greeting cards / games / cartoons
EXERCISE 3
1. 1860
2. Over 40.000
3. Red and black
4. Infancy
EXERCISE 4
1.F 2. T 3. T 4. T 5. F
1. 4 2. 60 3. 30 4. 50
EXERCISE 5
1. 2000
2. Cleopatra’s world
3. A few minutes
4. a motion block
5. 1960
6. On the Millionaire square
5. more than 1/2
3. 1984
4. ruins
7. With credit cards
8. Environment
6. 75
5. underwater
6. containers
EXERCISE 6
The Chuma family: 1. clothes
2. walk
The Nelson family: 1. A machine 2. drive
The Panchal family:1. washing machine
5. In beginning computer science classes
7. tools
8. ancient
3. boat
3. about a gallon
2. room
9. palace (and temples)
10. gods
11. goddesses
4. fossil fuels
4. more efficient
3. bus
5. a fairly small 6. water
5. a lot of
4. buy a car
5. million
Q-Skills for Success Listening & Speaking 2, Oxford University Press, 2011
Unlock 1 Listening, Speaking, Critical Thinking, Cambridge University Press, 2014
Pathways Listening, Speaking and Critical Thinking 1, National Geographic Learning, 2013
Pathways Listening, Speaking and Critical Thinking 2, National Geographic Learning, 2012
List. Supp. 2_ Identifying the Topic ANSWER KEY
EXERCISE 1
b
EXERCISE 2
The pros and cons of online friendship
EXERCISE 3
Future travel trends
EXERCISE 4
The news item “Imaginary Eating”
EXERCISE 5
Food allergies
Wide Angle 3, Oxford University Press, 2018
Life Intermediate, National Geographic Learning, 2013
Unlock 1 Listening, Speaking, Critical Thinking, Cambridge University Press, 2014
Unlock 2 Listening, Speaking, Critical Thinking, Cambridge University Press, 2014
Contemporary Topics 21st Century Skills for Academic Success 2, Pearson, 2017
292
List. Supp. 3_Listening for the Gist ANSWER KEY
EXERCISE 1
Main idea: A student asks her teacher’s advice about what to study at college.
Key words: Sts’ own answers.
EXERCISE 2
1.the father of a family 2. upset 3. his electric bill is too high
EXERCISE 3
Dr. Earle says the world’s people are having a bad effect on the oceans.
EXERCISE 4
1. a 2. b 3. b 4. b 5. a 6. a
EXERCISE 5
Fashionomics is a study of fashion and the economy.
Changing fashions can be good for the economy.
Fashion makes the society more creative.
EXERCISE 6
2, 3
EXERCISE 7
F/T/F/T/T
EXERCISE 8
Your brain is a very important and complex organ.
Your brain is very powerful.
Your brain can send messages very quickly.
Exercise helps you learn.
Unlock 1 Listening, Speaking, Critical Thinking, Cambridge University Press, 2014
Unlock 2 Listening, Speaking, Critical Thinking, Cambridge University Press, 2014
Pathways Listening, Speaking and Critical Thinking 1, National Geographic Learning, 2013
Pathways Listening, Speaking and Critical Thinking 2, National Geographic Learning, 2012
Q-Skills for Success Listening & Speaking 2, Oxford University Press, 2011
List. Supp. 4_Key Factual Information (Note-Taking 1) ANSWER KEY
EXERCISE 1
1. three
2. seven
EXERCISE 2
A. F T F F
B. 1. on it 2. 6:30
3. 8-0-5-3-1-A
3. 4
4.turn on
4. thirty-five pounds
5. video cassette
5. cancel
6. record
6. thirty-nine pounds
7. 7
EXERCISE 3
Date
Sep.3-Dec.15
Time
Thu evening 6-8
Lvl
Add.
Low
www.westoncoll.ac.uk
EXERCISE 4
1. lunch
2. tomorrow lunchtime
6. town
7. Thursday
EXERCISE 5
1. end of the month
6. one bedroom
2. central
7. balcony
3. from 12 till 2
8. playing tennis
3. studios
4. 6 o’clock
9. see
5. early dinner
4. the first floor
5. 500 and 600 dollars
EXERCISE 6
A. 1. Another plane crossed in front of Todd’s plane on the runway. It was scary.
2. He saw a commercial (TV advertisement) about recycling electronic devices from the comedy network.
3. Todd guesses if it’s funny, more people will listen.
4. It prevents people from throwing them away and creating more garbage.
B. 1.c 2. b 3. b 4. a
293
Success Elementary, Pearson, 2007
Double Click 4, Express Publishing, 2011
Navigate B1+, Oxford University Press, 2015
Life Pre-intermediate, National Geographic Learning, 2013
Pathways Listening, Speaking and Critical Thinking 1, National Geographic Learning, 2013
List. Supp. 5_ Basic Inferences ANSWER KEY
EXERCISE 1
1. Positive (asking me if I needed help, giving me directions, firm handshake, wishing me luck)
2. Yes (hoping I would see Lee again, waving to him, asking him to sit at my table)
EXERCISE 2
1. F
2. T
3. F
4. T
3. T
4. F
3. F
4. T
5. F
EXERCISE 3
1. F
2. T
EXERCISE 4
1. F
2. T
EXERCISE 5
1. angry
2. uninterested
3. nervous
EXERCISE 6
1. a
2. a
3. b
Q-Skills for Success Listening & Speaking 2, Oxford University Press, 2011
Q-Skills for Success Listening & Speaking 3, Oxford University Press, 2011
Q-Skills for Success Listening & Speaking 4, Oxford University Press, 2011
Pathways Listening, Speaking and Critical Thinking 1, National Geographic Learning, 2013
Pathways Listening, Speaking and Critical Thinking 2, National Geographic Learning, 2012
List. Supp 6_Presentation _ Lecture Structure 1 ANSWER KEY
EXERCISE 1
Introduction 1: Topic: Festivals
1. origins of festivals
2. most important festivals
3. good tourist attractions
Introduction 2: Topic: Turkey
1. facts
2. main natural features
3. its modern history
4. its future
Introduction 3: Topic: Weather
1. main weather conditions
2. how each weather condition comes about
3. damage
4. climate change
EXERCISE 2
1. unhealthy 2. unhappy
3. fitter / healthier / happier
EXERCISE 3
5 7 3 6
8
1
9
2
4. more popular
5. slower
6. better
7. stronger
4
294
EXERCISE 4
Visual learners / Learning styles of visual learners / Improving learning efficiency of visual learners
1) Seeing written text
● making notes of lectures
● drawing diagrams and making flow charts
2) Remembering visual information
● making flashcards of words and putting them on the walls
3) Using colour for notes
● using colour pens, marking the text, underlining, highlighting
4) Not being in a noisy environment
● not listening to music
EXERCISE 5
A. Topic: sports
1) classifying sports
2) giving examples
3) reasons for classification
B.
C.
1. to rely on themselves, to try harder
2. to react more quickly, to think about the actions of another person
3. to reach for a target
Contemporary Topics 21st Century Skills for Academic Success 1, Pearson, 2017
Progressive Skills Listening and Speaking 2, Garnet Publishing, 2012
Progressive Skills Listening and Speaking, 3, Garnet Publishing, 2012
Inside Listening and Speaking 2, Oxford University Press, 2016
Unlock 1 Listening, Speaking, Critical Thinking, Cambridge University Press, 2014
295
SPEAKING SUPPLEMENTARY MATERIAL
Speak. Supp. 2
How to Make Effective Presentations
HOW TO MAKE EFFECTIVE PRESENTATIONS
*How to make effective presentations:
Some useful websites to
prepare your presentations:
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=fzIxD1jXn44 (video)
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=9p1kfkpsYzQ (video)
How to prepare the slides:
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=tEF2vNP3S9A
https://www2.si.mahidol.ac.th/en/wp-content/uploads/2018/04/USEFULENGLISH-PHRASES-FOR-PRESENTATION-Final-Updated-FEB2019-r
evised1.pdf
*How to prepare a power point presentation:
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=XF34-Wu6qWU OR
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=eMhJOPQmChA
(with Turkish explanations)
296
Exercise 1. Watch the first part of the video (up to 1.38) and fill in the checklist.
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=V8eLdbKXGzk
Pre
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
1. Did the presenter greet the audience?
2. Did the presenter introduce himself?
3. Did the presenter introduce the topic?
4. Did the presenter draw the attention of the audience?
5. Did the presenter tell the purpose of the presentation?
6. Did the presenter explain the structure of the presentation?
7. Did the presenter tell how long the presentation would last?
During
8. Did the presenter make eye contact with the audience?
9. Did the presenter use gestures to stress a point?
10. Was he/she confident in himself?
11. Did the presenter use visual aids (pictures, graphs etc) in the presentation?
12. Did the presenter read from his/her notes during the presentation?
13. Did the presenter read from the slides?
Post
14. Did the presenter sum up the main points?
15. Did the presenter thank the audience and invite questions?
297
Exercise 2. Watch the rest of the video and fill in the same checklist with a different colored pen.
Presentations are an important part of university life. It is difficult at first, but it is easy when you understand
the basic structure, the signpost language needed, and begin practicing to help improve your body
language and delivery. Preparing well, with some kind of visual aids, will help you to give an effective presentation
time after time.
1. STRUCTURE
2. LANGUAGE
3. BODY LANGUAGE
4. DELIVERY
5. VISUAL AIDS
1. HOW TO STRUCTURE YOUR PRESENTATION
The general structure of a presentation has an introduction, a main body, and a conclusion.
1. Introduction (Greetings, Purpose, Structure, Timing, About Questions & Answers)
In the introduction to your presentation, you need to:
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
greet the audience
introduce yourself and the topic
draw the audience's attention - ask a question, tell a story
say the purpose of the presentation
outline the structure of the presentation - tell them what you are going to tell them
say how long the presentation will take
say when you will answer the questions (Q&A)
2. Main body (Present data/material, using visual aids, with verbal signposts to help understanding)
In the main body of your presentation you should:
●
●
●
●
present important data/material - be selective
use signpost phrases to help the audience follow your ideas
draw the audience's attention to important points
use visual aids to support your main points
3. Conclusion (Review of purpose, Summary of main points, Final ‘take-away’ message)
The conclusion should give a strong and clear end to your presentation.
In your conclusion you need to:
● review the purpose of your presentation - how did you achieve it?
● give a brief summary of the most important points of the main body - tell them what you told them
● give a final 'take-away' message - what one thing do you want them to remember?
2. USEFUL LANGUAGE FOR PRESENTATIONS
Presentations usually have many visual aids and transitions, so it is useful to learn two or three different phrases for
these functions, but you will only say the purpose once in a presentation.
298
2.1. Introduction
The introduction is an important part of any presentation. In an effective introduction you need to:
●
●
●
●
●
greet the audience
say your purpose
give the structure
give the timing
handle questions
1. Greeting the audience
● Good morning/afternoon, ladies and gentlemen.
● Good morning/afternoon, everyone.
2. Expressing the purpose
● My purpose/ objective/ aim today is...
● I'm here today to discuss / explain / compare / describe / talk about ...
3. Giving the structure
● There are four sections / parts in my presentation.
● To start with / Firstly / First of all, I'd like to look at...
● Then / Secondly,
● Thirdly / Fourthly, ...
● My fourth point is about...
● Finally /Eventually/ Lastly, I’d like to talk about …
4. Giving the timing
● My presentation/ talk will take/continue about 20 minutes.
5. Handling questions
● At the end of my talk, you can ask your questions.
● I can answer your questions at the end of my presentation.
Transitions:
Another key element of any presentation is 'transitioning' (moving on) to a new point. Why is this very important?
Because transitions help the listener understand the structure and follow the main points. Some useful transition
phrases are:
● Let's now move on to/ turn to...
● I now want to go on to ...
● I'd now like to move on to/ turn to...
Other phrases
There are some other useful phrases to give examples and summarize a point or section.
Giving examples
● Let me give you an example...
● such as...
● For example / for instance...
● A good example of this is...
Summarizing
● What I'm trying to say is...
● So far, I've presented...
299
2.2. Concluding
The conclusion, like the introduction, has several functions:
● sum up the main points of the
presentation
● conclude (by giving a message)
Some useful phrases for your conclusion are:
● close (by thanking the audience)
● invite questions
Summing up
● Summing up...
● To summarize...
● So, to sum up...
● In brief,
● All in all,
Concluding
● I'd like to finish by emphasizing...
● In conclusion, I'd like to say...
Closing
● Thank you for your attention/time.
● Thank you (for listening/very much).
Questions
● If you have any questions or comments, I can answer them now.
● Are there any (more) questions?
3. BODY LANGUAGE
Your body shows if you are confident or not during a presentation. Body language, both good and bad, has many
different elements. The most important ones are:
● posture
● movement
● position
● eye contact
Posture
Standing well helps you control your breathing and voice. You will feel better, sound better, and look better. So you
need to:
●
●
●
stand up straight
hold your hands in front of your body or behind your back
avoid putting your hands in your pockets
Position
One of the most important parts is your position! You should look at the audience. So you need to:
●
●
●
face the audience
avoid talking if your back is turned
avoid talking to the whiteboard, PowerPoint screen, or your notes
Movement
Your movement during a presentation is also important. Remember that you are the energy of your presentation, and
you need to move to show that energy to the audience, but you need to be careful not to move too much.
●
●
●
●
●
use gestures to stress important points
use hands to demonstrate or to count (e.g. 'There are three reasons for this...')
avoid moving too much because this is distracting
avoid standing completely still because this is boring
avoid nervous gestures such as touching your hair or glasses
300
Eye contact
Eye contact is important because it creates a relationship between the speaker and the audience. It motivates the
audience to listen, and it helps the speaker to relax.
●
●
●
●
look at the audience
try to see all members of the audience
avoid focusing on just one side of the room or just one person (e.g. the teacher)
avoid talking to your visual aids, notes or slides
Looking confident and feeling confident are not the same. Everyone gets nervous when they have to speak in public.
But not everyone shows it. Use strong body language (good posture, good positioning, confident movement, and good
eye contact) to help you look confident.
4. DELIVERY
How to deliver your presentation well:
To make an effective presentation you need practice. When you practise more, making a presentation gets easier, and
your delivery will be more natural and fluent.
Some factors affect the delivery of your presentation. You need to keep in mind:
● pace
● volume
● emphasis
4.1. Pace
When you are nervous, you probably speak quickly, but your audience needs time to hear and understand your main
points. Therefore, you should speak a little more slowly than usual.
●
●
●
speak a little more slowly if you feel nervous.
also speak more slowly if you are worried about your pronunciation, because this helps you to say the words
more clearly.
say the function words and phrases (such as 'What I want to talk about today' and 'Let's turn now to the next
section') quickly. Content words are more important, and you should say them more slowly.
4.2. Volume
Everyone needs to hear you when you make a presentation. Too loud is better than too quiet: If you are too loud, it
may be annoying, but the audience can still hear you.
●
●
●
speak a little louder than your normal volume
project your voice to the back of the room
avoid speaking too quietly
4.3. Emphasis
When you are speaking, you also need to stress on the important words or ideas. Your audience can easily
understand your main points There are three main ways to add stress to a word:
●
●
●
speak the word more slowly and loudly
pause shortly before and after the word
use stress for important points.
301
5. VISUAL AIDS
It is important to use some visual aids (photos, images,gifs etc.) to support your main points. Some useful phrases for
visuals are:
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Now, I'll show you …
I’d like to show …
The next slide shows ...
As you can see here…
Here we can see…
If we look at this slide…
If you look at the screen, you can see…
This slide shows…
This table/ diagram/ chart/ slide shows…
Let me show you…
Let's (have a) look at…
On the right/ left you can see…
***Below is a checklist for presentation language. Use it to help you prepare it.
Item (I can do)
OK?
greet the audience
state the purpose
give the structure of the presentation
inform the audience about timing and handling questions
refer to visuals using appropriate language
give transitions between sections
sum up and conclude
thank the audience and invite questions
https://www.eapfoundation.com/speaking/presentations/language/
302